BADMINTON

WORLD
FEDERATION

BWF HANDBOOK II
(Laws of Badminton & Regulations)

2011/2012
It is the duty of everyone concerned with badminton
to keep themselves informed about the BWF Statutes

COPYRIGHT
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Permission to reprint material in this book, either wholly

or in part in any form whatsoever, must be obtained from
the Badminton World Federation

Published 1 August 2011 by

BADMINTON WORLD FEDERATION
Unit 17.05, Level 17,
Amoda Building, 22, Jalan Imbi,
55100 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Tel: +603-2141 7155
Fax: +603-2143 7155
E-Mail: [email protected]
Web: www.bwfbadminton.org
 CONTENTS
Laws of Badminton .................................................................................................... 1

Laws of Badminton (Appendix 1-6) .......................................................................... 11

Recommendation to Technical Officials ................................................................... 28

General Competition Regulations ............................................................................. 40

Appendix 1 - International Representation Chart.......................................................... 81
Appendix 2 - Specifications for International Standard Facilities ................................ 82
Appendix 3 – Anti Doping Regulations ........................................................................ 84
Appendix 4 – Players’ Code of Conduct....................................................................... 117
Appendix 5 – Declaration on Integrity of Matches ...................................................... 120
Appendix 6 – World Ranking System .......................................................................... 121
Appendix 7 – Explanation of Adjusted and Notional Ranking .................................... 131
Appendix 8 – Timelines for Tournaments ................................................................... 132
Appendix 9 – Code of Conduct for Coaches & Team Officials .................................. 133
Appendix 10 – BWF Sanction Policy ........................................................................... 135
Appendix 11 – Table of Offences and Penalties ........................................................... 139

Disciplinary Regulations ............................................................................................ 142

Regulations for Thomas Cup & Uber Cup .............................................................. 145

Regulations for Sudirman Cup ................................................................................. 153

Regulations for the Suhandinata Cup ...................................................................... 160

Olympic Qualifying Regulations for London 2012 ................................................. 161

Olympic Games – Regulations for Badminton Competition................................... 165

Olympic Games – Statement of Badminton’s Requirement .................................. 169

Youth Olympic Games Qualifying Regulations for Singapore 2010 ..................... 174

Youth Olympic Games – Regulations for Badminton Competition ...................... 176

Youth Olympic Games – Statement of Badminton’s Requirement ....................... 179

Regulations for World Championships .................................................................... 185

Eligibility & Processing of Entries for World Championships .............................. 189

Regulations for the World Junior Championships – Enopi Cups .......................... 193

Regulations for World Senior Championships ........................................................ 197

Regulations for Superseries ....................................................................................... 200

Annexure A – Distribution of Prize Money .................................................................. 208
Annexure B – Superseries Schedule ............................................................................. 209
Annexure C – Practice Requirements ........................................................................... 210
Annexure D – Player Commitment Regulations ........................................................... 211

Regulations for Grand Prix ....................................................................................... 213

Results
Thomas Cup ................................................................................................................. 218
Uber Cup ...................................................................................................................... 220
Sudirman Cup ............................................................................................................... 222
Suhandinata Cup ........................................................................................................... 225
Olympic Games ............................................................................................................ 227
World Championships .................................................................................................. 229
Enopi Cups (formerly known as Bimantara Cups) ....................................................... 232
World Senior Championships ...................................................................................... 234
World Cup ..................................................................................................................... 237
Grand Prix Finals........................................................................................................... 239
Super Series Masters Finals 2010 ................................................................................. 241
Youth Olympic Games ................................................................................................. 242

Note: Changes are being made regularly so please check the BWF website
(www.bwfbadminton.org) for updated information.
These Statutes remain current until amended by circular to Members or until
publication of the 2012 Statute Book.

DATE OF NEXT ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING

The 73rd Annual General Meeting of the Badminton World Federation will be
held in May 2012 in Hubei, Wuhan, China. A circular will be issued confirming
the exact venue and date.
aLaws
Laws of Badminton

PART II

SECTION 1 A

LAWS OF BADMINTON

DEFINITIONS

Player Any person playing Badminton.

Match The basic contest in Badminton between opposing sides each of one or two players.

Singles A match where there is one player on each of the opposing sides.

Doubles A match where there are two players on each of the opposing sides.

Serving side The side having the right to serve.

Receiving side The side opposing the serving side.

Rally A sequence of one or more strokes starting with the service, until the shuttle ceases to be in
play.

Stroke A forward movement of the player’s racket.

1. COURT AND COURT EQUIPMENT

1.1 The court shall be a rectangle marked out with lines 40 mm wide as shown in Diagram A.

1.2 The lines marking out the court shall be easily distinguishable and preferably be coloured white or
yellow.

1.3 All the lines shall form part of the area which they define.

1.4 The posts shall be 1.55 metres in height from the surface of the court and shall remain vertical when
the net is strained as provided in Law 1.10. The posts or its supports shall not extend into the court.

1.5 The posts shall be placed on the doubles side lines as in Diagram A irrespective of whether singles
or doubles is being played.

1.6 The net shall be made of fine cord of dark colour and even thickness with a mesh of not less than l5
mm and not more than 20 mm.

1.7 The net shall be 760 mm in depth and at least 6.1 metres wide.

1.8 The top of the net shall be edged with a 75 mm white tape doubled over a cord or cable running
through the tape. This tape shall rest upon the cord or cable.

1.9 The cord or cable shall be stretched firmly, flush with the top of the posts.

1.10 The top of the net from the surface of the court shall be 1.524 metres at the centre of the court and
1.55 metres over the side lines for doubles.

1.11 There shall be no gaps between the ends of the net and the posts. If necessary, the full depth of the
net at the ends shall be tied to the posts.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

1
 Lawsa
Laws of Badminton

DIAGRAM A

Note: (1) Diagonal length of full court = 14.723m

(2) Court as shown above can be used for both singles and doubles play
(3) ** Optional testing marks as shown in Diagram B.

2. SHUTTLE

2.1 The shuttle shall be made of natural and / or synthetic materials. From whatever material the shuttle
is made, the flight characteristics generally shall be similar to those produced by a natural feathered
shuttle with a cork base covered by a thin layer of leather.

2.2 Feathered Shuttle

2.2.1 The shuttle shall have 16 feathers fixed in the base.

2.2.2 The feathers shall have a uniform length between 62 mm to 70 mm when measured from
the tip to the top of the base.

2.2.3 The tips of the feathers shall lie on a circle with a diameter from 58 mm to 68 mm.

2.2.4 The feathers shall be fastened firmly with thread or other suitable material.

2.2.5 The base shall be 25 mm to 28 mm in diameter and rounded on the bottom.

2.2.6 The shuttle shall weigh from 4.74 to 5.50 grams.

2.3 Non-Feathered Shuttle

2.3.1 The skirt, or simulation of feathers in synthetic materials, shall replace natural feathers.

2.3.2 The base shall be as described in Law 2.2.5.

2.3.3 Measurements and weight shall be as in Laws 2.2.2, 2.2.3 and 2.2.6. However, because of
the difference in the specific gravity and other properties of synthetic materials in
comparison with feathers, a variation of up to 10 per cent shall be acceptable.

2.4 Subject to there being no variation in the general design, speed and flight of the shuttle,
modifications in the above specifications may be made with the approval of the Member Association
concerned, in places where atmospheric conditions due to either altitude or climate make the standard
shuttle unsuitable.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

2
aLaws
Laws of Badminton

3. TESTING A SHUTTLE FOR SPEED

3.1 To test a shuttle, a player shall use a full underhand stroke which makes contact with the shuttle
over the back boundary line. The shuttle shall be hit at an upward angle and in a direction parallel to
the side lines.

3.2 A shuttle of correct speed will land not less than 530 mm and not more than 990 mm short of the
other back boundary line as in Diagram B.

DIAGRAM B

4. RACKET

4.1 The racket shall be a frame not exceeding 680 mm in overall length and 230 mm in overall width
consisting of the main parts described in Laws 4.1.1 to 4.1.5 as illustrated in Diagram C.

4.1.1 The handle is the part of the racket intended to be gripped by a player.

4.1.2 The stringed area is the part of the racket with which it is intended that a player hits the
shuttle.

4.1.3 The head bounds the stringed area.

4.1.4 The shaft connects the handle to the head (subject to Law 4.1.5).

4.1.5 The throat (if present) connects the shaft to the head.

DIAGRAM C

frame

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

3
 Lawsa
Laws of Badminton

4.2 The stringed area:

4.2.1 shall be flat and consist of a pattern of crossed strings either alternately interlaced or
bonded where they cross. The stringing pattern shall be generally uniform and, in particular,
not less dense in the centre than in any other area; and

4.2.2 shall not exceed 280 mm in overall length and 220 mm in overall width. However, the
strings may extend into an area which otherwise would be the throat, provided that:

4.2.2.1 the width of the extended stringed area does not exceed 35 mm; and

4.2.2.2 the overall length of the stringed area does not then exceed 330 mm.

4.3 The racket:

4.3.1 shall be free of attached objects and protrusions, other than those used solely and
specifically to limit or prevent wear and tear, or vibration, or to distribute weight, or to
secure the handle by cord to the player’s hand, and which are reasonable in size and
placement for such purposes; and

4.3.2 shall be free of any device that makes it possible for a player to change materially the shape
of the racket.

5. EQUIPMENT COMPLIANCE

The Badminton World Federation shall rule on any question of whether any racket, shuttle or equipment or
any prototype used in the playing of Badminton complies with the specifications. Such ruling may be
undertaken on the Federation’s initiative or on application by any party with a bona fide interest, including
any player, technical official, equipment manufacturer or Member Association or member thereof.

6. TOSS

6.1 Before play commences, a toss shall be conducted and the side winning the toss shall exercise the
choice in either Law 6.1.1 or 6.1.2:

6.1.1 to serve or receive first;

6.1.2 to start play at one end of the court or the other.

6.2 The side losing the toss shall then exercise the remaining choice.

7. SCORING SYSTEM

7.1 A match shall consist of the best of three games, unless otherwise arranged (Part II Section 1B
Appendix 2 and 3).

7.2 A game shall be won by the side which first scores 21 points, except as provided in Law 7.4 and 7.5.

7.3 The side winning a rally shall add a point to its score. A side shall win a rally, if the opposing side
commits a ‘fault’ or the shuttle ceases to be in play because it touches the surface of the court inside
the opponent’s court.

7.4 If the score becomes 20-all, the side which gains a two point lead first, shall win that game.

7.5 If the score becomes 29-all, the side scoring the 30th point shall win that game.

7.6 The side winning a game shall serve first in the next game.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

4
aLaws
Laws of Badminton

8. CHANGE OF ENDS

8.1 Players shall change ends:

8.1.1 at the end of the first game;

8.1.2 at the end of the second game, if there is to be a third game; and

8.1.3 in the third game when a side first scores 11 points.

8.2 If the ends are not changed as indicated in Law 8.1, it shall be done so as soon as the mistake is
discovered and when the shuttle is not in play. The existing score shall stand.

9. SERVICE

9.1 In a correct service:

9.1.1 neither side shall cause undue delay to the delivery of the service once the server and the
receiver are ready for the service. On completion of the backward movement of server’s
racket head, any delay in the start of the service (Law 9.2), shall be considered to be an
undue delay;

9.1.2 the server and the receiver shall stand within diagonally opposite service courts (Diagram
A) without touching the boundary lines of these service courts;

9.1.3 some part of both feet of the server and the receiver shall remain in contact with the surface
of the court in a stationary position from the start of the service (Law 9.2) until the service
is delivered (Law 9.3);

9.1.4 the server’s racket shall initially hit the base of the shuttle;

9.1.5 the whole shuttle shall be below the server’s waist at the instant of being hit by the server’s
racket. The waist shall be considered to be an imaginary line round the body, level with the
lowest part of the server’s bottom rib;

9.1.6 the shaft of the server’s racket at the instant of hitting the shuttle shall be pointing in a
downward direction;

9.1.7 the movement of the server’s racket shall continue forwards from the start of the service
(Law 9.2) until the service is delivered (Law 9.3);

9.1.8 the flight of the shuttle shall be upwards from the server’s racket to pass over the net so
that, if not intercepted, it shall land in the receiver’s service court (i. e. on or within the
boundary lines); and

9.1.9 in attempting to serve, the server shall not miss the shuttle.

9.2 Once the players are ready for the service, the first forward movement of the server’s racket head
shall be the start of the service.

9.3 Once started (Law 9.2), the service is delivered when the shuttle is hit by the server’s racket or, in
attempting to serve, the server misses the shuttle.

9.4 The server shall not serve before the receiver is ready. However, the receiver shall be considered to
have been ready if a return of the service is attempted.

9.5 In doubles, during the delivery of service (Law 9.2, 9.3), the partners may take up any positions
within their respective courts, which do not unsight the opposing server or receiver.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

5
 Lawsa
Laws of Badminton

10. SINGLES

10.1 Serving and receiving courts

10.1.1 The players shall serve from, and receive in, their respective right service courts when the
server has not scored or has scored an even number of points in that game.

10.1.2 The players shall serve from, and receive in, their respective left service courts when the
server has scored an odd number of points in that game.

10.2 Order of play and position on court

In a rally, the shuttle may be hit by the server and the receiver alternately, from any position on that
player’s side of the net, until the shuttle ceases to be in play (Law 15).

10.3 Scoring and serving

10.3.1 If the server wins a rally (Law 7.3), the server shall score a point. The server shall then
serve again from the alternate service court.

10.3.2 If the receiver wins a rally (Law 7.3), the receiver shall score a point. The receiver shall
then become the new server.

11. DOUBLES

11.1 Serving and receiving courts

11.1.1 A player of the serving side shall serve from the right service court when the serving side
has not scored or has scored an even number of points in that game.

11.1.2 A player of the serving side shall serve from the left service court when the serving side
has scored an odd number of points in that game.

11.1.3 The player of the receiving side who served last shall stay in the same service court from
where he served last. The reverse pattern shall apply to the receiver’s partner.

11.1.4 The player of the receiving side standing in the diagonally opposite service court to the
server shall be the receiver.

11.1.5 The players shall not change their respective service courts until they win a point when
their side is serving.

11.1.6 Service in any turn of serving shall be delivered from the service court corresponding to the
serving side’s score, except as provided in Law 12.

11.2 Order of play and position on court

After the service is returned, in a rally, the shuttle may be hit by either player of the serving side and
either player of the receiving side alternately, from any position on that player’s side of the net, until
the shuttle ceases to be in play (Law 15).

11.3 Scoring and serving

11.3.1 If the serving side wins a rally (Law 7.3), the serving side shall score a point. The server
shall then serve again from the alternate service court.

11.3.2 If the receiving side wins a rally (Law 7.3), the receiving side shall score a point. The
receiving side shall then become the new serving side.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

6
aLaws
Laws of Badminton

11.4 Sequence of serving

In any game, the right to serve shall pass consecutively:

11.4.1 from the initial server who started the game from the right service court

11.4.2 to the partner of the initial receiver.

11.4.3 to the partner of the initial server

11.4.4 to the initial receiver,

11.4.5 to the initial server and so on.

11.5 No player shall serve or receive out of turn, or receive two consecutive services in the same game,
except as provided in Law 12.

11.6 Either player of the winning side may serve first in the next game, and either player of the losing
side may receive first in the next game.

12. SERVICE COURT ERRORS

12.1 A service court error has been made when a player:

12.1.1 has served or received out of turn; or

12.1.2 has served or received from the wrong service court;

12.2 If a service court error is discovered, the error shall be corrected and the existing score shall stand.

13. FAULTS

It shall be a ‘fault’:

13.1 if a service is not correct (Law 9.1);

13.2 if, in service, the shuttle:

13.2.1 is caught on the net and remains suspended on its top;

13.2.2 after passing over the net, is caught in the net; or

13.2.3 is hit by the receiver’s partner;

13.3 if in play, the shuttle:

13.3.1 lands outside the boundaries of the court (i. e. not on or within the boundary lines);

13.3.2 passes through or under the net;

13.3.3 fails to pass over the net;

13.3.4 touches the ceiling or side walls;

13.3.5 touches the person or dress of a player;

13.3.6 touches any other object or person outside the court;

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

7
 Lawsa
Laws of Badminton

(Where necessary on account of the structure of the building, the local badminton authority
may, subject to the right of veto of its Member Association, make bye-laws dealing with
cases in which a shuttle touches an obstruction).

13.3.7 is caught and held on the racket and then slung during the execution of a stroke;

13.3.8 is hit twice in succession by the same player. However, a shuttle hitting the head and the
stringed area of the racket in one stroke shall not be a ‘fault’;

13.3.9 is hit by a player and the player’s partner successively; or

13.3.10 touches a player’s racket and does not travel towards the opponent’s court;

13.4 if, in play, a player:

13.4.1 touches the net or its supports with racket, person or dress;

13.4.2 invades an opponent’s court over the net with racket or person except that the striker may
follow the shuttle over the net with the racket in the course of a stroke after the initial point
of contact with the shuttle is on the striker’s side of the net;

13.4.3 invades an opponent’s court under the net with racket or person such that an opponent is
obstructed or distracted; or

13.4.4 obstructs an opponent, i.e. prevents an opponent from making a legal stroke where the
shuttle is followed over the net;

13.4.5 deliberately distracts an opponent by any action such as shouting or making gestures;

13.5 if a player is guilty of flagrant, repeated or persistent offences under Law 16.

14. LETS

14.1 ‘Let’ shall be called by the umpire, or by a player (if there is no umpire), to halt play.

14.2 It shall be a ‘let”, if:

14.2.1 the server serves before the receiver is ready (Law 9.4);

14.2.2 during service, the receiver and the server are both faulted;

14.2.3 after the service is returned, the shuttle is:

14.2.3.1 caught on the net and remains suspended on its top, or

14.2.3.2 after passing over the net is caught in the net;

14.2.4 during play, the shuttle disintegrates and the base completely separates from the rest of the
shuttle;

14.2.5 in the opinion of the umpire, play is disrupted or a player of the opposing side is distracted
by a coach;

14.2.6 a line judge is unsighted and the umpire is unable to make a decision; or

14.2.7 any unforeseen or accidental situation has occurred.

14.3 When a ‘let’ occurs, play since the last service shall not count and the player who served last shall
serve again.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

8
aLaws
Laws of Badminton

15. SHUTTLE NOT IN PLAY

A shuttle is not in play when:

15.1 it strikes the net or post and starts to fall towards the surface of the court on the striker’s side of the
net;

15.2 it hits the surface of the court; or

15.3 a ‘fault’ or a ‘let’ has occurred.

16. CONTINUOUS PLAY, MISCONDUCT & PENALTIES

16.1 Play shall be continuous from the first service until the match is concluded, except as allowed in
Laws 16.2 and 16.3.

16.2 Intervals:

16.2.1 not exceeding 60 seconds during each game when the leading score reaches 11 points; and

16.2.2 not exceeding 120 seconds between the first and second game, and between the second and
third game shall be allowed in all matches.

(For a televised match, the Referee may decide before the match that intervals as in Law 16.2 are
mandatory and of fixed duration).

16.3 Suspension of play

16.3.1 When necessitated by circumstances not within the control of the players, the umpire may
suspend play for such a period as the umpire may consider necessary.

16.3.2 Under special circumstances the Referee may instruct the umpire to suspend play.

16.3.3 If play is suspended, the existing score shall stand and play shall be resumed from that
point.

16.4 Delay in play

16.4.1 Under no circumstances shall play be delayed to enable a player to recover strength or
wind or to receive advice.

16.4.2 The umpire shall be the sole judge of any delay in play.

16.5 Advice and leaving the court

16.5.1 Only when the shuttle is not in play (Law 15), shall a player be permitted to receive advice
during a match.

16.5.2 No player shall leave the court during a match without the umpire’s permission, except
during the intervals as described in Law 16.2.

16.6 A player shall not:

16.6.1 deliberately cause delay in, or suspension of, play;

16.6.2 deliberately modify or damage the shuttle in order to change its speed or its flight;

16.6.3 behave in an offensive manner; or

16.6.4 be guilty of misconduct not otherwise covered by the Laws of Badminton.

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

9
 Lawsa
Laws of Badminton

16.7 Administration of breach

16.7.1 The umpire shall administer any breach of Law 16.4, 16.5 or 16.6 by:

16.7.1.1 issuing a warning to the offending side;

16.7.1.2 faulting the offending side, if previously warned. Two such faults by a side
shall be considered to be a persistent offence; or

16.7.2 in cases of flagrant offence, persistent offences or breach of Law 16.2 the umpire shall fault
the offending side and report the offending side immediately to the Referee, who shall have
the power to disqualify the offending side from the match.

17. OFFICIALS AND APPEALS

17.1 The Referee shall be in overall charge of the tournament or event of which a match forms part.

17.2 The umpire, where appointed, shall be in charge of the match, the court and its immediate surrounds.
The umpire shall report to the Referee.

17.3 The service judge shall call service faults made by the server should they occur (Law 9.1).

17.4 A line judge shall indicate whether a shuttle landed ‘in’ or ‘out’ on the line(s) assigned.

17.5 An official’s decision shall be final on all points of fact for which that official is responsible except
that if, in the opinion of the umpire, it is beyond reasonable doubt that a line judge has clearly made
a wrong call, the umpire shall overrule the decision of the line judge.

17.6 An umpire shall:

17.6.1 uphold and enforce the Laws of Badminton and, especially, call a ‘fault’ or a ‘let’ should
either occur;

17.6.2 give a decision on any appeal regarding a point of dispute, if made before the next service
is delivered;

17.6.3 ensure players and spectators are kept informed of the progress of the match;

17.6.4 appoint or replace line judges or a service judge in consultation with the Referee;

17.6.5 where another court official is not appointed, arrange for that official’s duties to be carried
out;

17.6.6 where an appointed official is unsighted, carry out that official’s duties or play a ‘let’;

17.6.7 record and report to the Referee all matters relating to Law 16; and

17.6.8 refer to the Referee all unsatisfied appeals on questions of law only. (Such appeals must be
made before the next service is delivered or, if at the end of the match, before the side that
appeals has left the court.)

Part II - Section 1A
Updated: 1st January, 2009

10
aLaws
Laws - Variations In Court And Equipment

PART II

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 1

VARIATIONS IN COURT AND EQUIPMENT

1. Where it is not practicable to have posts on the sidelines, some method shall be used to indicate the
position of the sidelines where they pass under the net, e.g. by the use of thin posts or strips of material 40
mm wide, fixed to the side lines and rising vertically to the net cord.

2. A court may be marked out for singles only as shown in Diagram E. The back boundary lines become also
the long service lines and the posts or the strips of material representing them shall be placed on the side
lines.

3. The top of the net from the surface of the court shall be 1.524 metres at the centre of the court and 1.55
metres over the side lines.

DIAGRAM E

Note: (1) Diagonal length of full court =14.366m

(2) Court shown above is used for singles play only

** Optional testing marks for singles court

Part II – Section 1 B
Appendix 1
Updated: 1st January, 2009

11
 Lawsa
Laws - Handicap Matches

PART II

SECTION 1 B

APPENDIX 2
HANDICAP MATCHES

In handicap matches, the following variations in the Laws apply:

1. No variation shall be permitted in the number of points required to win a game.

2. Law 8.1.3 shall be amended to read:

‘in the third game, and in a match of one game, when one side has scored half the total number of points
required to win the game (the next higher number being taken in case of fractions)’.

Part II – Section 1 B
Appendix 2
Updated: 1st January, 2009

12
aLaws
Laws - Other Scoring Systems

PART II

SECTION 1 B

APPENDIX 3
OTHER SCORING SYSTEMS

It is permissible to play by prior arrangement, either.

1. one game of 21 points, or

2. the best of 3 games of 15 points in case of doubles and men’s singles and 11 points in case of women’s
singles

In case of 1 above, the following variation shall apply to the Laws of Badminton:

8. CHANGE OF ENDS

8.1. In a one game match, players shall change ends when a side first scores 11 points.

In case of 2 above, the following variation shall apply to the Laws of Badminton:

7. SCORING SYSTEM

7.1 A match shall consist of the best of three games, unless otherwise arranged (Appendix 2 and 3).

7.2 In doubles and men’s singles a game shall be won by the side which first scores 15 points, except as
provided in Law 7.5.

7.3 In women’s singles a game shall be won by the side which first scores 11 points, except as provided
in Law 7.5.

7.4 Only the serving side on winning a rally shall add a point to its score (Law 10.3 or 11.3). A side
shall win a rally, if the opposing side commits a ‘fault’ or the shuttle ceases to be in play because it
touches the surface of the court inside the opponent’s court.

7.5 If the score becomes 14-all (10-all in women’s singles), the side which first scored 14 (10 in
women’s singles) points shall exercise the choice in either Law 7.5.1 or 7.5.2:

7.5.1 to continue the game to 15 (11) points, i.e. not to ‘set’ the game; or

7.5.2 to ‘set’ the game to 17 (13) points.

7.6 The side winning a game shall serve first in the next game.

8. CHANGE OF ENDS

8.1 Players shall change ends:

8.1.1 at the end of the first game;

8.1.2 at the end of the second game, if there is to be a third game; and

8.1.3 in the third game when a side first scores:

8.1.3.1 6 points in a game of 11 points; or

8.1.3.2 8 points in a game of 15 points.

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 3
Updated: 1st January, 2009

13
 Lawsa
Laws - Other Scoring Systems

8.2 If the ends are not changed as indicated in Law 8.1, it shall be done so as soon as the mistake is
discovered and when the shuttle is not in play. The existing score shall stand.

10. SINGLES

10.1 Serving and receiving courts

10.1.1. The players shall serve from, and receive in, their respective right service courts when the
server has not scored or has scored an even number of points in that game.

10.1.2. The players shall serve from, and receive in, their respective left service courts when the
server has scored an odd number of points in that game.

10.2 Order of play and position on court

In a rally, the shuttle may be hit by the server and the receiver alternately, from any position on that
player’s side of the net, until the shuttle ceases to be in play (Law 15).

10.3 Scoring and serving

10.3.1. If the server wins a rally (Law 7.4), the server shall score a point. The server shall then
serve again from the alternate service court.

10.3.2. If the receiver wins a rally (Law 7.4), the server shall lose the right to continue serving and
the receiver shall then become the server, with no point scored by either player.

11. DOUBLES

11.1 Serving and receiving courts

11.1.1 At the start of a game, and each time a side gains the right to serve, the service shall be
delivered from the right service court

11.1.2 The player who serves or receives at the start of any game shall serve from, or receive in,
the right service court when that player’s side has not scored or has scored an even number
of points in that game.

11.1.3 The player who serves or receives at the start of any game shall serve from, or receive in,
the left service court when that player’s side has scored an odd number of points in that
game.

11.1.4 The reverse pattern shall apply to the partners.

11.1.5 The player of the receiving side standing in the diagonally opposite service court to the
server shall be the receiver.

11.1.6 Service in any turn of serving shall be delivered from alternate service courts, except as
provided in Laws 12 and 14.

11.2 Order of play and position on court

After the service is returned, in a rally, the shuttle may be hit by either player of the serving side and
either player of the receiving side alternately, from any position on that player’s side of the net, until
the shuttle ceases to be in play (Law 15).

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 3
Updated: 1st January, 2009

14
aLaws
Laws - Other Scoring Systems

11.3 Scoring and serving

11.3.1 If the serving side wins a rally (Law 7.4), the serving side shall score a point. The server
shall then serve again.

11.3.2 If the receiving side wins a rally (Law 7.4), the server shall lose the right to continue
serving, with no point scored by either side.

11.4 Sequence of serving

In any game, the right to serve shall pass consecutively:

11.4.1 from the initial server,

11.4.2 to the initial receiver,

11.4.3 to the partner of the initial receiver,

11.4.4 to the player of the initial serving side who is standing in the right service court (Law
11.1.2),

11.4.5 to the partner of the player stated in 14.4.4 and so on.

11.5 No player shall serve or receive out of turn, or receive two consecutive services in the same game,
except as provided in Laws 12 and 14.

11.6 Either player of the winning side may serve first in the next game, and either player of the losing
side may receive first in the next game.

12. SERVICE COURT ERRORS

12.1 A service court error has been made when a player:

12.1.1 has served or received out of turn; or

12.1.2 has served or received from the wrong service court;

12.2 If a service court error is discovered before the next service is delivered:

12.2.1 if one side made the error and won the rally, it shall be a ‘let’;

12.2.2 if one side made the error and lost the rally, the error shall not be corrected;

12.2.3 if both sides made an error, it shall be a ‘let’.

12.3 If there is a ‘let’ because of a service court error, the rally shall be replayed with the error corrected.

12.4 If a service court error is discovered after the next service has been delivered, the error shall not be
corrected and the play in that game shall proceed without changing the players’ new service courts
(nor, when relevant, the new order of serving).

16. CONTINUOUS PLAY, MISCONDUCT & PENALTIES

16.2 Intervals:

16.2.1 not exceeding 90 seconds between the first and second game; and

16.2.2 not exceeding 5 minutes between the second and third game shall be allowed in all matches.

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 3
Updated: 1st January, 2009

15
 Lawsa
Laws - Vocabulary

PART II

SECTION 1 B

APPENDIX 4
VOCABULARY

This Appendix lists the standard vocabulary that shall be used by the umpire to control a match.

1. Announcements and Introductions

1.1 ‘Ladies and Gentlemen:

1.1.1 on my right, ...... (player name), ...... (country name), and on my left, ...... (player name), ......
(country name); or

1.1.2 on my right, ...... (player names), ...... (country name), and on my left ….. (player names), ......
(country name)

1.1.3 on my right, ….. (country / team name), represented by ….. (player name), and on my
left, ….. (country/team name), represented by ….. (player name); or

1.1.4 on my right, ….. (country / team name), represented by ….. (player names), and on my
left, ….. (country / team name), represented by ….. (player names)

1.2.1 ...... (player name) to serve; or

1.2.2 ...... (country/team name) to serve;

1.3.1 ...... (player name) to serve to ...... (player name);

1.3.2 ...... (player name) to ...... (player name);’

To be used in the order shown in the table below, as appropriate:

Event Singles Doubles

Individual 1.1.1, 1.2.1 1.1.2, 1.3.1
Team 1.1.3, 1.2.2 1.1.4, 1.2.2, 1.3.2

2. Start of match and calling the score

2.1 ‘Love all; play.’

2.2 ‘Service over’

2.3 ‘Interval’

2.4 ‘Court ... ’ (number) ‘20 seconds’

2.5 ‘... game point ... ’ e.g. ‘20 game point 6’, or ‘29 game point 28’

2.6 ‘... match point ... ’ e.g. ‘20 match point 8’, or ‘29 match point 28’

2.7 ‘... game point all’ e.g. ‘29 game point all’

2.8 ‘First game won by ...... ’ (in team event, use name of country / team) ‘ ... ’ (score)

2.9 ‘Second game’

2.10 ‘… match point all’ e.g. ‘29 match point all’

Part II - Section 1B
Appendix 4
Updated: 1st January, 2009

16
aLaws
Laws - Vocabulary

2.11 ‘Second game won by ...... ’ (in team event, use name of country / team) ‘ ... ’ (score)

2.12 ‘One game all’

2.13 ‘Final Game’

3. General Communication

3.1 ‘Choose your end’

3.2 ‘Are you ready?’

3.3 ‘You missed the shuttle during service’

3.4 ‘Receiver not ready’

3.5 ‘You attempted the return of service’

3.6 ‘You must not influence the line judge’

3.7 ‘Come here’

3.8 ‘Is the shuttle OK?’

3.9 ‘Test the shuttle’

3.10 ‘Change the shuttle’

3.11 ‘Do not change the shuttle’

3.12 ‘Play a let’

3.13 ‘Change ends’

3.14 ‘You did not change the ends’

3.15 ‘You served from the wrong service court’

3.16 ‘You served out of turn’

3.17 ‘You received out of turn’

3.18 ‘You must not interfere with the shuttle’

3.19 ‘The shuttle touched you’

3.20 ‘You touched the net’

3.21 ‘You are standing in the wrong service court’

3.22 ‘You distracted your opponent’

3.23 ‘Your coach distracted your opponent’

3.24 ‘You hit the shuttle twice’

3.25 ‘You slung the shuttle’

3.26 ‘You invaded your opponent’s court’

3.27 ‘You obstructed your opponent’

Part II - Section 1B
Appendix 4
Updated: 1st January, 2009

17
 Lawsa
Laws - Vocabulary

3.28 ‘Are you retiring?’

3.29 ‘Fault – receiver’

3.30 ‘Service fault called’

3.31 ‘Service delayed, play must be continuous’

3.32 ‘Play is suspended’

3.33 ‘ ...... ’ (name of player) ‘warning for misconduct’

3.34 ‘ ...... ’ (name of player) ‘fault for misconduct’

3.35 ‘Fault’

3.36 ‘Out’

3.37 ‘Line judge – signal’

3.38 ‘Service judge – signal’

3.39 ‘Correction IN’

3.40 ‘Correction OUT’

3.41 ‘Wipe the court’

4. End of Match

4.1 ‘Match won by ...... ’ (name of player/team) ‘...’ (scores)

4.2 ‘...... ’ (name of player/team) ‘retired’

4.3 ‘...... ’ (name of player/team) ‘disqualified’

5. Scoring

0 - Love 11 - Eleven 22 - Twenty two

1 - One 12 - Twelve 23 - Twenty three
2 - Two 13 - Thirteen 24 - Twenty four
3 - Three 14 - Fourteen 25 - Twenty five
4 - Four 15 - Fifteen 26 - Twenty six
5 - Five 16 - Sixteen 27 - Twenty seven
6 - Six 17 - Seventeen 28 - Twenty eight
7 - Seven 18 - Eighteen 29 - Twenty nine
8 - Eight 19 - Nineteen 30 - Thirty
9 - Nine 20 - Twenty
10 - Ten 21 - Twenty one

Part II - Section 1B
Appendix 4
Updated: 1st January, 2009

18
aLaws
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

PART II

SECTION 1 B

APPENDIX 5
(as of 1 August, 2004)

BADMINTON FOR DISABLED PEOPLE

The following amended Laws of Badminton are applicable to various categories of disabled people as listed.

*
IBAD CLASSIFICATIONS

The system is a functional classification system for all physical disabilities. The minimum disabilities
described hereafter may be increased, but not decreased without the approval of the IBAD Annual General
Meeting. Any such changes are not official unless printed as an update to the IBAD manual. Further details
can be obtained from IBAD (see “Members” section for contact details).

WHEELCHAIR CLASS 1 – BMW 1

Tetraplegic player with lesion above C8 minimal motor losses maybe seen in the playing hand, but these
losses are not significant. Slight changes of trunk position are secured by the free hand holding, pushing or
propping the wheelchair or thigh. Lower part of the trunk keeps in contact with the back of the seat. Backward
movements of the arm are reduced because of missing trunk rotation. Deliberate movements of the wheelchair
are mostly disadvantageous.

CPs:
Severe diplegia.
Minimal limitations in control of upper extremities.
Moderate trunk balance disorders.
Severe Spasticity in lower extremities (Spasticity grade scale for muscle tone: 4).

WHEELCHAIR CLASS 2 – BMW 2

Paraplegic Players with the lesion above T12. Slight changes of trunk position are secured by the free hand
holding, pushing or propping the wheelchair or thigh. Lower part of the trunk keeps in contact with the back of
the seat. Backward movements of the arm are reduced because of missing trunk rotation. Deliberate
movements of the wheelchair are mostly disadvantageous.

CPs:
Moderate diplegia.
Moderate disorders in trunk balance.
Moderate spasticity in lower extremities (Spasticity grade scale for muscle tone: 3).

WHEELCHAIR CLASS 3 – BMW 3

Paraplegic Players with the lesion L1 and below.

Minimal disability is lost of muscular power at least 20 points in one or both lower limbs.

Sitting upright, normal arm and trunk movements can be seen. Trunk movements to increase reach are only
possible by using free arm to prop, hold or push at wheelchair or thigh. Deliberate movements of the
wheelchair are possible. When starting with one hand forward trunk can not lean forward optimally. Lateral
movements are not possible without assistance from the free arm.

CPs:
Slight diplegia.
Minimal trunk balance problems.
Slight spasticity in lower extremities.
Cannot play standing.
*
International Badminton Association for Disabled Players
Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

19
 Lawsa
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

STANDING BELOW WAIST CLASS 1 – BMSTL 1

Very severe impairments of legs (poor static and dynamic balance)

1. severe polio of both legs

2. single AK plus single BK (below knee amputation)
3. incomplete spinal cord injury of comparable profile
4. severe diplegia
5. severe hemiplegia with playing arm included

STANDING BELOW WAIST CLASS 2 – BMSTL 2

The player is standing and has a reduction of muscular power of at least 20 points in one or both lower limbs or
equivalent disability.

Profile - Moderate impairments of the legs

1. one non-functional leg
2. polio on one leg
3. single AK
4. stiff hip and stiff knee (together)
5. hip luxation with visible shortening
6. two moderate legs
7. polio
8. double BK
9. incomplete Spinal Cord Injury (SCI), spina bifida level S1

STANDING BELOW WAIST CLASS 3 – BMSTL 3

The player is standing and has a reduction of muscular power of 10 to 19 points in one or both lower limbs or
equivalent disability.

Very mild impairments in legs

1. single stiff ankle
2. amputation of forefoot through all metatarsals (minimal 1/3 of foot)
3. hip subluxation
4. Restriction movement of one hip or knee or ankle
5. Polio: loss of at least 10 points in muscles strength in one or both lower extremity

STANDING ABOVE WAIST CLASS 1 – BMSTU 4

Severe impairments of non-playing arm

Minimal disability: loss of 50 points
or
Single AE (Above or through elbow joint amputation)
Brachial plexus lesion with paralysis of the whole arm
Shortening of the arm through the elbow without a functional hand.
And comparable disabilities

The playing arm has a considerable loss of speed during maximal swing action; caused by loss of muscle
strength, range of movement or co-ordination problems. The loss of speed must be in the hitting direction.

• Muscle strength is not more than grade 4 on the MRC scale in the hitting direction (forehand or backhand)
of one of the participating joints
• The range of movement’s loss of 30-50% for ante-flexion of the shoulder, extension of the elbow,
pronation of the forearm.
• In co-ordination as in spastic monoplegia and athethosis a slight degree.
• And comparable disabilities.

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

20
aLaws
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

STANDING ABOVE WAIST CLASS 2 – BMSTU 5

Minimal disability: loss of 30 points

or Severe to moderate impairment of NON-PLAYING ARM
single BE (below elbow but through or above wrist joint)
brachial plexus lesion with some residual functions
dysmelia or similar disabilities comparable with single BE

THE PLAYING ARM

Very mild impairment of playing arm

finger amputation/dysmelia with functional grip
stiff wrist with functional grip
weakness of the hand or joints of the arm
Comparable impairment profile

LES AUTRES (OTHER LOCOMOTOR DISABILITIES) BASED

The handicap must be permanent (Stationary or Progressive).

BACK AND TORSO

Severely reduced mobility of a permanent nature and / or as in scoliosis measuring over 60 degrees curve as
measured by the Cobb method. X – Ray proof is necessary.

DWARFS

The maximum height for a dwarf to meet minimum disability is 142 centimeters for male and 136 centimeters
for female. The athlete must exhibit other disabilities besides being of small stature therefore excluding a
pituitary dwarf.

NOTES

1. Competitors with progressive locomotive disabilities e.g. Multiple Sclerosis, must be classified at the start
of each sanctioned competition.

2. Example of conditions not eligible: persons with severely reduced mental capacity. Further persons with
heart, chest, abdominal, skin, ear and eye diseases without locomotor disability.

COMPETING IN A CLASS WITH LESSER DISABILITY

When an athlete chooses to compete in a class with less disabled athletes he/she must stay in the same class for
that particular competition.

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

21
 Lawsa
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

BADMINTON FOR DISABLED PEOPLE: AMENDMENTS TO LAWS OF BADMINTON

1. COURT AND COURT EQUIPMENT

1.1 The court shall be a rectangle laid out with lines 40mm wide as in Diagram A in the Laws of
Badminton. The following courts shall be used for the disabled:

1.1.1 Wheelchair Badminton: the courts for singles and doubles shall be as shown in Diagrams F,
G, H and I, respectively.

1.1.2 Standing Badminton (below waist classes 1 and 2): the court for singles shall be as shown
in Diagram J.

1.4 The posts shall be the following heights from the surface of the court and shall remain vertical when
the net is strained as provided in Law 1.10:

1.4.1 Wheelchair Badminton: 1.40 metres.

1.4.2 Standing Badminton: 1.55 metres.

1.10 The top of the net from the surface of the court shall be the following heights at the centre of the
court and over the side lines for doubles, respectively:

1.10.1 Wheelchair Badminton: 1.372 and 1.40 metres.

1.10.2 Standing Badminton: 1.524 and 1.55 metres.

9. SERVICE

9.1 In a correct service:

9.1.2 the server and receiver shall stand within diagonally opposite service courts or be within
the respective service courts without touching the boundary lines of these service courts;

9.1.3 [This Law applies to Standing Badminton, above body disability only.] in Wheelchair
Badminton: at the start of the service the wheels of both the server and the receiver must be
stationary.

9.1.5 in Standing Badminton the whole shuttle shall be below the server’s waist at the instant of
being hit by the server’s racket; in Sitting and Wheelchair Badminton, the whole shuttle
shall be below the server’s armpit at the instant of being hit by the server’s racket;

9.7 In doubles for Standing Badminton the partners may take up any positions their respective courts
which do not unsight the opposing server or receiver and in doubles for Sitting and Wheelchair
Badminton, the partners shall be in the adjoining service court.

10. SINGLES

10.1 Serving and receiving courts

10.1.1 The players shall serve from, and receive in, their respective service courts.

11. DOUBLES

11.1 Serving and receiving courts for Standing Badminton

11.1.1 In Standing Badminton, a player of the serving side shall serve from the right service court
at the start of the game or when the serving side has not scored or has scored an even
number of points in that game.
Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

22
aLaws
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

11.1.2 In Standing Badminton, a player of the serving side shall serve from the left service court
when the serving side has scored an odd number of points in that game.

11.1.3 In standing Badminton, the reverse pattern shall apply to the partners.

13. FAULTS

13.2.5 In Wheelchair Badminton, the whole of the wheelchair is considered part of the player’s
person.

16. CONTINUOUS PLAY, MISCONDUCT & PENALTIES

In Wheelchair Badminton:

16.1 Play shall be continuous from the first service until the match is concluded, except as allowed in
Laws 16.2, 16.3, 16.9 and 16.10.

16.9 A player may be allowed to leave the court for an interval not exceeding three minutes during a
match in order to catheterise. He/she shall be accompanied by an official.

16.10 A player may be allowed to repair a damaged wheelchair provided it is done in the quickest possible
time. If the player has to leave the court, he/she shall be accompanied by an official.

18. LIMITATION OF MOVEMENT

18.1 In Wheelchair Badminton:

18.1.1 At the moment a player strikes the shuttle some part of the trunk shall be in contact with
the seat of the wheelchair.

18.1.2 When the shuttle is in play, the feet shall remain in contact with the footrest. The feet may
be fixed to the footrest.

18.1.3 At no time when the shuttle is in play may any part of the feet come into contact with the
floor. In particular, a player may not use the feet for braking or for support.

18.1.4 Just before and at the moment that a player strikes the shuttle, the player may not touch the
floor with the hands for support.

18.1.5 When the shuttle is in play, a mounted footrest may not touch the floor.

19. WHEELCHAIR EQUIPMENT

19.1 A player’s body may be fixed to the wheelchair with an elastic belt.

19.2 A wheelchair may be equipped with a rear supporting wheel, which may extend beyond the main
wheels.

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

23
 Lawsa
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

Note: In all diagrams that follow = court area for play and = service area

DIAGRAM F

Short service line Long service line

Court and service court for singles Badminton wheelchair class 3 – BMW3

DIAGRAM G

Short service line Long service line

Court and service court for singles Badminton wheelchair classes 1 & 2 – BMW 1 & 2

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

24
aLaws
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

DIAGRAM H

Short service line Long service line

Court and service court for doubles Badminton wheelchair class 3 – BMW3

DIAGRAM I

Short service line Long service line

Court and service court for doubles Badminton wheelchair classes 1 & 2 – BMW 1 & 2

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

25
 Lawsa
Laws - Badminton For Disabled People

DIAGRAM J

Short service line Long service line

Court and service court for singles standing Badminton below waist classes 1 & 2

Standing Below Waist Class 3 and Above Waist disability courts

Such disabilities will play normal court size in accordance with BFW Laws for both singles and doubles

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 5
Updated: 1st January, 2009

26
aLaws
Laws - Imperial Measurements

PART II

SECTION 1 B

APPENDIX 6

IMPERIAL MEASUREMENTS

The Laws express all measurements in metres or millimetres. Imperial measurements are acceptable and for
the purposes of the Laws the following table of equivalence should be used:

Millimetres Inches Millimetres Feet Inches

15 380 1 3
20 420 1 4
25 1 490 1 7
28 1 530 1 9
40 1 570 1 10
58 2 680 2 2
64 2 720 2 4
68 2 760 2 6
70 2 950 3 1
75 3 990 3 3
220 8 Metres Feet Inches
230 9 1.524 5
280 11 1.550 5 1
290 11 2.530 8 3
3.880 12 9
4.640 15 3
5.180 17
6.100 20
13.400 44

Part II - Section 1 B
Appendix 6
Updated: 1st January, 2009

27
 RTTO

PART II

SECTION 2

RTTO
RECOMMENDATIONS TO TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 The Recommendations to technical officials are issued by the BWF in its desire to standardise the
control of the game in all countries and in accordance with its Rules.

1.2 The purpose of these Recommendations is to advise umpires how to control a match firmly and with
fairness, without being officious, while ensuring that the Laws of the game are observed. These
Recommendations also give guidance to service judges and line judges as to how to carry out their
duties.

1.3 All technical officials shall remember that the game is for the players.

2. OFFICIALS AND THEIR DECISIONS

2.1 An umpire shall report to and acts under the authority of the Referee (Law 17.2) (or the responsible
official in the absence of a Referee).

2.2 A service judge shall normally be appointed by the Referee but can be replaced by the Referee or by
the umpire in consultation with each other (Law 17.6.4).

2.3 Line judges shall normally be appointed by the Referee, but a line judge can be replaced by the
Referee or by the umpire in consultation with each other (Law 17.6.4).

2.4 An official’s decision shall be final on all points of fact for which that official is responsible except
that if, in the opinion of the umpire, it is beyond reasonable doubt that a line judge has clearly made
a wrong call, the umpire shall overrule the decision of the line judge (Law 17.5). If, in the opinion
of the umpire, the line judge needs to be replaced, the umpire shall call the Referee (Law 17.6.4,
Recommendation 2.3).

2.5 When another official is unsighted, the umpire shall make the decision. When no decision can be
given, a ‘let’ shall be called (Law 17.6.6).

2.6 The umpire shall be in charge of the court and its immediate surrounds. The umpire’s jurisdiction
shall exist from entering the court before the match until leaving the court after the match (Law
17.2).

3. RECOMMENDATIONS TO UMPIRES

3.1 Before the match, the umpire shall:

3.1.1 obtain the score-sheet from the Referee;

3.1.2 ensure that any scoring device to be used is working;

3.1.3 see that the posts are on the doubles side lines (Law 1.5);

3.1.4 check the net for the height and ensure that there are no gaps between the ends of the net
and the net posts;

3.1.5 ascertain whether there are any bye-laws regarding the shuttle hitting an obstruction;

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

28
 RTTO

3.1.6 ensure that the service judge and the line judges know their duties and that they are
correctly placed (Sections 5 and 6);

3.1.7 ensure that a sufficient quantity of tested shuttles (Law 3) is readily available for the match
RTTO

in order to avoid delays during play;

(It is customary for the umpire to delegate the duties specified in Recommendations 3.1.3,
3.1.4 and 3.1.7 to the service judge, where one is appointed);

3.1.8 check that the players’ clothing conforms to the relevant Regulations concerning colour,
designs, lettering and advertising, and ensure that any violations are rectified. Any decision
that the clothing was in violation of the Regulations (or was nearly so) shall be advised to
the Referee or appropriate official before the match or, if this is not possible, immediately
after the match;

3.1.9 carry out the toss fairly and ensure that the winning side and the losing side exercise their
choices correctly (Law 6). Note the choices of the ends;

3.1.10 note, in the case of doubles, the names of the players starting in the right service court.
Similar notes shall be made at the start of each game. (This enables a check to be made at
any time to see if the players are in the correct service court);

3.2 To start the match, the umpire shall announce the match using the appropriate announcement from
the following and point to the right or to the left at the appropriate words in the announcement. (W,
X, Y, Z being names of the players and A, B, C, D being names of the countries represented.)

Singles

Tournament

“Ladies and Gentlemen; on my right, ‘X, A’; and on my left, ‘Y, B’. ‘X’ to serve; love all; play.”

Team event

“Ladies and Gentlemen; on my right, ‘A’, represented by ‘X’; and on my left, ‘B’, represented by
‘Y’. ‘A’ to serve; love all; play.”

Doubles

Tournament

“Ladies and Gentlemen; on my right, ‘W, A’ and ‘X, B’; and on my left, ‘Y, C’ and ‘Z, D’. ‘X’ to
serve to ‘Y’; love all; play.”

If doubles partners represent the same country, announce the country name after announcing both
players’ names. e. g. ‘W and X, A’

Team event

“Ladies and Gentlemen; on my right, ‘A’, represented by ‘W’ and ‘X’; and on my left, ‘B’,
represented by ‘Y’ and ‘Z’. ‘A’ to serve; ‘X’ to ‘Y’; love all; play.”

The calling of “Play” constitutes the start of a match.

3.3 During the match

3.3.1 The umpire shall:

3.3.1.1 use the standard vocabulary in Appendix 4 of the Laws of Badminton;

3.3.1.2 record and call the score. Always call the server’s score first;

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

29
 RTTO

3.3.1.3 during the service, if a service judge is appointed, especially watch the receiver.
The Umpire may also call service fault, if necessary;

3.3.1.4 if possible, keep aware of the status of any scoring device; and

RTTO
3.3.1.5 raise the right hand above the umpire’s head, if assistance is needed from the
Referee.

3.3.2 When a side loses a rally and thereby the right to continue serving (Law 10.3.2, 11.3.2),
call:

“Service over”

followed by the score in favour of the new serving side; if necessary, at the same time
pointing the appropriate hand towards the new server and the correct service court.

3.3.3 “Play” shall only be called by the umpire:

3.3.3.1 to indicate that a match or a game is to start or that a game after interval or after
changing the ends is to continue;

3.3.3.2 to indicate that play is to resume after a break; or

3.3.3.3 to indicate that the umpire is instructing players to resume play.

3.3.4 “Fault” shall be called by the umpire when a ‘fault’ occurs, except as follows:

3.3.4.1 a ‘fault’ of the server (Law 9.1) called by the service judge under Laws 13.1 shall
be acknowledged by the umpire by calling “Service fault called”. The umpire
shall call a ‘fault’ of the receiver by calling “Fault receiver”;

3.3.4.2 a ‘fault’ occurring under Law 13.3.1, for which the line judge’s call and signal
suffices (Recommendation 6.2); and

3.3.4.3 ‘faults’ occurring under Laws 13.2.1, 13.2.2, 13.3.2 or 13.3.3 which shall only be
called if clarification is needed for the players or the spectators.

3.3.5 During each game when the leading score reaches 11 points, call “Service over”, where
appropriate, followed by the score immediately after the rally scoring the 11th point has
ended followed by “Interval”, regardless of applause. This constitutes the start of interval
allowed under Law 16.2.1. During each interval, the service judge, where appointed, shall
ensure that the court is mopped during the interval.

3.3.6 In the interval during the games when the leading score reaches 11 points (Law 16.2.1),
after 40 seconds have elapsed, call:

“[Court ...], 20 seconds”. Repeat the call.

In the intervals (Law 16.2.1) during the first and second game, and in the third game after
the players have changed the ends, each side may be joined on the court by not more than
two persons.. These persons shall leave the court when the umpire calls “... 20 seconds”.

To start the game after the interval, repeat the score followed by “Play”.

If the players do not claim the interval under Law 16.2.1, play in that game shall proceed
without an interval.

3.3.7 Extended game:

3.3.7.1 When leading side reaches 20 points, in each game, call “Game point” or “Match
point”, as applicable.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

30
 RTTO

3.3.7.2 If a side reaches 29 points, in each game and for each side, call “Game point” or
“Match point”, as applicable.

3.3.7.3 The calls in Recommendation 3.3.7.1 and 3.3.7.2 shall always immediately follow
RTTO

the server’s score and precede the receiver’s score.

3.3.8 At the end of each game, “Game” must always be called immediately after the conclusive
rally has ended, regardless of applause. Where appropriate this constitutes the start of any
interval allowed under Law 16.2.2.

After the first game ends, call:

“First game won by ….. [name(s) of player(s), or team (in a team event)] ….. [score]”.

After the second game ends, call:

“Second game won by ….. [name(s) of player(s), or team (in a team event)] ….. [score];
One game all”.

At the end of each game, the service judge, where appointed, shall ensure that the court is
mopped during the interval and place the interval board, if provided, at the centre below the
net.

If a game wins the match, call instead:

“Match won by ….. [name(s) of player(s), or team (in a team event)] ….. [scores]”.

3.3.9 In the intervals between the first and second game and between the second and third game
(Law 16.2.2), after 100 seconds have elapsed, call:

“[Court ...] 20 seconds”. Repeat the call.

In the intervals (Law 16.2.2) between two games each side may be joined on the court by
no more than two persons. These persons shall join the side after the players have changed
the ends, and shall leave the court when the umpire calls “... 20 seconds”.

3.3.10 To start the second game, call:

“Second game; love all; play”.

If there is to be a third game, to start the third game, call:

“Final game; love all; play”.

3.3.11 In the third game, or in a match of one game, call “Service over”, where appropriate,
followed by the score, followed by “Interval; change ends” when the leading score reaches
11 points (Law 8.1.3). To start the game after the interval, repeat the score, followed by
“Play”.

3.3.12 After the end of the match immediately take the completed score-sheet to the Referee.

3.4 Line calls

3.4.1 The umpire shall always look to the line judge(s) when the shuttle lands close to a line and
always when the shuttle lands out, however far. The line judge shall be entirely responsible
for the decision except Recommendation 3.4.2 below.

3.4.2 If, in the opinion of the umpire, it is beyond reasonable doubt, a line judge has clearly
made a wrong call, the umpire shall call:

3.4.2.1 “Correction, IN”, if the shuttle has landed “in”; or

3.4.2.2 “Correction, OUT”, if the shuttle has landed “out”.

3.4.3 In the absence of a line judge or if the line judge is unsighted, the umpire shall immediately
call:

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

31
 RTTO

3.4.3.1 “Out” before calling the score when the shuttle lands outside the line; or
3.4.3.2 the score, when the shuttle lands in; or
3.4.3.3 “Let” when the umpire is also unsighted.

RTTO
3.5 During the match, the following situations shall be watched for and dealt with as detailed.

3.5.1 A player throwing a racket into the opponent’s court or sliding under the net (and who also
thereby obstructs or distracts an opponent), shall be faulted under Law 13.4.2 or 13.4.3
respectively.

3.5.2 A shuttle invading from an adjacent court shall not automatically be considered a “let”. A
“let” shall not be called if, in the opinion of the umpire, such invasion:

3.5.2.1 has gone unnoticed by the players; or

3.5.2.2 has not obstructed or distracted the players.

3.5.3 A player shouting to a partner who is about to hit the shuttle shall not necessarily be
regarded as distracting the opponents. Calling ‘no shot’, ‘fault’, etc. shall be considered as
distraction (Law 13.4.5).

3.5.4 Players leaving the court

3.5.4.1 Ensure that the players do not leave the court without the umpire’s permission
except during the intervals as described in Law 16.2. (Law 16.5.2)

3.5.4.2 Any offending side may have to be reminded that leaving the court needs the
umpire’s permission (Law 16.5.2). If necessary, Law 16.7 shall be applied.
However, change of a racket at courtside during a rally is permitted.

3.5.4.3 During the game, if play is not held up, the players may be allowed to have a
quick towel and / or drink at the discretion of the umpire.

3.5.4.4 If the court needs to be mopped, the players shall be within the court before the
mopping is over.

3.5.5 Delays and suspension

Ensure that the players do not deliberately cause any delay in, or suspension of play (Law
16.4). Any unnecessary walk around the court shall be prevented. If necessary, Law 16.7
shall be applied.

3.5.6 Coaching from off the court

3.5.6.1 Coaching from off the court (Law 16.5.1) in any form while the shuttle is in play
shall be prevented.

3.5.6.2 Ensure that:

• the coaches are seated in the designated seats and do not stand court-side
during the match except during the permitted intervals (Law 16.2);

• there is no distraction or disruption to play by any coach.

3.5.6.3 If, in the opinion of the umpire, play is disrupted or a player of the opposing side
is distracted by a coach, a “let” shall be called (Law 14.2.5). The Referee shall be
called immediately on recurrence of such incident. The Referee shall issue a
warning to the coach concerned;

3.5.6.4 If there is second recurrence of such incident, the Referee may ask the coach to be
removed from the arena floor, if necessary.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

32
 RTTO

3.5.7 Change of shuttle

3.5.7.1 Changing the shuttle during the match shall not be unfair. The umpire shall decide
if the shuttle needs to be changed.
RTTO

3.5.7.2 A shuttle whose speed or flight has been interfered with shall be discarded and
Law 16.7 applied, if necessary.

3.5.8 Injury or sickness during a match

3.5.8.1 Injury or sickness during a match should be handled carefully and flexibly. The
umpire must determine the severity of the problem as quickly as possible. The
Referee shall be called on the court, if necessary.

3.5.8.2 The Referee shall decide on whether a medical official or any other persons are
required on court. The medical official should examine the player and advise the
player about the severity of the injury or sickness. If there is bleeding, the game
should be delayed until the bleeding stops or the wound is suitably protected.

3.5.8.3 The Referee should advise the umpire of the time that may be required for the
player to resume play. The Umpire shall monitor the elapsed time.

3.5.8.4 The Umpire shall ensure that the opposing side is not put at a disadvantage. Laws
16.4, 16.5, 16.6.1, and 16.7 shall be applied appropriately.

3.5.8.5 When appropriate, when there is injury, illness or other unavoidable hindrance,
ask the player:

“Are you retiring?”

and if the answer is affirmative, call

“….. [name of player/team, as appropriate] retired, match won by ….. [name of

player(s) / team, as appropriate]... [score]”.

3.6 Suspension of play

If play has to be suspended, call:

“Play is suspended”

and record the score, server, receiver, correct service courts and ends. When play resumes, note
the duration of suspension, ensure that the players have taken the correct positions and call:

“Are you ready?”

Call the score and “Play”.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

33
 RTTO

3.7 Misconduct

3.7.1 Record and report to the Referee any incident of

misconduct and the action taken.

RTTO
3.7.2 Misconduct between games is treated as misconduct during
a game. The umpire announces the decision at the start of
the following game. Call

“............. game; love all.”

Follow with the appropriate call in either of

Recommendations 3.7.3 to 3.7.5.

Call “Play”.

Thereafter, call “Service over”, where appropriate

followed by the score.

3.7.3 When the umpire has to administer a breach of Law 16.4, 16.5 or 16.6 by issuing a warning
to the offending side (Law 16.7.1.1), call “Come here” to the offending player and call:

“… [name of player], warning for misconduct”

at the same time raising the right hand holding a yellow card above the umpire’s head.

3.7.4 When the umpire has to administer a breach of Law 16.4, 16.5 or 16.6 by faulting the
offending side, which has been previously warned (Law 16.7.1.2), call “Come here” to the
offending player and call:

“… [name of player], fault for misconduct”

at the same time raising the right hand holding a red card above the umpire’s head.

3.7.5 When the umpire has to administer a flagrant or persistent breach of Law 16.4, 16.5 or 16.6
or breach of Law 16.2 by faulting the offending side (Law 16.7.2) and reporting the
offending side immediately to the Referee with a view to disqualification, call “Come
here” to the offending player and call:

“… [name of player], fault for misconduct”

at the same time raising the right hand holding a red card above the umpire’s head, and
calling the Referee.

3.7.6 When the Referee decides to disqualify the offending side, a black card is given to the
umpire. The umpire shall call “Come here” to the offending player and call:

“… [name of side] disqualified for misconduct”.

at the same time raising the right hand holding a black card above the umpire’s head.

4. GENERAL ADVICE ON UMPIRING

This section gives general advice which shall be followed by the Umpires.

4.1 Know and understand the Laws of Badminton.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

34
 RTTO

4.2 Call promptly and with authority, but, if a mistake is made, admit it, apologise and correct it.

4.3 Make all announcements and calling of the score distinctly and loudly enough to be heard clearly by
players and the spectators.
RTTO

4.4 Do not call a ‘fault’ and allow the game to proceed, if a doubt arises in your mind as to whether an
infringement of the Laws has occurred or not.

4.5 Never ask the spectators nor be influenced by them or their remarks.

4.6 Motivate your other technical officials, e.g. by discreetly acknowledging the decisions of line judges
and establishing a working relationship with them.

5. INSTRUCTIONS TO SERVICE JUDGES

5.1 The service judge shall sit on a low chair by the post, preferably opposite the umpire.

5.2 The service judge is responsible for judging that the server delivers a correct service (Law 9.1). If
not, call “Fault” loudly and use the approved hand signal to indicate the type of infringement.

5.3 The approved hand signals are:

Law 9.1.1

neither side shall cause undue delay to the

delivery of the service once the server and the
receiver are ready for the service.

Law 9.1.7

Once the players are ready for service, the first

forward movement of the server’s racket head
is the start of the service. The movement of the
racket must continue forwards.

Laws 9.1.2 and 9.1.3

Some part of both feet not in the service court

and in a stationary position until the service is
delivered.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

35
 RTTO

RTTO
Law 9.1.4

Initial point of contact with the shuttle not on

the base of the shuttle.

Law 9.1.5

Whole of the shuttle not below the server’s

waist at the moment of being struck.

Law 9.1.6

At the instant of hitting the shuttle, the shaft of

the racket not pointing in a downward
direction.

5.4 The umpire may arrange with the service judge any extra duties to be undertaken, provided that the
players are so advised.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

36
 RTTO

6. INSTRUCTIONS TO LINE JUDGES

6.1 The line judges shall sit on chairs in prolongation of their lines at the ends and sides of the court and
preferably at the side opposite to the umpire. (See diagrams).
RTTO

6.2 A line judge shall be entirely responsible for the line(s) assigned except that the umpire shall
overrule the call of the line judge, if beyond reasonable doubt, in the opinion of the umpire, a line
judge has clearly made a wrong call.

6.2.1 If the shuttle lands out, no matter how far, call “Out” promptly in a clear voice, loud
enough to be heard by the players and the spectators and, at the same time, signal by
extending both arms horizontally so that the umpire can see clearly.

6.2.2 If the shuttle lands in, the line judge shall say nothing, but point to the line with the right
hand.

6.3 If unsighted, inform the umpire immediately by putting both hands up to cover the eyes.

6.4 Do not call or signal until the shuttle has touched the floor.

6.5 Calls shall always be made, and no anticipation made of umpiring decisions, e.g. that the shuttle hit
a player.

6.6 The approved hand signals are:

SHUTTLE IS OUT

If the shuttle lands out, no matter how far, call

“Out” promptly in a clear voice, loud enough
to be heard by the players and the spectators
and, at the same time, signal by extending both
arms horizontally so that the umpire can see
clearly.

SHUTTLE IS IN

If the shuttle lands in, say nothing, but point to

the line with your right hand.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

37
 RTTO

RTTO
IF UNSIGHTED

If unsighted, inform the umpire immediately by

holding your hands to cover your eyes.

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

38
 RTTO

POSITIONS OF LINE JUDGES

Where practical, it is recommended that the line judges’ positions be 2.5 to 3.5 metres from the court
boundaries and, in any arrangement, the line judges’ positions be protected from encroachment by any outside
RTTO

influence, e.g. by photographers.

X indicates the positions of the line judges

Singles

Doubles

Part II - Section 2
Updated: 3 June 2011

39
 General Competition Regulations

PART III

SECTION 1 A

GENERAL COMPETITION REGULATIONS

1. PURPOSE AND APPLICABILITY OF THE REGULATIONS

1.1. With these Regulations the BWF in accordance with its Rules:

GCR
1.1.1. controls the game, from an international aspect, in all countries; and

1.1.2. makes Regulations for all international competition.

1.2. These Regulations apply to all categories of tournaments (of whatsoever nature) that are defined in
Regulations 2.2 to 2.13.

1.3. The provisions of Regulations 11 to 29 are recommended, but not mandatory, for the categories of
tournaments defined in Regulations 2.14 and 2.15.

2. TOURNAMENT DEFINITIONS

2.1. The BWF recognises the categories of tournaments and other international matches defined in
Regulations 2.2 to 2.15.

2.2. BWF Tournaments (Level 1)

2.2.1. Thomas Cup The world men’s team championships
2.2.2. Uber Cup The world women’s team championships
2.2.3. Sudirman Cup The world mixed team championships
2.2.4. Suhandinata Cup The world juniors’ team championships
2.2.5. World Championships The world individual championships
2.2.6. EnopiCups The world junior individual championships
2.2.7. World Senior Championships The world senior individual championships

2.3. Super Series (Level 2)

2.3.1. Super Series Masters Finals The Super Series Masters tournament having prize
money of US$ 500,000 or more.
2.3.2. Super Series Premier The Super Series of tournaments having prize money of
US$ 350,000 or more. (From 2012 onwards US$
400,000 or more)
2.3.3. Super Series The Super Series of tournaments having prize money of
US$ 200,000 or more.

2.4. Grand Prix (Level 3)

2.4.1. Grand Prix Gold The Grand Prix series of tournaments having prize
money of US$ 120,000 or more.
2.4.2. Grand Prix The Grand Prix series of tournaments having prize
money of US$ 50,000 or more.

2.5. Continental Tournaments (Level 4)

(Tournaments under control and management of the Continental Confederation to which the host
country belongs.)

2.5.1. International Challenge The continental series of tournaments having prize

money of US$ 15,000 or more.
2.5.2. International Series The continental series of tournaments having prize
money of US$ 5,000 or more.
2.5.3. Future Series The continental series of tournaments having prize
money less than US$ 5,000.
Part III – Section 1A
GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

40
 General Competition Regulations

2.6. Junior Tournaments

(Tournaments under control and management of the Continental Confederation to which the host
country belongs.)

2.6.1. Junior International Challenge The series of tournaments having prize money of US$
15,000 or more.
2.6.2. Junior International Series The series of tournaments having prize money of US$
5,000 or more.
2.6.3. Junior Future Series The series of tournaments having prize money less than
US$ 5,000.
GCR

2.7. Other Championships of an international character

Any tournament bearing the title of an area greater than that of a single country, e.g.

Asian Badminton Confederation Championships

European Championships
World University Games

2.8. Multi-Sport Games

Official international sporting games containing several different sports including Badminton, eg:

Olympic Games
Asian Games
Commonwealth Games
Pan American Games

2.9. Major Tournaments

Any tournament under the jurisdiction of a Member Association accepting entries from a total in the
whole tournament of more than three top-ranked players from other Member Associations

2.9.1. “Top-ranked” shall be defined as “contained in the first 25 places in any of the five BWF
ranking lists valid three months before the tournament”.

2.10. Invitation Tournaments

Any tournament or other competitive matches (with or without prize money) limited to players
invited according to Regulation 10, which involves a total in the whole tournament of more than
three top-ranked players from other Member Associations.

2.11. International Seniors’ Tournaments

Any tournament (other than defined in Regulation 2.2.7) intending by its title or promotion to attract
an international entry and limiting entries to players over certain age limits.

2.12. Exhibition Matches

Any programme involving exhibition or demonstration of the game, with or without competition for
title or prize money, which involves more than three top-ranked players invited from other Member
Associations or in which any player receives a fee of US $1,000 or more. Special dispensation may
be given at the discretion of BWF.

2.13. International Matches

Any competitive matches between Member Associations.

2.14. National Championships

Any tournament of whatever nature (with or without prize money) in which entries are restricted to
players being citizens of, or resident in, the country concerned according to regulations adopted by
the Member Association in question.

2.15. Other Tournaments

Any tournament not falling into one of the categories defined in Regulations 2.2 to 2.15.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

41
 General Competition Regulations

3. SANCTION

3.1. For all tournaments and competitive matches defined above in Regulations 2.2 to 2.12, the Member
Association must apply for and receive the sanction of the BWF. The BWF shall grant sanction to
the tournament in line with the BWF Sanction Policy [Part III – Section 1 B, Appendix 10].

3.2. Sanction fees

3.2.1. All level 1 to 3 BWF-sanctioned Tournaments or international tournaments offering prize

money US$ 50,000 or more shall pay a sanction fee to the BWF at the rate of 10 per cent
of the total prize fund.

GCR
3.2.2. For tournaments offering prize money above US$500,000 a two stage sanction fee applies.
Stage 1- for prize money above US$500, 000 tournaments shall pay a sanction fee to the
BWF at the rate of 10% of the total prize fund. Stage 2 - for subsequent prize money
exceeding US$500,000 tournaments shall pay a sanction fee to the BWF a the rate of 5%
((to be implemented 1 Jan 2012)

3.2.3. All level 4 BWF Sanctioned Tournaments or international tournaments offering prize
money less than US$ 50,000 shall pay a sanction fee to the Continental Confederation.

3.2.4. It is recommended sanction fee be at the rate of 10% on prize fund. Such fee shall be a
charge on the tournament and not on the prize fund and shall be paid so that an amount
equal to 10 per cent of the total prize fund is received by the BWF or Continental
Confederation, as the case maybe, within three weeks of the end of the tournament.

3.2.5. The BWF may approach Member Associations and make any additional financial
arrangements as it may from time to time decide.

3.3. Confirmation of prize money, withdrawal of sanction, and penalty fees

3.3.1. For all level 1 to 4 BWF-sanctioned Tournaments or international tournaments offering

prize money US$ 15,000 or more, the BWF shall, at the time of sanction of the tournament,
seek confirmation of the total prize money.

3.3.2. Fewer than 90 days before the date of the tournament, any level 1 to 4 BWF-sanctioned
Tournaments or international tournament offering prize money US$ 15,000 or more, there
shall be no change in the level of the tournament. The organisers shall have liberty to
increase the approved prize money at any time. However, there shall not be any change in
the level of tournament sanctioned earlier.

3.4. Fees for postponement, cancellation or changed prize money

3.4.1. If, fewer than 60 days before the date of the tournament, any level 1 to 3 BWF-sanctioned
Tournament or international tournament offering prize money US$ 50,000 or more is
cancelled, postponed or the prize money as in Regulation 3.3 is reduced, the organiser shall
pay the BWF a fee equivalent to 20% of the total prize money.

3.4.2. If, fewer than 90 days before the date of the tournament, any level 4 BWF-sanctioned
Tournament or international tournament offering prize money less than US$ 50,000 is
cancelled, postponed or the prize money as in Regulation 3.3 is reduced, the organiser shall
pay the Continental Confederation recommending sanction a fee equivalent to 20% of the
total prize money

3.4.3. Fewer than 15 days before the date of the tournament, any level 1 to 4 BWF-sanctioned
Tournament or international tournament offering prize money US$ 15,000 or more, if there
is any change in the approved prize money, the matter will be referred to Disciplinary
Committee of BWF. The BWF shall, in addition to the fees as stated in Regulation 3.4.1 or
3.4.2, impose sanctions which may include monetary penalty and / or future sanction of
tournaments to that Member Association.
Part III – Section 1A
GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

42
 General Competition Regulations

3.4.4. Where, however, the BWF is satisfied that the tournament cancellation or postponement
was outside the control of the organisers due to force majeure (e.g. civil disturbance,
natural disaster), these fees may be waived.

3.5. The BWF can have no jurisdiction in connection with any playing tournament promoted directly or
indirectly by unaffiliated organisations.

3.6. Unsanctioned tournaments

3.6.1. Member Associations shall allow players under their jurisdiction to compete only in
tournaments sanctioned by the BWF or one of its members.
GCR

3.6.2. The BWF has power to vary the requirement of Regulation 3.6.1, provided an application
giving reasons is made at least two months in advance.

3.6.3. Notwithstanding Regulation 3.6.1, players under the jurisdiction of a Member Association
may promote the game by giving a demonstration under the auspices of an organisation not
under the jurisdiction of another Member Association. This demonstration may be
amongst themselves or with local players, provided the title and form of competition, and
the prizes and / or expenses have been approved by the BWF.

4. RIGHTS

4.1 For any tournament sanctioned under General Competition Regulation 3, the term “BWF-sanctioned
tournament rights” shall mean all commercial, television, internet, webcasting, audio, film and other
rights of like nature at all venues, and other rights associated primarily with the tournament.

4.2 It is a condition of sanction that ownership of BWF-sanctioned tournament rights shall be

determined in accordance with the BWF statutes.

4.3 BWF-sanctioned tournament rights shall automatically belong to the BWF, unless licences or
concessions in respect of such rights are granted by the BWF to the promoting Member Association,
either by virtue of the BWF statutes or in writing.

4.4 The BWF always retains the right to publish results and reports from the BWF-sanctioned
tournaments, on the Internet and elsewhere, and to do so at times determined solely by the BWF.

4.5 Players’ images

4.5.1 When a player is entered in a BWF-sanctioned tournament, the creation of television or

audio signals, and the taking of photographs is permitted at all associated venues (including
training / practice) without further need to seek the consent of the player or Member
Association concerned. Any such television or audio signals can be distributed by the
rights owner in any and all territories, and may be used on live or recorded television,
Internet, webcasting, radio, film and other media of similar nature. The BWF, the
promoting Member Association, and any photographer concerned shall have the right to
use photographs or any other image of player(s) taken during the tournament.

4.5.2 If for legal reasons use of a player’s image requires the consent of the player concerned,
the Member Association must ensure that such consent is obtained before entering the
player. The user of photographs or other such images of player(s) assumes sole legal
liability for such use.

4.6 The Ownership of BWF-sanctioned tournament rights shall be shared as in the table below. In
formulating contracts, Member Associations are advised that this concession of rights is subject to
change with reasonable notice.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

43
 General Competition Regulations

Tournament Level of Ownership of BWF-sanctioned tournament rights owned by and

defined in tournament the extent of ownership
GCR
2.2 Level 1 Determined by the BWF regulations / contracts associated with
each tournament.
2.3 Level 2 Retained by BWF as per the BWF Super Series Guidelines issued
under the BWF regulations
2.4 Level 3 All rights granted to the Promoting Member Association
2.5 Level 4 All rights granted to the Continental Confederation who will

GCR
share it with Promoting Member Association in accordance with
the regulations for the Continental Circuit as approved by the
BWF.
2.6 Junior All rights granted to the Promoting Member Association.
Tournaments
2.7 Continental All rights granted to the Continental Confederation
Championships
2.8 Multi-sport All rights granted to the Promoting Member Association.
Games
2.9 to 2.16 Other All rights granted to the Promoting Member Association.
international
tournaments

5. ON LINE ENTRIES AND CONTROL OF ENTRIES

5.1 Procedure for sending entries:

5.1.1 For all tournaments requiring the BWF sanction, an entry of player / pair must be made by
the Member Association of which the player / pair is a member by midnight local time of the
BWF Head Quarters on the closing date in the manner specified by the BWF. The MA
submitting the entries shall specify their National ranking order.

5.1.2 Where the entries are sent using the BWF Online Entry System, after the closing date, the
BWF Online Entry System will send an Entry Confirmation to all participating Member
Associations confirming the receipt of final entries. This confirmation is the conclusive
evidence of receipt of entries before the deadline. The Member Associations shall contact
BWF immediately if such confirmation is not received by Wednesday by noon BWF
Headquarters time (+08.00 GMT) following close of entries. Any objection to the entries
should be notified to BWF. Following the close of entries if no objection is received by
BWF by Thursday 23.59 hours BWF Headquarters time (+08.00GMT) the entries shall
deemed to be correct. No complaints / objections shall be entertained thereafter

5.1.3 Where the entries are not sent using the BWF Online Entry System, it is the responsibility of
the organiser to acknowledge receipt of the entries of player / pair and any subsequent
amendment prior to the closing date for entries. It is the responsibility of the Member
Association to ensure that confirmation of acceptance is received .

5.2 No Member Association shall, for any tournament directly or indirectly promoted by it, accept
entries from any other Member Association on behalf of any players who:

5.2.1 are not under the jurisdiction of a Member Association of the BWF; or

5.2.2 have been declared not in good standing with that Member Association.

5.3 Any member of the BWF wishing to organise any tournament or other competitive matches, which
is intended to include players other than those qualified as in Regulation 5.2, shall apply for the
special permission of the BWF.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

44
 General Competition Regulations

5.4 Players must be permitted to enter all BWF sanctioned tournaments for which they are qualified and
no restriction in this respect shall be permitted provided the players comply with the qualification
standards and procedures set by the BWF, Member Associations and / or Continental
Confederations. When a Member Association makes entries on behalf of its players, it shall list
such entries in order of playing strength.

5.5 No player / pair shall enter or be entered in two BWF-sanctioned competitions if the published dates
of the competitions overlap. A player is deemed to have entered, for the purpose of this regulation,
if the entry has been made and not been withdrawn by the Member Association, by midnight local
time of the BWF Headquarters on the closing date. Any subsequent withdrawal by a player / pair
accepted in the main or qualifying draw of the tournament will not allow him to enter in any other
GCR

tournament with overlapping dates.

5.6 In making or authorising entries, the Member Association concerned is reconfirming its acceptance,
and acceptance by the players being entered, of the BWF’s Rules, Competition Regulations and
Disciplinary processes.

5.7. For BWF sanctioned tournaments, a player shall not have his / her entry refused for reasons of race,
religion or politics.

5.7.1 Organisers may limit the number of entries from a country, where the BWF, Continental
Confederations and / or Member Associations are allowed to set qualification standards and
procedures for entry of players (Regulation 5.4); and may limit the number of total entries
accepted into a tournament to accommodate the size of the tournament (Regulations 13.1 and
13.7).

5.7.2 Refusal of entries by a tournament organiser for any reason other than that there are too many
entries to be accommodated (Regulations 13.1 and 13.8) requires the specific written
permission of the BWF.

5.8 No alterations, except withdrawal, can be made to the entries after the close of entries until the draw
has been made. Regulations 15.2 to 15.8 shall apply to the substitutions after the draw, for
tournaments other than Level 1 to 4 BWF sanctioned tournaments and tournaments with nationally
restricted entries e.g. Continental Championships, EnopiCup.

5.9 The BWF, on detection or on receipt of complaint that a player’s entries were made for two or more
BWF-sanctioned competitions in contravention of Regulation 5.5, shall issue a notice to the
Member Association concerned seeking an explanation about such violation.

5.9.1 The Member Association shall furnish an explanation along with copy of any relevant
documentation within two weeks from the issue of notice.

5.9.2 The BWF will forward the complaint including the full documentation to the Disciplinary
Committee.

5.9.3 If the Disciplinary Committee on receipt of a complaint determines whether there was
violation of Regulation 5.5. The penalty will be loss of any world ranking points earned by
the player /pair in those competitions. The Committee may consider mitigating
circumstances.

5.10 In level 3 and 4 tournaments if the host Association does not have an entry in the main draw in an
event they may elect to include a wildcard entry in that event. Wildcards will not win World
Ranking points unless they win a match (a walkover does not count as winning a match)’.

6. TOURNAMENT AGE LIMITS

6.1 It is recommended that for junior tournaments, all players should remain under 19 years of age
throughout the calendar year in which the tournament is held.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

45
 General Competition Regulations

6.2 It is recommended that senior age groups should commence at 35 years of age. Further groups
should be considered at five-year intervals. Groups would therefore be 35 and over, 40 and over, 45
and over, etc. In any seniors’ competitions, players are eligible provided they are 35, 40, 45, etc
years of age or more throughout the calendar year in which the competition is held.

7. MEMBER ASSOCIATIONS’ RESPONSIBILITIES FOR TOURNAMENTS AND PLAYERS

7.1 Each Member Association shall be responsible for the conduct of all tournaments held under its
jurisdiction and in particular for ensuring compliance by the organisers with all the relevant
Competition Regulations in BWF-sanctioned tournaments.

GCR
7.2 Each Member Association shall be responsible for the control and management of all players under
its jurisdiction.

7.2.1 To be eligible to enter and compete in tournaments, all players must be in good standing
with their Member Association. A Member Association may declare a player under its
jurisdiction to be ineligible to compete, but the reasons for such declaration and the period
of ineligibility must be reported to the BWF.

7.2.2 Member Associations shall have full responsibility for any support (financial or otherwise)
received by players under their jurisdiction for the purposes of preparation and
competition.

7.2.3 Member Associations shall accept and deal with all prizes paid in cash under Regulations
27.1 and 27.2.

7.2.4 Member Associations shall also supervise or administer any sponsorship, contractual or
other arrangements entered into, or involving, players under their jurisdiction.

7.2.5 Member Associations shall ensure that players adhere to the Players’ Code of Conduct
[Part III – Section 1 B, Appendix 4].

7.3 A Member Association shall be responsible for the management and control of all coaches and team
officials under its jurisdiction at any tournament.

7.3.1 For all level 1 to 3 tournaments, every Member Association shall appoint a Team Manager
before the tournament.

7.3.2 In default of such appointment, the players present at tournament shall choose their own
Manager.

7.3.3 The Referee of the Tournament shall be notified of the name of the Team Manager as soon
as he is appointed.

7.3.4 From the time of arrival at the venue, the Manager shall assume all administrative and
other responsibilities on behalf of the relevant Member Association and all the players and
team officials in connection with the conduct of the tournament.

7.3.5 The Team Manager must attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee and / or by the
Committee of Management. Where there is a failure to comply, regulation 31 shall be
applied.

7.3.6 Member Associations shall ensure that their coaches and team officials adhere to the Code
of Conduct for coaches and team officials [Part III – Section 1 B, Appendix 9].

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

46
 General Competition Regulations

8. INTERNATIONAL REPRESENTATION*

8.1 Representing a Member Association is defined as accepting a nomination to be a member of that

Association’s team in any Badminton tournament where the competition is between teams.
However, playing as an individual in a tournament does not count as representation, unless the
tournament has been specifically nominated by the BWF (Regulation 8.1.2).

8.1.1 Competition between teams includes, but is not limited to, the Thomas, Uber and Sudirman
Cups, Continental team championships, the Asian Games team championships, the
Commonwealth Games team championships, and other international matches or
competitions involving two or more Member Associations’ teams.
GCR

8.1.2 Currently, the BWF has also specified that the World Championships (see World
Championships Regulation 9.2), the World Senior Championships and the individual
events at the Olympic Games, the Asian Games, the Commonwealth Games, and
Continental Championships shall count as international representation. Where players in a
doubles pair are from different Member Associations it shall count as international
representation for each player.

8.2 A player shall be qualified to represent a Member Association providing the player is in good
standing with that Member Association and satisfies Regulations 8.2.1 and either 8.2.2 or 8.2.3:

8.2.1 holds a passport of a country whose territory the Member Association has jurisdiction over;

8.2.2 has not represented any other Member Association for three years immediately preceding
the date of the tournament;

8.2.3 last represented that Member Association;

8.3 A player shall be deemed to have represented a Member Association if he or she shall have been
officially nominated to represent that Member Association and shall have accepted such
nomination.

8.4 If a player has represented a Member Association and such Member Association is subsequently
divided into two or more Member Associations or is absorbed by another Member Association,
either politically or by recognition of the BWF, such player shall, for the purposes of these
Regulations, be deemed from the date of such alteration not to have represented any Member
Association.

Notwithstanding the foregoing Regulations, in the case of any officially-recognised competitive multi-
sport games in which Badminton is included, the qualifications for the representation of a Member
Association shall be in full accordance with the conditions laid down by such a multi-sport international
games, provided however that the above Regulations 8.2 to 8.4 are also not contravened.

9. JURISDICTION

9.1 A player comes under the jurisdiction of all Member Associations to which the player is directly or
indirectly affiliated.

9.2 Duration

9.2.1 A player comes under continued jurisdiction of a Member Association for a period of three
months after ceasing to reside in the country of that Member Association, unless the player
explicitly renounces this jurisdiction.

9.2.2 After the three-month period, jurisdiction shall lapse unless the player implicitly (e.g. by
participation in the Member Association’s activities) continues to accept that jurisdiction,
or explicitly declares a wish to accept that jurisdiction.

*
See Part III Section 1 Appendix 1, page 1, International representation for explanatory chart

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

47
 General Competition Regulations

9.2.3 A player who represents a Member Association (see Regulation 8.3) automatically comes
under the jurisdiction of that Member Association for three months thereafter (as in
Regulation 9.2.1).

9.3 Where a sanction is imposed that affects a player’s participation beyond the jurisdiction of the
Member Association concerned, then such sanction shall be notified immediately to the BWF, who
shall notify all Member Associations of such sanction.

9.4 Where sanctions affect a player who comes under the jurisdiction of more than one Member
Association, the BWF shall have power to receive representations and to amend such sanctions, if
felt necessary.

GCR
10. INVITATIONS

10.1 For the purpose of this Regulation on invitations, a player’s Member Association shall be that under
whose jurisdiction he or she shall have been an active playing member for the three months
immediately preceding the date of the invitation. This will normally be in the country in which he or
she is resident. This definition is quite irrespective of the player’s qualifications for representing a
Member Association (Regulation 8).

10.2 Any tournament or exhibition matches in which it is desired to invite the participation of players
from another Member Association shall be subject to the following regulations.

10.2.1 Any invitation to players of another Member Association shall be sent by the promoting
Member Association (or by another subsidiary body with the approval of the Member
Association concerned) in the first instance to the Member Association of the player to be
invited. A copy of such invitation shall also be sent to any different Member Association
for which the player has a qualification for international play.

10.2.2 No player shall participate in a tournament or exhibition matches which are promoted or
organised by an individual or company (or other organisation) unless it has been
sanctioned by the Member Association concerned or the BWF.

11. PAYMENTS TO PLAYERS

11.1 Under no circumstances may a player be offered or paid money or goods to play matches other than
exhibition matches (as defined in Regulation 2.13). Reasonable travel and subsistence expenses that
are actually incurred are however allowable.

11.2 No promoter shall offer, and no player accept, a fee and / or goods totalling more than US $3,000 in
value for playing in exhibition matches.

12. THE DRAW

12.1 The draw for all knock-out tournaments shall be made in the manner set out below and no dummy
entry is permitted.

12.1.1 In all level 1 to 3 BWF-sanctioned tournaments and Multi-sport games requiring sanction
by the BWF, the seeding of the draw shall be done by the BWF. To accomplish this, all
entries shall be forwarded by the organising committee to the BWF.

12.2 In all level 4 BWF-sanctioned tournaments and continental multi-sport games requiring sanction by
the BWF, the seeding of the draw shall be done by the Continental Confederation recommending
sanction. To accomplish this, all entries shall be forwarded by the organising committee to the
Continental Confederation recommending sanction.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

48
 General Competition Regulations

12.3 The draw shall be done by the organisation doing the seeding (Regulation 12.1.1, 12.2.2), as per the
timelines specified in Appendix 8. (Refer Part III – Section 1 B, Appendix 8). The tournaments not
covered by Appendix 8 shall use the timeline applicable to Super Series. The draw must be
published as soon as possible after it is done, but in all cases not less than 24 hours before the first
scheduled match. The qualifying rounds, if any, count as part of the tournament for these purposes.

12.4 The draw shall be conducted as follows.

12.4.1 When the number of playing units is 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or any higher power of 2, they
shall meet in pairs in the order drawn, as in Diagram 1 for eight playing units.
GCR

12.4.2 When the number of playing units is not a power of 2, there shall be byes in the first round.
The number of byes shall be equal to the difference between the next higher power of 2
and the number of playing units, (e. g. with 17 playing units, there are 32-17 = 15 byes).

12.4.3 The byes shall be placed as in Tables 1 to 5 and Diagram 2.

DIAGRAM 1
1st round
2nd round
A
B final
B
D winner
C
D
D
D
E
F
F
F
G
H
H

12.5 The seeding of the draw at all BWF-sanctioned tournaments shall be done using the World Ranking
as published on the reference date. (Refer Part III – Section 1 B, Appendix 8) even if the results are
missing. In each event, the entry which is ranked highest shall be seeded number 1, and the next
highest number 2, and so on until all seeds required by Regulation 12.7 are decided.

12.6 Before implementing Regulation 12.5 in doubles events in which the BWF does the seeding, the
World Ranking of each pair, who did not compete during the ranking period, shall be modified for
seeding purposes when Regulation 12.6.1 or 12.6.2 applies. (For explanation please refer to Part III
– Section 1 B, Appendix 7.)

12.6.1 If a pair has no World Ranking, a notional ranking is calculated for the pair. An average
(the "notional" average) is taken of the best average points scored by each of the two
players with other partners. This notional average is converted into the total notional
points for the pair by multiplying by 10 and taking 80%. The notional points are used to
determine a notional ranking.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

49
 General Competition Regulations

12.6.2 If the two players have a World Ranking as a pair but have competed in fewer than eight
tournaments in the 52 week period, an adjusted ranking is produced by taking the pair’s
World Ranking points and adjusting as follows:

Number of Adjust by
tournaments multiplying by:
played in
10
2 /5
10
3 /5
10
4 /5

GCR
10
5 /5
10
6 /6
10
7 /7

12.6.3 The resulting notional ranking as in 12.6.1 or adjusted ranking as in 12.6.2 is used to
determine the seeding position.

12.6.4 A pair may have a seeding from one to four on the basis of any World Ranking but a
seeding no higher than five based on any notional ranking and / or adjusted ranking.
However, if the number of players / pairs having world ranking is less than the permissible
number of seeding places, the remaining seeding places can be based on the notional or
adjusted world ranking

12.7 To seek even strength throughout the draw and to avoid players from one Member Association
meeting in the early rounds, the draw may be seeded or arranged subject to the following
restrictions:

12.7.1 A maximum of 16 seeds if there are 64 or more entries;

a maximum of eight seeds if there are 32 to 63 entries;
a maximum of four seeds if there are 16 to 31 entries; or
two seeds if there are less than 16 entries.

12.7.2 The seeded entries shall be selected as the best in the event at that time.

12.7.3 Seeded entries shall be placed as detailed in the example draw in Diagram 2. Seeded
entries in the top half of the draw are placed at the top half of their sections (eg eighths or
sixteenths), and in the bottom half of the draw at the bottom of their sections.

12.8 The top two seeded entries shall be dealt with as follows:
12.8.1 number 1 placed at the top of the draw; and
12.8.2 number 2 placed at the bottom of the draw.

Placing of byes and seeds in a draw

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

50
 General Competition Regulations

Table 1 (for 3 to 16 entries) On a draw sheet numbered 1 to 16.

Entries No of Seed Seed Seeds No of Placement of byes

seeds 1 2 3/4 byes
3 1 1 1 2
4 1 0
5 1 1 3 2, 4, 7
6 1 1 2 2, 7
7 1 1 1 2
8 2 1 8 0
GCR

9 2 1 16 - 7 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 13, 15
10 2 1 16 - 6 2, 4, 6, 11, 13, 15
11 2 1 16 - 5 2, 4, 6, 11, 15
12 2 1 16 - 4 2, 6, 11, 15
13 2 1 16 - 3 2, 6, 15
14 2 1 16 - 2 2, 15
15 2 1 16 - 1 2
16 4 1 16 5, 12 0 -

Table 2 (for 17 to 32 entries) On a draw sheet numbered 1 to 32.

Entries No of Seed Seed Seeds Seeds No of Placement of byes

seeds 1 2 3/4 5/8 byes
17 4 1 32 9, 24 - 15 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31
18 4 1 32 9, 24 - 14 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31
19 4 1 32 9, 24 - 13 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 19, 21, 23, 27, 29, 31
20 4 1 32 9, 24 - 12 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 19, 21, 23, 27, 29, 31
21 4 1 32 9, 24 - 11 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 19, 23, 27, 29, 31
22 4 1 32 9, 24 - 10 2, 4, 6, 10, 14, 19, 23, 27, 29, 31
23 4 1 32 9, 24 - 9 2, 4, 6, 10, 14, 19, 23, 27, 31
24 4 1 32 9, 24 - 8 2, 6, 10, 14, 19, 23, 27, 31
25 4 1 32 9, 24 - 7 2, 6, 10, 14, 23, 27, 31
26 4 1 32 9, 24 - 6 2, 6, 10, 23, 27, 31
27 4 1 32 9, 24 - 5 2, 6, 10, 23, 31
28 4 1 32 9, 24 - 4 2, 10, 23, 31
29 4 1 32 9, 24 - 3 2, 10, 31
30 4 1 32 9, 24 - 2 2, 31
31 4 1 32 9, 24 - 1 2
32 8 1 32 9, 24 5, 13, 20, 28 0 -

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

51
 General Competition Regulations

Table 3 (for 33 to 64 entries) On a draw sheet numbered 1 to 64.

Entries No of Seed Seed Seeds Seeds No of Placement of byes

seeds 1 2 3/4 5/8 byes
33 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 31 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
34 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 30 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
35 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 29 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
36 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 28 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
37 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 27 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
38 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 26 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
39 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 25 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 59, 61, 63
40 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 24 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 28, 30, 35, 37, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 59, 61, 63
41 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 23 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 28, 30, 35, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 59, 61, 63
42 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 22 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 53, 55, 59, 61, 63
43 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 21 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 55, 59, 61, 63
44 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 20 2, 4, 6, 10, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 45, 47, 51, 55, 59, 61, 63
45 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 19 2, 4, 6, 10, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59, 61, 63
46 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 18 2, 4, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59, 61, 63
47 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 17 2, 4, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59, 63
48 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 16 2, 6 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30, 35, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59, 63
49 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 15 2, 6 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59, 63

52
50 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 14 2, 6 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59, 63
51 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 13 2, 6 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 39, 43, 47, 55, 59, 63
52 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 12 2, 6 10, 18, 22, 26, 39, 43, 47, 55, 59, 63
53 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 11 2, 6 10, 18, 22, 26, 39, 47, 55, 59, 63
54 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 10 2, 6 10, 18, 26, 39, 47, 55, 59, 63
55 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 9 2, 6 10, 18, 26, 39, 47, 55, 63
56 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 8 2, 10, 18, 26, 39, 47, 55, 63
57 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 7 2, 10, 18, 26, 47, 55, 63
58 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 6 2, 10, 18, 47, 55, 63
59 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 5 2, 10, 18, 47, 63
60 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 4 2, 18, 47, 63
61 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 3 2, 18, 63
62 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 2 2, 63
63 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 1 2
64 8 1 64 17, 48 9, 25, 40, 56 0 - (seeds 9/16 : 5, 13, 21, 29, 36, 44, 52, 60)

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

GCR
 GCR

General Competition Regulations

Table 4 ( Seeds for 65 to 128 entries) On a draw sheet numbered 1 to 128.

Entries No of Seed Seed Seeds Seeds Seeds

seeds 1 2 3/4 5/8 9/16
65 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
66 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
67 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
68 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
69 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9. 25, 41. 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
70 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
71 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
72 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
73 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
74 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
75 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
76 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
77 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
78 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120

53
79 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
80 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
81 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
82 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
83 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
84 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
85 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
86 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
87 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
88 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
89 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
90 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
91 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
92 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
93 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
94 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
95 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
96 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011
 General Competition Regulations

Table 4 (continued)

Entries No of Seed Seed Seeds Seeds Seeds

seeds 1 2
5/8 9/16
97 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
98 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
99 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
100 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
101 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
102 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
103 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
104 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
105 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
106 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
107 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
108 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
109 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
110 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
111 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
112 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
113 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120

54
114 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
115 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
116 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
117 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
118 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
119 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
120 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
121 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
122 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
123 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
124 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
125 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
126 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
127 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120
128 16 1 128 33, 96 17, 49, 80, 112 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88, 104, 120

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

GCR
 GCR

General Competition Regulations

Table 5 (Byes for 65 to 128 entries) On a draw sheet numbered 1 to 128.

Entries No of Placement of byes

byes
65 63 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 81, 83, 85, 87, 97, 99, 101, 103, 113, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16, 26, 28, 30, 32, 42, 44, 46, 48, 58, 60, 62, 64, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
66 62 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 81, 83, 85, 87, 97, 99, 101, 103, 113, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16, 26, 28, 30, 32, 42, 44, 46, 48, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
67 61 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 81, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 113, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16, 26, 28, 30, 32 42, 44, 46, 48, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
68 60 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 81, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 113, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 48, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
69 59 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 113, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 48, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
70 58 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 113, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
71 57 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 16 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
72 56 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,

55
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 73, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
73 55 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 56, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
74 54 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 105, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
75 53 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 24, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
76 52 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
77 51 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 40, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
78 50 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 121, 123, 125, 127
79 49 2, 4, 6, 8, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011
 General Competition Regulations

Table 5 (continued)

Entries No of Placement of byes

byes
80 48 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 67, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
81 47 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 62, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
82 46 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 99, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
83 45 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 30, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
84 44 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 83, 85, 87, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
85 43 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 42, 44, 46, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
86 42 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 115, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
87 41 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 14, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
88 40 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,

56
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 75, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
89 39 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 54, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
90 38 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 107, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
91 37 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 22, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
92 36 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 91, 93, 95, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
93 35 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 34, 36, 38, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
94 34 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 123, 125, 127
95 33 2, 4, 6, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
96 32 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 69, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

GCR
 GCR

General Competition Regulations

Table 5 (continued)

Entries No of Placement of byes

byes
97 31 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 60, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
98 30 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 85, 87, 101, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
99 29 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 85, 87, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 28, 42, 44, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
100 28 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 85, 87, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 42, 44, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
101 27 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 87, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 42, 44, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
102 26 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 87, 103, 117, 119,
10, 12, 26, 42, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
103 25 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 12, 26, 42, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127

57
104 24 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 77, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
105 23 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 52, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
106 22 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 93, 95, 109, 111, 125, 127
107 21 2, 4, 18, 20, 34, 36, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 93, 95, 111, 125, 127
108 20 2, 4, 18, 34, 36, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 93, 95, 111, 125, 127
109 19 2, 4, 18, 34, 36, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 95, 111, 125, 127
110 18 2, 4, 18, 34, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 95, 111, 125, 127
111 17 2, 4, 18, 34, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 95, 111, 127
112 16 2, 18, 34, 50, 71, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 95, 111, 127
113 15 2, 18, 34, 50, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 58, 79, 95, 111, 127

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011
 General Competition Regulations

Table 5 (continued)

Entries No of Placement of byes

byes
114 14 2, 18, 34, 50, 87, 103, 119,
10, 26, 42, 79, 95, 111, 127
115 13 2, 18, 34, 50, 87, 119,
10, 26, 42, 79, 95, 111, 127
116 12 2, 18, 34, 50, 87, 119,
10, 42, 79, 95, 111, 127
117 11 2, 18, 34, 50, 119,
10, 42, 79, 95, 111, 127
118 10 2, 18, 34, 50, 119,
10, 79, 95, 111, 127
119 9 2, 18, 34, 50,
10, 79, 95, 111, 127
120 8 2, 18, 34, 50,
79, 95, 111, 127
121 7 2, 18, 34, 50, 95, 111, 127
122 6 2, 18, 34, 95, 111, 127
123 5 2, 18, 34, 95, 127

58
124 4 2, 34, 95, 127
125 3 2, 34, 127
126 2 2, 127
127 1 2,
128 0

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

GCR
 General Competition Regulations

DIAGRAM 2 (1 of 4) Placing Byes:

Where to place byes:
Round of 128 in case of 1 bye use 1
Round of 64 2 byes use 1, 2
7 byes use 1 to 7
1 1 seed Round of 32 16 byes use 1 to 16 etc
1 1 seed
2 bye 1 Round of 16
1 1 seed
3
2 bye 1
GCR

4 bye 17
1 1 seed
5
3
6 bye 33
2 bye 1
7
4 bye 17
8 bye 49

9 9/16 seed
5 9/16 seed
10 bye 9
3
11
6 bye 9
12 bye 25
2 bye 1
13
7
14 bye 41
4 bye 9
15
8 bye 25
16 bye 57

17 5/8 seed
9 5/8 seed
18 bye 5
5 5/8 seed
19
10 bye 5
20 bye 21
3
21
11
22 bye 37
6 bye 5
23
12 bye 21
24 bye 53

25 9/16 seed
13 9/16 seed
26 bye 13
7
27
14 bye 13
28 bye 29
4 bye 5
29
15
30 bye 45
8 bye 13
31
16 bye 29
32 bye 61

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

59
 General Competition Regulations

DIAGRAM 2 (2 of 4)

33 3/4 seed
17 3/4 seed
34 bye 3
9 3/4 seed
35
18 bye 3
36 bye 19
5 3/4 seed

GCR
37
19
38 bye 35
10 bye 3
39
20 bye 19
40 bye 51

41 9/16 seed
21 9/16 seed
42 bye 11
11
43
22 bye 11
44 bye 27
6 bye 3
45
23
46 bye 43
12 bye 11
47
24 bye 27
48 bye 59

49 5/8 seed
25 5/8 seed
50 bye 7
13 5/8 seed
51
26 bye 7
52 bye 23
7
53
27
54 bye 39
14 bye 7
55
28 bye 23
56 bye 55

57 9/16 seed
29 9/16 seed
58 bye 15
15
59
30 bye 15
60 bye 31
8 bye 7
61
31
62 bye 47
16 bye 15
63
32 bye 31
64 bye 63

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

60
 General Competition Regulations

DIAGRAM 3 (3 of 4)

65
33
66
17
67 bye 48
34
68
9
GCR

69 bye 32
35 bye 16
70
18
71 bye 16
36 9/16 seed
72 9/16 seed

73 bye 56
37 bye 24
74
19 bye 8
75 bye 40
38
76
10
77 bye 24
39 bye 8
78
20 5/8 seed
79 bye 8
40 5/8 seed
80 5/8 seed

81 bye 60
41 bye 28
82
21 bye 12
83 bye 44
42
84
11 bye 4
85 bye 28
43 bye 12
86
22
87 bye 12
44 9/16 seed
88 9/16 seed

89 bye 52
45 bye 20
90
23 bye 4
91 bye 36
46
92
12 3/4 seed
93 bye 20
47 bye 4
94
24 3/4 seed
95 bye 4
48 3/4 seed
96 3/4 seed

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

61
 General Competition Regulations

DIAGRAM 4 (4 of 4)

97 bye 62
49 bye 30
98
25 bye 14
99 bye 46
50
100
13 bye 6

GCR
101 bye 30
51 bye 14
102
26
103 bye 14
52 9/16 seed
104 9/16 seed

105 bye 54
53 bye 22
106
27 bye 6
107 bye 38
54
108
14
109 bye 22
55 bye 6
110
28 5/8 seed
111 bye 6
56 5/8 seed
112 5/8 seed

113 bye 58
57 bye 26
114
29 bye 10
115 bye 42
58
116
15 bye 2
117 bye 26
59 bye 10
118
30
119 bye 10
60 9/16 seed
120 9/16 seed

121 bye 50
61 bye 18
122
31 bye 2
123 bye 34
62
124
16 2 seed
125 bye 18
63 bye 2
126
32 2 seed
127 bye 2
64 2 seed
128 2 seed

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

62
 General Competition Regulations

12.9 The other seeds shall be dealt with taking regard of the requirements of Regulation 12.10.

12.9.1 Numbers 3 and 4 drawn by lot to the remaining two quarters of the draw.
12.9.2 Numbers 5 to 8 drawn by lot to the remaining eighths of the draw.
12.9.3 Numbers 9 to 16 drawn by lot to the remaining sixteenths of the draw.

12.10 Separation of Entries

12.10.1 the first and second ranked entries from any one Member Association shall be drawn by lot
in opposite halves of the draw;
GCR

12.10.2 the ranking of entries from a Member Association can be amended by the seeding. If this
is done a new ranking order is implicitly established and should be used for the purposes of
Regulation 12.10.

12.10.3 wherever possible, entries from any one Member Association shall not meet in the first
round.

Note: this method of player separation, where it is desired, is recommended for all
tournaments conducted at any level of competition.

12.11 For the purposes of Regulation 12.10, a qualifying entry or a pair from two different Member
Associations shall be regarded as not coming from any particular Member Association.

12.12 The places allocated for any qualifying players / pairs in the main draw shall be drawn by lot, shall
not be placed, and shall not be artificially separated. The main draw shall be made and published
before play begins in the qualifying rounds.

12.13 Where drawing by lot is done under Regulation 12.12, entry separation (as in Regulation 12.10)
shall be ignored.

12.14 The World Rankings on the reference dates shall be utilised for seeding and making the draw even
if some results of completed tournaments have not been incorporated in the rankings.

12.15 After taking entries into the main draw based on the World Ranking and Adjusted and Notional
Rankings (GCR 12.6), as specified in Appendix 8 (refer to Part III, Section 1B, Appendix 8) and
there are vacancies in the draw to be filled by entries without a World Ranking or Adjusted and
Notional Rankings (GCR 12.6), they shall be drawn by Nationality of such entries and then the
entry with the highest National ranking from that Country is taken’.

13. QUALIFYING

Principle of qualifying

13.1 Where entries exceed the required places in the main competition draw, the organisers are
recommended to play qualifying rounds under the supervision of the Referee, as provided for in
Regulations 13.2 to 13.8.

Determination of main or qualifying draw for entries received

13.2. The World Ranking shall be used to determine the players / pairs whose entries can be accepted in
the main draw, with the principles of Regulations 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 used to modify the World
Ranking regardless of whether or not a pair has competed during the ranking period.

13.2.1. If there are more players / pairs that have the same rank than the available places in the
qualifying draw, the selection of entries shall be done by drawing lots.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

63
 General Competition Regulations

Qualifying draw

13.3 The players or pairs not directly in the main competition shall play for a limited number of places
fixed by the organisers and there shall be one place for each eight places in the main draw.

13.4 In level 4 tournaments, the players or pairs not directly in the main competition shall play for a
limited number of places fixed by the organisers and there shall be one place for each four places in
the main draw.

13.5 The draw for the qualifying competition shall be done in accordance with Regulations 12.1 and
12.4.

GCR
13.6 Any seeding in the qualifying draw shall be done in accordance with Regulations 12.5 to 12.9.

13.7 It is recommended that as far as is practicable, entry separation (as in Regulation 12.10) should be
used in each qualifying draw.

13.8 Excess entries in the qualifying

13.8.1 If more players / pairs enter than the organisers can accept even in the qualifying
competition, the World Ranking (as modified using the principles explained in Regulations
12.5 and 12.6) shall be used to determine the players / pairs whose entries can be accepted
into the qualifying draw, and which entries are to fill any subsequent vacancies that may
arise.

13.8.2 If there are more players / pairs that have the same rank than the available places in the
qualifying draw, the selection of entries shall be done by drawing lots.

13.8.3 After taking entries into the qualifying draw based on the World Ranking and Adjusted
and Notional Rankings (GCR 12.6), as specified in Appendix 8 (refer to Part III, Section
1B, Appendix 8) and there are vacancies in the draw to be filled by entries without a World
Ranking or Adjusted and Notional Rankings (GCR 12.6), they shall be drawn by
Nationality of such entries and then the entry with the highest National ranking from that
Country is taken’.

14. WITHDRAWALS AND PROMOTIOINS

14.1 Where players or pairs withdraw their entry from the main competition, the Referee may fill the
vacancies from the entries in the qualifying rounds, provided these entries have not yet lost a match,
even stopping a match in progress if required.

14.2 If a vacancy arises in the main draw, the highest-ranked entry not accepted in the main draw (as
described in Regulation 13.2) and which has not yet lost a match in the qualifying draw can be
placed in the vacancy. If a vacancy arises in the qualifying draw, the highest-ranked entry not
accepted in the qualifying draw (as described in Regulation 13.7) can be placed in the vacancy.
Where more than one vacancy arises, the relevant places shall be filled by drawing lots.

14.3 The withdrawals reported until the draw is made shall be considered while preparing the draw by
amending the list of participants of the main and the qualifying draw as well as of any waiting list.

14.4 The withdrawals reported during the period from the draw until the team managers’ meeting shall
be dealt with in the managers’ meeting according to Regulation 14.2. The organizers shall inform
the next eligible players about their inclusion in the main / qualifying draw.

14.5 The withdrawals reported after the managers’ meeting shall be dealt with by the Referee as and
when they arise (as in Regulation 14.2).

14.6 Where vacancies are filled in under Regulation 14.2, entry separation (as in Regulation 12.10) shall
be ignored.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

64
 General Competition Regulations

14.7 The Referee may re-draw a particular qualifying draw if it has been rendered severely imbalanced
and if play in that draw has not begun.

15. ALTERATIONS and SUBSTITUTIONS IN THE DRAW

15.1 In Level 1 to 4 tournaments except Enopi Cups, no alterations or substitutions are permitted to the
draw after the draw has been made of except under corrections as in Regulation 15.3.1 or
promotions as in Regulation 14.2. In case of Enopi Cups, substitution under 15.3 to 15.5 shall be
permitted being the tournament with nationally restricted entries.
GCR

15.2 In other tournaments, no changes whatsoever may be made to the draw except as provided in
Regulations 15.3 to 15.5: in particular, no player (singles) may be moved from one draw position to
another, and no pair may be moved from one draw position to another except in the situation
described in Regulation 15.5.2.

15.3 The Referee shall only permit an alteration to the draw if either Regulation 15.3.1 is met, or both
Regulations 15.3.2 and 15.3.3 are met:

15.3.1 play in that draw has not begun, and an error has been made in accordance with control of
entries (Regulation 5.4) or making the draw (Regulation 12);

15.3.2 prior to the player’s first scheduled match, a player is prevented from competing through
illness, injury, or other unavoidable hindrance;

15.3.3 the substitute player / pair would have been either unseeded, or seeded in no higher a
seeding group than the seeding group of the original player / pair. The seeding groups are
(in order) 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 to 8, and 9 to 16.

15.3.4 In exceptional circumstances, the Referee may redraw a particular main draw that has been
rendered severely imbalanced, provided there is no qualifying and play in that draw has not
begun.

15.4 Subject to Regulation 15.3, substitution in singles is only permitted in tournaments with nationally
restricted entry. e. g. Continental Championships and Enopi Cups

15.5 Subject to Regulation 15.3, substitution in doubles is only permitted:

15.5.1 to enable the remaining player to have a substitute partner from any Member Association,
provided the constitution of no other pair is affected;

15.5.2 to enable the remaining players from two original pairs affected by Regulation 15.3.2 to
partner each other.

In this situation, if one of the original pairs has drawn a bye, that place in the draw shall be
filled by the new pair; otherwise the place to be filled shall be drawn by lot;

15.5.3 to have a substitute pair in tournaments with nationally restricted entry, is only permitted
until the draw is made,. e.g. Continental Championships and Enopi Cup.

15.6 Promotions under Regulation 14 take priority over substitutions except under Regulations 15.4 and
15.5.

15.7 A player (singles), a player as part of a pair (doubles), or a pair losing a match shall not play again
in the same event in the same tournament.

15.8 In tournaments played under the pool system or in groups, the Referee may allow the substitution of
a player / pair if the original player / pair is prevented from playing through illness, injury or other
unavoidable hindrance. Such substitution can only take place until the first match of that player /
pair has started but, once started, no substitution can take place.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

65
 General Competition Regulations

15.9 If a player or pair fails to turn up in time for a match the Referee may declare a ‘no show’ and
award the match as a walk over to the opposing player or pair’

16. RANKING IN TOURNAMENTS PLAYED UNDER THE POOL SYSTEM OR IN GROUPS

16.1 The ranking in tournaments played under the pool system or in groups shall be determined in
accordance with the Regulations 16.2 to 16.3.

16.2 In case of Individual Championships:

GCR
16.2.1 Ranking in individual championships will be established by the number of matches won.

16.2.2 If two players / pairs have won the same number of matches, the winner of the match
between them will be ranked higher.

16.2.3 If three or more players / pairs have won the same number of matches, ranking will be
established by the difference between total games won and total games lost, with greater
difference ranked higher.

16.2.3.1 If this still leaves two players / pairs equal, the winner of the match between them
will be ranked higher.

16.2.4 If three or more players / pairs have won the same number of matches and are equal in the
difference between total games won and total games lost, ranking will be established by the
difference between total points won and total points lost, with greater difference ranked
higher.

16.2.4.1 If this still leaves two players / pairs equal, the winner of the match between them
will be ranked higher.

16.2.4.2 If three or more players / pairs are still equal, then ranking will be established by
drawing lots.

16.2.5 If illness, injury, disqualification or other unavoidable hindrance prevents a player / pair
completing all the pool matches, all the results of that player / pair shall be deleted.
Retiring during a match shall be considered to be not completing all pool matches.

16.2.6 A player / pair is entitled to prizes according to results actually obtained before any
withdrawal due to injury.

16.3 In case of team championships:

16.3.1 Ranking will be established by the number of ties won.

16.3.2 If two teams have won the same number of ties, the winner of the tie between them will be
ranked higher.

16.3.3 If three or more teams have won the same number of ties, ranking will be established by
the difference between total ties won and total ties lost, with greater difference ranked
higher.

16.3.3.1 If this still leaves two teams equal, the winner of the tie between them will be
ranked higher.

16.3.4 If three or more teams have won the same number of ties and are equal in the difference
between total ties won and total ties lost, ranking will be established by the difference
between total matches won and total matches lost, with greater difference ranked higher.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

66
 General Competition Regulations

16.3.4.1 If this still leaves two teams equal, the winner of the ties between them will be
ranked higher.

16.3.5 If three or more teams have won the same number of ties and are equal in the difference
between total ties won and total ties lost and are also equal in the difference between total
matches won and total matches lost, ranking will be established by the difference between
total games won and total games lost, with greater difference ranked higher.

16.3.5.1 If this still leaves two teams equal, the winner of the tie between them will be
ranked higher.
GCR

16.3.6 If three or more teams have won the same number of ties and are equal in the difference
between total ties won and total ties lost and are equal in the difference between total
matches won and total matches lost and are equal in the difference between total games
won and total games lost, ranking will be established by the difference between total points
won and total points lost, with greater difference ranked higher.

16.3.6.1 If this still leaves two teams equal, the winner of the tie between them will be
ranked higher.

16.3.6.2 If three or more teams are still equal, then ranking will be established by drawing
lots.

16.3.7 A team is entitled to prizes according to results actually obtained before any withdrawal or
disqualification.

16.3.8 If a team is unable to complete all their pool ties, all the results of that team shall be
deleted’.

16.4 The following Order of plays are recommended in matches played in a pool system:

Group of Group of Group of Group of

3 4 5 6
1v3 1v4 1v5 1v6
2v3 2v4 2v4
2v3 3v5
1v3 3v5
1v2 2v4 1v4 1v4
2v5
3v4 2v5 3v6
1v2 1v3
1v3
4v5 2v6
2v3 4v5

3v4 1v5
1v2 2v3
4v6

5v6
3v4
1v2

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

67
 General Competition Regulations

17. ADVERTISING IN THE PLAYING AREA

17.1 The only allowable display of advertising in words or pictures anywhere within the two-metre clear
space surrounding the court (see Part III – Section 1B, Appendix 2, page 1) or over the court itself
must satisfy Regulations 17.2 to 17.10.

17.2 Any form of advertising in the playing area must not distract players, spectators or TV viewers, or
cause any confusion with the court lines.

The Court

GCR
17.3 A maximum of two identical emblems of the court supplier can be situated flush with the court
surface such that there is at most one outside each baseline 30 centimetres or more away. Each
emblem can be 170 centimetres or less by 30 centimetres or less.

17.4 A maximum of two identical emblems of a tournament sponsor can be situated flush with the court
surface such that there is at most one outside each sideline or each baseline 30 centimetres or more
away. Each emblem can be 170 centimetres or less by 30 centimetres or less.

17.5 Two emblems of a tournament sponsor can be situated flush with the court surface in the area under
the net equidistant from each of the two short service lines and from each of the side lines for
singles. Each emblem can be 250 centimetres or less by 100 centimetres or less.

17.6 There is no restriction on the shape of the advertisement(s). No 3D advertising can be made on the
surface of the court. However, non-slip materials with similar properties to the rest of the playing
surface must be used to apply / display advertisements.

The Net

17.7 A single advertisement can be situated on the net at least 100 centimetres from either end of the net
and at least 12.5 centimetres from both the net tape and the bottom of the net. The advertisement
must be applied by paint or dye and no solid advertisement will be permitted.

17.8 A maximum of two net supplier’s emblems can appear on the net. If present, they should be placed
such that there is one on each end of the net on opposite sides of the court. Each emblem must be
placed on the white tape at a distance of 4 centimetres from the post and can be 3.5 centimetres high
or less and 10 centimetres broad or less.

The Posts

17.9 Each post can have a maximum of two identical emblems. Each emblem must face an end of the
court, be flush with the surface of the post and be 30 centimetres high or less, and 3 centimetres
broad or less.

Umpire’s and service judge’s chair

17.10 The umpire’s and service judge’s chairs are always permitted to have advertising. Rackets and
players’ clothing are permitted to have advertising in accordance with Regulations 19 to 23.

18. VIRTUAL IMAGING OR ADVERTISING

Use of any virtual imaging or advertising on the TV signal at BWF-sanctioned tournaments is not
permitted without prior written approval of the BWF except where rights are granted to Continental
Confederations or other promoting organisations

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

68
 General Competition Regulations

19. CLOTHING (General)

19.1 For the purpose of these Regulations, an article of clothing shall be defined as anything worn or
carried by a player during play, except the racket, and including, but not limited to, pullovers, shirts,
shorts, skirts, socks, shoes, headbands, towels, wristbands, bandages and medical supports.

19.2 In order to ensure attractive presentation of Badminton at tournaments organised or sanctioned by

the BWF, all clothing worn by players shall be acceptable Badminton sports clothing. It is not
acceptable to tape over nor to pin on advertising nor in any other way to modify such clothing to
comply with advertising or other regulations.
GCR

19.3 Regulations regarding advertising apply only to clothing worn during play.

19.4 The exact regulations regarding advertising must be clearly indicated on the tournament prospectus
or entry form and advised to entrants in all associated communications.

19.5 In applying Regulations 19 to 23 the decision of the Referee at each tournament shall be final.

20. COLOUR OF PLAYERS’ CLOTHING

20.1 In all sanctioned tournaments, including those organised by the BWF itself and multi-sport games,
each article of clothing may be of any colour or combination of colours.

20.2 Team Competitions

In all BWF team championships ie Thomas Cup, Uber Cup, Sudirman Cup, Suhandinata Cup
players must wear team colours. That is, each player must wear the same colour and design of shirts
and shorts (or equivalent articles of clothing) throughout a tie.

20.3 Singles matches

Each player must wear, as far as colour and design is concerned, shirts and shorts (or equivalent
articles of clothing) in accordance with Regulations 20.3.1 to 20.3.10 throughout a match.

20.3.1 In International tournaments, the colour of clothing is optional.

20.3.2 In Continental Circuit tournaments, the colour of clothing is optional or dependent on the
Continental Confederation’s regulations.

20.3.3 In World Senior Championships the colour of clothing is optional.

20.3.4 In Superseries tournaments, it is mandatory that, in the main draw the opposing players in
each match wear significantly different colours from each other.

20.3.5 In Grand Prix tournaments, it is mandatory that, from quarter final onwards, the
opposing players in each match wear significantly different colours from each other

20.3.6 In World Championships, it is mandatory that, the opposing players in each match wear
significantly different colours from each other.

20.3.7 In Enopi World Junior Championships (Individual/Team Championships)it is

mandatory that, the opposing players in each match wear significantly different colours
from each other.

20.3.8 In Thomas & Uber Cups continental stage, it is recommended that the opposing players
in each match wear significantly different colours from each other. In Thomas & Uber
Cups final stage, it is mandatory that the opposing players in each match wear significantly
different colours from each other.

20.3.9 In Sudirman Cup, it is mandatory that the opposing players in each match wear
significantly different colours from each other.
Part III – Section 1A
GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

69
 General Competition Regulations

20.3.10 In Olympic Games, it is mandatory for the opposing players in each match wear
significantly different colours from each other. Preferred colours of shirts need to be
registered before the Games

20.4 Doubles matches

Each player in a given pair must wear, as far as colour and design is concerned, shirts and shorts (or
equivalent articles of clothing) throughout a match in accordance with Regulations 20.4.1 to
20.4.10.

20.4.1 In International tournaments, the colour of clothing is optional.

GCR
20.4.2 In Continental Circuit tournaments the colour of clothing is optional or dependent on the
Continental Confederation’s regulations.

20.4.3 In World Senior Championships, the colour of clothing is optional.

20.4.4 In Superseries tournaments, it is mandatory that, in the main draw onwards, the opposing
pairs in each match wear significantly different colours from each other.

20.4.5 In Grand Prix tournaments, it is mandatory that, from the quarter finals onwards, the
opposing players in each match wear significantly different colours from each other.

20.4.6 In World Championships, it is mandatory that the opposing pairs in each match wear
significantly different colours from each other.

20.4.7 In Enopi World Junior Championships (Individual/Team Championships)it is

mandatory that the opposing players in each match wear significantly different colours
from each other

20.4.8 In Thomas & Uber Cups continental stage, it is recommended that the opposing pairs in
each match wear significantly different colours from each other. In Thomas & Uber Cups
final stage, it is mandatory that the opposing pairs in each match wear significantly
different colours from each other.

20.4.9 In Sudirman Cup, it is mandatory that the opposing pairs in each match wear significantly
different colours from each other.

20.4.10 In Olympic Games, it is mandatory for the opposing players in each match wear
significantly different colours from each other. Preferred colours of shirts need to be
registered before the Games

20.4.11 In BWF level 1 and 2 tournaments, it is mandatory for doubles partners to wear the same
colour from the start of the main draw onwards. In BWF level 1 and 2 tournaments it is
mandatory from the main draw onwards, the opposing pairs in each match wear
significantly different colours from each other.

In BWF level 3 tournaments it is mandatory for doubles partners to wear the same colour
from the quarter finals onwards. In BWF level 3 tournaments it is mandatory from the
quarter finals onwards, the opposing pairs in each match wear significantly different
colours from each other

20.5 For all team championships, preferred colours of shirts should be registered with the BWF.

20.6 In individual and team championships if the opposing players/pairs involved in a match are not
wearing significantly different coloured clothing, the player/pair ranked lower will be required to
wear clothing of a significantly different colour. Where both players/pairs have the same or no
ranking the player or pair listed lower in the first M & Q report made for the tournament will be
required to change the colour of clothing.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

70
 General Competition Regulations

21. DESIGNS ON PLAYERS’ CLOTHING

21.1 In all sanctioned tournaments, including those organised by the BWF itself and Multi-sport games,
each article of clothing may only bear a design as provided in Regulations 21.2 to 21.4.

21.2 Abstract designs are permitted when devoid of advertising, commercial or promotional content.

21.3 The front of the shirt may carry the flag along with the country name or abbreviation thereof or
national emblem of the association represented not exceeding 20 square centimeters in total. The
country name on its own and / or along with sponsor’s name or logo shall not be permitted.
GCR

21.4 A design is allowed when it forms part of an advert permitted by Regulation 23 and falls wholly
within the permitted dimensions.

22. LETTERING ON PLAYERS’ CLOTHING

22.1 In all sanctioned tournaments, including those organised by the BWF itself, and Multi-sport games,
each article of clothing may only have visible lettering as provided in Regulations 22.2 to 22.5.

22.2 Colour, style and height of lettering

22.2.1 Lettering shall be in capital letters in the Roman alphabet (except as in Regulation 22.5.2),
and in one single colour contrasting with that of the shirt.

22.2.2 If there is a pattern on the back of the shirt, the lettering should be on a contrasting panel.

22.2.3 In order that lettering be legible from a distance for spectators in the stadium and television
viewers, lettering must be a minimum height of 6 centimetres and a maximum height of 10
centimetres.

22.2.4 Lettering should be horizontal, or as close to horizontal as practically possible, and placed
near the top of the shirt.

22.3 Player names

Any name of a player on the back of the shirt must be in accordance with Regulations 22.3.1 to
22.3.10, and shall meet all requirements of Regulation 22. If used, the player's name shall include
the family name (or an abbreviation thereof) and, if desired, the initials of the given name(s) or
nickname and shall correspond with the name on the entry.

22.3.1 In International tournaments, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is optional.

22.3.2 In Continental Circuit tournaments, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is
mandatory in Individual tournaments and optional or dependent on the Continental
Confederation’s regulations in Team Championships.

22.3.3 In Superseries and Grand Prix tournaments, the name of the player on the back of the
shirt is mandatory.

22.3.4 In World Championships, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is mandatory.

22.3.5 In Enopi Cups, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is mandatory.

22.3.6 In Thomas & Uber Cup continental stage, the name of the player on the back of the shirt
is optional, unless otherwise required by the respective Continental Confederation. In
Thomas & Uber Cups final stage, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is
mandatory.

22.3.7 In Sudirman Cup, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is mandatory for
Division 1 and optional for the other divisions.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

71
 General Competition Regulations

22.3.8 In Suhandinata Cup, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is mandatory.

22.3.9 In Olympic Games, the name of the player on the back of the shirt is mandatory. Players’
names need to be registered to ensure consistency with the names on scoreboards.

22.3.10 In World Senior Championships, the name of the player on the back of shirt is
recommended.

22.4 Country Name

The name of the player’s country may appear on the back of the shirt and must be in accordance

GCR
with Regulations 22.4.1 to 22.4.10 but, if used, shall meet all requirements of Regulation 22. The
country name, if used, shall be either full country name in English or Olympic approved
abbreviation.

22.4.1 In International tournaments, the name of the player’s country on the back of the shirt is
optional.

22.4.2 In Continental Circuit tournaments, the name of the player’s country on the back of the
shirt is mandatory in Team Championships and optional or dependent on the Continental
Confederation’s regulations in the Individual tournaments.

22.4.3 In Superseries and Grand Prix tournaments, the name of the player’s country on the back
of the shirt is optional.

22.4.4 In World Championships, the name of the player’s country on the back of the shirt is
optional.

22.4.5 In Enopi Cups, the name of the player’s country on the back of the shirt is optional.

22.4.6 In Thomas & Uber Cups continental stage and Thomas & Uber Cups final stage, the
name of the player’s country on the back of the shirt is mandatory.

22.4.7 In Sudirman Cup, the name of the player’s country on the back of the shirt is mandatory
for all divisions.

22.4.8 In Suhandinata Cup, the name of the player’s country on the back of the shirt is optional
but mandatory from the quarter finals onwards.

22.4.9 In Olympic Games, the name of the player’s NOC on the back of the shirt is mandatory.

22.4.10 In World Senior Championships, the name of country on the back of shirt is optional.

22.5 Lettering sequence and use in advertisements

22.5.1 The sequence on the shirt from top to bottom shall be player name (if present), country
name (if present), and advert (if present).

22.5.2 Lettering is also allowed when it forms part of an advert permitted by Regulation 23, and
falls wholly within the permitted dimensions. Such lettering can then be in any alphabet.

The following table summarises the requirements of Regulations 20 & 22.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

72
 GCR

General Competition Regulations

Summary of General Competition Regulations 20 and 22: Colour of clothing and names

Tournament Colour and design of players’ shirts, skirts and Colour and design of pairs’ shirts, skirts and shorts in Player name on back of shirt Country name on back of shirt
shorts in singles matches (as of 1 January 2010) doubles matches (as of 1 January 2010)
International Different colours for opposing players optional Same colour optional Optional Optional
tournaments
Continental Circuit Different colours for opposing players optional, Same colour optional, or dependent on Continental Optional in Team Optional in Individual
tournaments or dependent on Continental Confederation Confederation regulations Championships or dependent tournaments or dependent on
regulations on Continental Confederation Continental Confederation
regulations and Mandatory in regulations and Mandatory in
Individual tournaments Team Championships
Superseries Mandatory to wear same colour from main draw Mandatory to wear same colour from main draw Mandatory Optional
onwards onwards
Grand Prix From
finals onwards, mandatory in Grand Prix From
finals onwards, mandatory in Grand Prix that Mandatory Optional
tournaments that opposing players wear significantly different opposing pairs wear significantly different colours
colours from each other from each other
World Championships From main draw onwards, mandatory that Mandatory to wear same colour. Mandatory Optional
opposing players wear different colours from Mandatory that opposing pairs wear different colours
each other from each other from main draw onwards

73
Enopi Cups From main draw onwards, mandatory that Mandatory to wear same colour. Mandatory that Mandatory Optional
(Individual) opposing players wear different colours from opposing pairs wear different colours from each other
each other from main draw onwards.
Thomas & Uber Cups Team must all wear same colour and design of Team must all wear same colour and design of shirts Continental stage – optional, Mandatory
shirts and shorts. In continental stage and shorts. In continental stage Recommended and in unless otherwise required by
recommended and in final stage mandatory that final stage mandatory that opposing pairs wear different the respective Continental
opposing players wear different colours from colours from each other. Confederation
each other. Final stage – mandatory
Sudirman Cup Team must all wear same colour and design of Team must all wear same colour and design of shirts Mandatory for Division 1, Mandatory
shirts and shorts. Recommended that opposing and shorts. Recommended that opposing pairs wear optional for other divisions
players wear different colours from each other different colours from each other but mandatory for the
but mandatory for the knock-out stage. knock-out stage.
Suhandinata Cup Team must all wear same colour and design of Team must all wear same colour and design of shirts Mandatory Mandatory
shirts and shorts. Recommended that opposing and shorts. Recommended that opposing pairs wear
players wear different colours from each other different colours from each other but mandatory from
but mandatory from quarter finals onwards. quarter finals onwards.
Olympic Games Mandatory for opposing players to wear different Mandatory for doubles partners to wear same colour, Mandatory NOC name mandatory
colours from each other. and that opposing pairs wear different colours from Names should be registered
Preferred colour of shirts to be pre-registered. each other. Preferred colour of shirts to be pre- for consistency with
registered. scoreboards
World Senior Optional Optional Recommented Optional
Championships

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011
 General Competition Regulations

23. ADVERTISING ON PLAYERS’ CLOTHING

23.1 In all sanctioned tournaments, including those organised by the BWF itself and Multi-sport games,
articles of clothing may only have advertising as provided in Regulations 23.2 to 23.5.

23.2 The shirt may carry advertising as in Regulations 23.2.1 to 23.2.2.

23.2.1 Advertisements may appear on the following locations: left sleeve, right sleeve, left
shoulder, right shoulder, left collar, right collar, right chest, left chest. Each advertisement
must be 20 square centimetres or less. Other than front of shirt, only one per location; and
there must be no more than four in total National flags or emblems for the purpose of this

GCR
regulation count as an advert and(implementation 1 May 2011)

23.2.2 Advertising contained in a band of uniform width not exceeding 10 centimetres; such a
band may be at any angle and may be on the front of the shirt, the back of the shirt, or both.

23.2.3 If, in the Referee’s sole judgment, there is a clash between the content of the advertising in
Regulation 23.2.2 and the tournament sponsors or the TV broadcasters, or if the content of
the advertising would infringe local laws or be considered offensive, then the Referee may
limit advertising on the shirt to Regulation 23.2.1.

23.3 Other Clothing

23.3.1 Each sock and each shoe may carry two advertisements of 20 square centimetres or less.

23.3.2 Each other article of clothing may carry one advertisement of 20 square centimetres or less.

23.4 Restrictions on the advertising

23.4.1 The advertisements in Regulations 23.2 and 23.3 may be the clothing manufacturer’s
emblem or that of any sponsor.

23.4.2 Each advertisement shall only be of one organisation or product.

23.4.3 The advertisements shall follow the International Olympic Committee principles and shall
not contain any political, religious and which is not a commercial brand, registered mark or
trade mark. (e.g. I don’t have a sponsor, I am nice, etc.).

23.5 In multi-sports games (e.g. Olympic Games) the organisers may specify more restrictive advertising
limitations on players’ clothing during play than in Regulations 23.2 to 23.4.

23.6 Member Association advertising

23.6.1 Member Associations may use an area not exceeding fifty square centimeters on their
players’ shorts or lower part of dresses or skirts.

23.6.2 The area shall typically be used for a Member Association’s logo or an advertisement for a
Member Association’s sponsor provided it conforms to Regulation 23.4.2.

23.6.3 If the Member Association does not use such area, that area shall not be utilized for any
other advert.

23.6.4 If the advertisement is used by any one player during a tournament, it must be used on the
shorts or skirts of all players from any one Member Association during that tournament.

23.6.5 Any Member Association wishing to use this type of advertising must have written
permission from the BWF for doing so.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

74
 General Competition Regulations

24. RESULTS

24.1 The draw must be e-mailed to BWF, via the stipulated software file, as soon as it has been made.

24.2 The results must be e-mailed to the BWF, using the stipulated software file on a daily basis showing
full player names, Member Associations who have entered the players and the BWF numbers where
players have them.

24.3 Final results must be e-mailed to the BWF within 24 hours of the conclusion of the event, using the
stipulated software file. In case of contingency, the print out of the updated draws must be faxed
within the stipulated time. Those not received will be excluded from the World Ranking. (Refer
GCR

Regulation 31).

25. WITHDRAWALS

25.1 It is a condition of entry to a BWF-sanctioned tournament that the organisers must be notified of
any withdrawal by a player / pair or team from the tournament or any event thereof.

25.1.1 Where such withdrawal is made no later than the Sunday immediately preceding the draw
no penalty is involved.

25.1.2 Any withdrawal after the Sunday immediately preceding the draw for any reason
whatsoever, renders the Member Association concerned liable to an amount of US$ 250
per player / pair to the BWF for level 1 tournaments, to the organisers and BWF for levels
2 & 3 tournaments and US$ 150 for level 4 BWF sanctioned tournaments to the organisers,
Continental Confederations and BWF , for the inconvenience caused by the withdrawal.

25.1.3 Where there is a withdrawal of 10 or more players by one Member Association in any
given tournament the BWF disciplinary committee will consider whether any additional
penalty to that listed in Regulation 31 (Penalties) is applicable.

25.1.4 For the purpose of these regulations, retiring from a match shall not be considered to be a
withdrawal. No show for a match in a tournament shall be treated as walkover to the
opposition and shall not prevent a player / pair from competing in another event in the
same tournament

25.1.5 Responsibility for the administration of withdrawals and penalties is allocated as per the
following table. All responsible organisations should observe the same principles as the
BWF
Table
Tournament Responsible Other arrangements
BWF CC
Thomas Cup Final Stage V
Thomas Cup Continental Stage V
Uber Cup Final Stage V
Uber Cup Continental Stage V
Sudirman Cup V
Super Series V
Super Series Finals V
Grand Prix and Grand Prix Gold V
International Tournaments V
International Junior Tournaments V
World Championships V
Suhandinata and EnopiCups V
World Senior Championships V
Continental Championships V
Olympic Games BWF and IOC responsible
Continental Multi-sport games e.g. Asian Games, Responsibility assigned according
Panamerican Games, African Games, etc to the Charter of the Games
Part III – Section 1A
GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

75
 General Competition Regulations

Commonwealth Games Responsibility assigned according

to the Charter of the Games
International Challenge, International Series and V
Future Series

25.1.6 The payment of withdrawal fees shall be collected by the BWF and the amount shall be
forwarded to the organisers after US$50 per withdrawal is retained by BWF except as
follows:

If the player was entered by the Member Association under whose jurisdiction the

GCR
competition was held, the whole payment shall be retained by the BWF.

For level 1 tournaments the whole withdrawal fee is retained by BWF.

For level 2 and 3 tournaments US$50 is retained by BWF.

For level 4 tournaments US$50 shall be forwarded to the organisers, US$50 to the
Continental Confederation and US$50 retained by BWF. If the player was entered
by the Member Association under whose jurisdiction the competition was held, then
the payment shall be equally divided between BWF and the Continental
confederation’

25.2 The referees of all BWF-sanctioned Tournaments must, immediately after the conclusion of the
tournament, advise the BWF through the Referee’s Report about all players (or teams in the case of
team competitions) who withdrew from the Tournament after the date specified for withdrawals
without fees or who did not appear.

25.3 For each player or team in Regulation 25.2, the organisers must advise the BWF of the
circumstances of the withdrawal, including whether they were notified, and supply a copy of any
relevant documentation.

25.4 Within four weeks of the conclusion of each BWF-sanctioned tournament, the Member Association
concerned will be invoiced with the fees payable.

26. CONDUCT OF TOURNAMENTS OR FIXTURES

26.1 A Referee shall be appointed for all sanctioned tournaments or other fixtures.

26.1.1 The Referee shall be in overall charge of the tournament.

26.1.2 The Referee or a deputy shall always be present in the hall during the playing of matches.

26.2 The BWF shall appoint the Referee for all tournaments organised by the BWF itself.

26.3 The BWF shall appoint the Technical Delegate(s) and the Referee(s) for Multi-sport games, or
alternatively, at its sole discretion, may approve a nomination from the organiser.

26.4 The duties of the Referee shall include:

26.4.1 ensuring that the conduct of the tournament is in accordance with the Laws of Badminton,
the Rules and Regulations of the BWF and any other regulations pertinent to the particular
competition;

26.4.2 ensure that the players given facilities and playing conditions of adequate standard and
safety.

26.4.3 approval of the programme of play and practice schedule; and

26.4.4 overall control of and ensuring that there is an adequate panel of technical officials of
requisite ability and appropriate international representation.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

76
 General Competition Regulations

26.5 Any player participating in two matches is entitled to a minimum interval of 30 minutes between
them.

26.6 At all Level 1 and 2 tournaments, BWF may appoint a BWF Tournament Director.

26.7 At a BWF-sanctioned tournament where the BWF has not appointed the Referee, the BWF may
appoint a BWF Representative.

26.8 The duties of the BWF Tournament Director or BWF Representative, wherever appointed, shall be:

26.8.1 to get all the information regarding the tournament and to take any necessary actions;
GCR

26.8.2 to give advice to the organisers, ensuring the general organisation is at desired standard;

26.8.3 to ensure proper presentation of the game and co-ordination with media and publicity.

26.8.4 to attend the tournament and any associated meetings, such as publicity conferences and
general social functions;

26.8.5 to represent the interests of the BWF in any dispute not the direct responsibility of the
Referee; and

26.8.6 to support the Referee in his general duties.

26.9 Should the BWF be represented at a tournament under the control of a BWF-appointed Referee, the
duties of such Representative(s) shall not conflict with the responsibilities of the Referee.

26.10 Shuttles

26.10.1 One brand of BWF approved shuttle only must be adopted for exclusive use during any
tournament and the name of this brand must be advertised in the prospectus.

26.10.2 No rationing of shuttles per match must be allowed, and all shuttles used must be a charge
against the tournament and not against the players concerned.

26.11 Warm Up and Practice Courts:

26.11.1 For the BWF-sanctioned tournaments the warm up and practice court requirements shall
be as under:

Level of tournament
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Warm Up courts Mandatory Recommended Recommended Recommended
Minimum Warm up 2 2 2 2
courts.
Practice courts Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Recommended
Minimum Practice 4 4 4 2
courts.

26.11.2 These facilities shall be provided at least one day prior to commencement of tournament
until the conclusion of the tournament.

26.11.3 The practice time must be offered in the practice hall and main venue throughout the
competition and it shall be allocated on an equitable basis having regard to the number of
active players in each team.

26.11.4 It is recommended that main hall practice be available for approximately 3 hours per day to
players active in the tournament. The practice schedule must be agreed with the Referee in
advance of the tournament.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

77
 General Competition Regulations

27. PRIZES

27.1 A prize fund may be awarded to players in all international tournaments sanctioned by the BWF
and, should be made in cash. Any prizes in kind shall be awarded over and above the prize fund as
additional prizes. The entry form or prospectus for the tournament shall set out the total value of any
such prizes.

27.2 In a tournament where all prizes are below the limit of US $5,000 and the total prize fund is less
than US $50,000 and level 4 tournaments, those prizes, may be given directly to the player
concerned, or in accordance with the instructions of the player’s Member Association.

GCR
27.3 Prize money from tournaments with larger prize funds

27.3.1 In a tournament where any prize is US $5,000 or more, or the total prize fund is US
$50,000 or more and level 1 to 3 tournaments, all prizes must be paid in accordance with
Regulations 27.3.2 to 27.3.5.

27.3.2 All prizes must be paid to the BWF within three weeks of the end of the tournament. Upon
receipt of these prizes, the BWF shall without delay remit the appropriate amounts to the
Member Associations of the players concerned.

27.3.3 If prize monies are not received by the BWF after three weeks, an interest surcharge of
0.25% per week on any outstanding amount will be added to the total prize money due, this
interest to accrue on the first day of each succeeding week that the payment is outstanding.

27.3.4 Proof of payment of withholding tax must be supplied to the BWF within nine months of
the tournament or sanction of future tournaments may be withdrawn. Individual
withholding tax certificates in appropriate legal form in each participant’s name shall be
issued along with such proof of payment, so that the participant will be able to take credit
of such withholding tax, if allowable, in his country.

27.3.5 The BWF shall not have any responsibility for paying to Member Associations any prize
monies that have not been paid in accordance with Regulation 27.3.2

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

78
 General Competition Regulations

27.4 Division of prize money

27.4.1 Prize Money

The following division of prizes is recommended for the BWF sanctioned Tournaments
and all other tournaments with a comparable number of competitors.

% of total prize money

Winner Runner- Semi- Quarter- Last 16 Total
up finalists finalists
Men’s singles 7.50 3.80 1.45 0.60 0.35
GCR

Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.50 3.80 2.90 2.40 2.80 19.40
Women’s singles 7.50 3.80 1.45 0.60 0.35
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.50 3.80 2.90 2.40 2.80 19.40
Men’s doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
Women’s doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
Mixed doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
*per pair

27.4.2 Member Associations may vary the above divisions for tournaments with fewer than five
events.

27.5 The BWF will retain the undistributed prize money in all BWF level 1 to 3 tournaments, and
Continental Confederations will retain the undistributed prize money in all level 4 tournaments,
where the entry is so low that the prize money is not fully distributed.

28. PLAYER MOVEMENT

28.1 A player may be entered into BWF-sanctioned competitions by any Member Association until and
unless another Member Association objects.

28.2 To object, a Member Association must produce evidence that the player concerned was under
contract to it or one of its regional associations or clubs.

28.3 A player may be entered into BWF sanctioned competitions by any Member Associations on the
condition that BWF have been informed in the format required by BWF and there is no objection
from another Member Association’.

28.4 The BWF will review the contract and consider the player’s observations before deciding if the
contract is enforceable
.

28.5 If the contract is accepted as enforceable, the player will be barred from entry to international
competitions for the period specified in the contract (or until the terms of the contract have been
adhered to, if the contract provides for possible player movement). However, the maximum period
of ineligibility to enter international competitions will be six months, regardless of the contract’s
provisions.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

79
 General Competition Regulations

29. DOPING AND FEMININITY CONTROL

Doping control is regulated by the provisions of the Anti-Doping Regulations which shall apply to all
tournaments run directly or indirectly under the auspices of the BWF or one of its members, whether or not
the tournament needs sanction by the BWF. The BWF encourages dope-testing at all BWF-sanctioned
tournaments.

30. WORLD RANKING SYSTEM

The BWF is empowered to implement or modify the World Ranking System [Part III Section 1B

GCR
Appendix 6].

31. PENALTIES

31.1 Any player / pair, coach or team official, tournament organiser who commits an offence as referred
to in Regulation 31.2 shall be levied with a penalty as stated in Regulation 31.2 to be retained by the
BWF.

31.2 For the details of offences covered under this regulation and penalties payable therefore, please refer
to the Table of Offences and Penalties (Part III Section 1 B - Appendix 11)

31.3 The penalty for the offences shall be based on the Referee’s Report for that tournament.

31.4 The Referee shall send a report for any misconduct warranting a disqualification of a player or a
team official, covered by the Players’ Code of Conduct (Part III, Section 1B, Appendix 4) and Code
of Conduct for Coaches and Team Officials (Part III, Section 1B, Appendix 9).

31.5 Any player / pair who is issued a black card in any BWF sanctioned tournament shall be
disqualified from participating in all events (in case of a team championships, subsequent matches
and ties) in the tournament in which such black card was issued. For the purpose of these
regulations, Suhandinata Cup and EnopiCups shall be considered to be different tournaments.

31.6 On receipt of a report of a black card or a report of misbehaviour of a player or a person covered
under Code of Conduct for Coaches and Team Officials (Regulation 31.4), the BWF shall
immediately initiate the disciplinary proceedings as per the Disciplinary Regulations.

31.7 If the Member Association fails to settle withdrawal fee or penalty within 60 days of the original
invoice, the Member Association concerned shall be barred from entering any player in all BWF
sanctioned tournaments.

31.8 The Member Association will be permitted four weeks to appeal against any penalty to the
Disciplinary Committee who would review all available information and make a final
determination. Where the Disciplinary Committee is satisfied that the offence causing the penalty
was outside the control of the player / pair due to force majeure or for any other reason beyond the
control of the player, the penalty may be waived.

32. IMPLEMENTATION, MODIFICATION AND PENALTIES

32.1 The BWF has full authority to implement, interpret or modify these Regulations and to impose
penalties on any Member for infringement of any of the Regulations. The Member Association(s)
of the offending player(s) may also be instructed to take specified disciplinary action.

32.2 The BWF shall, on proposal from its members, have power to grant a dispensation from any of the
General Competition Regulations, in cases where extraordinary or unforeseen circumstances apply,
provided such a decision is carried by a majority of two-thirds of the votes cast.

Part III – Section 1A

GCR
Updated: 3rd June 2011

80
 GCR - International Representation Chart

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 1

INTERNATIONAL REPRESENTATION CHART

GCR

Eligibility of player P to
represent Member Association M START

*Has P represented any Member

Association other than M in the
three years preceding the date of
the proposed representation?

Yes No

*Does P hold a passport for

country M? Yes
P is not eligible to
represent M on the
proposed date

P is eligible to
No represent M on
the proposed
date

Has P represented M before?

No

Yes

Was M the last Member Association

No that P represented? Yes

*Special transitional provisions apply to a few specific players who were in the process of changing
their representation when the Regulations were changed. BWF can provide further details, upon
request.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 1
Updated: 3rd June 2011

81
 GCR - SISF

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 2

SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTERNATIONAL STANDARD FACILITIES

1. Major BWF tournaments

GCR
1.1 The minimum height from the floor over the full court for the Olympic Games, the World
Championships, the Enopi Cups, the World Senior Championships, the Sudirman Cup, the final
stage of the Thomas and Uber Cups, and the Suhandinata Cup shall be 12 metres (39 feet).

1.2 The required height shall be entirely free of girders and other obstructions over the area of the court.

2. Other BWF and international events

2.1 The desirable height for all other international play is 12 metres (39 feet), but the minimum height is
9 metres (30 feet).

2.2 The required height shall be entirely free of girders and other obstructions over the area of the court.

3. Flooring

3.1 It is desirable to have a wooden sprung floor together with approved non-slip court mats.

3.2 It is recommended that there shall be at least two metres (6
feet) clear space surrounding all the
outer lines of the court, this space also being a minimum requirement between any two courts
marked out side by side.

4. Background and lighting

4.1 To avoid any difficulty in sighting the shuttle, no part of the background behind the ends of the
court should be coloured white. It is desirable that only darker colours are used.

4.2 The minimum recommended lighting level is 1000 Lux to provide even light over the court area.
[Note, TV will advise on their lighting requirements and the optimal conditions for still
photographers are 1800-2000 Lux].

4.3 Lighting should not be directly over or behind the playing area but be positioned along the sides of
the court.

4.4 All sources of daylight or sunlight behind or along the sides of the court, should be eliminated.

5. Air movement

5.1 Any air movement e.g draughts from air conditioning must be tightly controlled or eliminated.

6. Umpire’s chair

6.1 The construction must be stable and safe for the umpire to ascend and descend.

6.2 It should be equipped with a hinged writing platform so that the umpire can rest the scoresheet.

Part III - Section 1 B

Appendix 2
Updated: 3rd June 2011

82
 GCR - SISF

6.3 The seat should be at the same height as the net ie 1.55 metres (5 feet) and should be comfortable in
terms of size and material used for construction.

6.4 The chair should be centred along the extension of the net approximately one metre from the net.

7. General

7.1 Subject to the specific exception as set out in Regulation 4.6, these specifications shall be enforced
by the BWF in connection with the organisation of the major BWF tournaments.
GCR

7.2 In exceptional circumstances, the sanctioning authority may vary these requirements.

7.3 It is essential that all aspects of health, safety and security for players, officials and spectators are in
accordance with (local) Government Regulations.

Detailed information on the organisation of a Badminton tournament can be found in the BWF’s ‘Tournament
Organisation Manual’ which is available from either the BWF Secretariat or the website:
www.bwfbadminton.org

Part III - Section 1 B

Appendix 2
Updated: 3rd June 2011

83
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 3

ANTI-DOPING REGULATIONS

Effective Date – 1 January 2009

GCR
INTRODUCTION

Preface

At the BWF Council Meeting held on 28 February 2008 in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, the BWF accepted the
(Revised 2009) World Anti-Doping Code (the "Code1"). The new updated Code comes into effect from January
2009. These anti-doping regulations are adopted and implemented in conformance with BWF's responsibilities
under the Code, and are in furtherance of the BWF's continuing efforts to eradicate doping in the sport of
Badminton.

Doping is fundamentally contrary to the spirit of sport. The purposes of the Code and the World Anti-Doping
Program which supports it are to:

• protect the Players’ fundamental right to participate in doping-free sport and thus promote health,
fairness and equality for Players worldwide; and
• ensure harmonised, coordinated and effective anti-doping programs at the international and national
level with regard to detection, deterrence and prevention of doping.

Scope

These anti-doping regulations shall apply to the BWF, each Member Association of the BWF, each Participant
in the activities of the BWF or any of its Member Associations, each member of the BWF’s Member
Associations, any person who or body which is affiliated with the BWF or its Member Associations and any
person who is a member of a body which is a member of or affiliated with the BWF. It also applies to
employees and contractors of the BWF and any other person who has agreed to be bound by it.
It is the responsibility of each Member Association to ensure that all national-level Testing on the Member
Association's Players complies with these anti-doping regulations. In some countries, the Member Association
itself will be conducting the Doping Control described in these anti-doping regulations. In other countries,
many of the Doping Control responsibilities of the Member Association have been delegated or assigned by
statute or agreement to a National Anti-Doping Organisation. In those countries, references in these anti-
doping regulations to the Member Association shall apply, as appropriate, to the Member Association's
National Anti-Doping Organisation.

These anti-doping regulations shall apply to all Doping Controls over which the BWF and its Member
Associations have jurisdiction.
The BWF Medical Commission has the overall responsibility for implementing doping control at all BWF
Competitions.

1. DEFINITION OF DOPING
Doping is defined as the occurrence of one or more of the anti-doping regulation
violations in Regulations 2.1 to 2.8 of these anti-doping regulations.

1
Throughout WADA’s documentation, the convention of placing defined terms in Italics is used. This
convention is continued in the BWF anti-doping regulations.
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

84
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

2. ANTI-DOPING REGULATION VIOLATIONS

Players or other Persons shall be responsible for knowing what constitutes an anti-
doping violation and the substances and methods which have been included on the
Prohibited List.

The following constitute anti-doping regulation violations:

2.1 Presence of a Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers in a

Player’s2 Sample
GCR

2.1.1 It is each Player’s personal duty to ensure that no Prohibited Substance enters the
Player’s body. Players are responsible for any Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites
or Markers found to be present in their bodily Specimens. Accordingly, it is not
necessary that intent, fault, negligence or knowing Use on the Player’s part be
demonstrated in order to establish an anti-doping violation under Regulation 2.1.

2.1.2 Sufficient proof of an anti-doping regulation violation under Regulation 2.1 is

established by either of the following: presence of a Prohibited Substance or its
Metabolites or Markers in the Player’s A Sample where the Player waives analysis of
the B Sample and the B Sample is not analysed; or, where the Player’s B Sample is
analysed and the analysis of the Player’s B Sample confirms the presence of the
Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers in the Player’s A Sample.

2.1.3 Excepting those substances for which a quantitative threshold is specifically identified in
the Prohibited List, the presence of any quantity of a Prohibited Substance or its
Metabolites or Markers in a Player’s Sample shall constitute an anti-doping regulation
violation.

2.1.4 As an exception to the general rule of Regulation 2.1, the Prohibited List or International
Standards may establish special criteria for the evaluation of Prohibited Substances that
can also be produced endogenously.

2.2 Use or Attempted Use by a Player of a Prohibited Substance or a Prohibited

Method

2.2.1 It is each Player’s personal duty to ensure that no Prohibited Substance enters the
Player’s body. Accordingly, it is not necessary that intent, fault, negligence or knowing
Use on the Player’s part be demonstrated in order to establish an anti-doping violation
for Use of a Prohibited Substance or a Prohibited Method.

2.2.2 The success or failure of the Use or Attempted Use of a Prohibited Substance or
Prohibited Method is not material. It is sufficient that the Prohibited Substance or
Prohibited Method was Used or Attempted to be Used for an anti-doping regulation
violation to be committed.

2.3 Refusing, or failing without compelling justification, to submit to Sample collection after
notification as authorised in these anti-doping regulations or otherwise evading Sample
collection.

2.4 Violation of applicable requirements regarding Player availability for Out-of-Competition

Testing set out in the International Standard for Testing, including failure to file whereabouts
information in accordance with Article 11.3 of the International Standard for Testing (a
“Filing Failure”) and failure to be available for Testing at the declared whereabouts in
accordance with Article 11.4 of the International Standard for Testing (a “Missed Test”).
Any combination of three Missed Tests and/or Filing Failures committed within an

2
In the WADA Code the term “Athlete” is used. For compatibility with the rest of BWF’s statutes, this word
has been changed in the BWF anti-doping regulations to “Player”. “Player” is synonymous with “Athlete”
wherever “Athlete” appears in other WADA documentation.
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

85
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

eighteen-month period, as declared by the BWF or any other Anti-Doping Organisation

with jurisdiction over a Player, shall constitute an anti-doping regulation violation.

2.5 Tampering, or Attempting to Tamper, with any part of Doping Control.

2.6 Possession of Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods

2.6.1 Possession by a Player In-Competition of any Prohibited Method or any Prohibited

Substance, or Possession by a Player Out-of-Competition of any Prohibited Method or
any Prohibited Substance which is prohibited Out-of-Competition unless the Player
establishes that the Possession is pursuant to a Therapeutic Use Exemption (“TUE”)

GCR
granted in accordance with Regulation 4.4 (Therapeutic Use) or other acceptable
justification.

2.6.2 Possession by a Player Support Personnel In-Competition of any Prohibited Method or

any Prohibited Substance, or Possession by a Player-Support Personnel Out-of-
Competition of any Prohibited Method or any Prohibited Substance which is prohibited
Out-of-Competition in connection with a Player, Event or training, unless the Player
Support Personnel establishes that the Possession is pursuant to a Therapeutic Use
Exemption granted to a Player in accordance with Regulation 4.4 (Therapeutic Use) or
other acceptable justification.

2.7 Trafficking or Attempted Trafficking in any Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.

2.8 Administration or Attempted administration to any Player In-Competition of any Prohibited

Method or Prohibited Substance, or administration or Attempted administration to any
Player Out-of-Competition of any Prohibited Method or any Prohibited Substance that is
Prohibited Out-of-Competition, or assisting, encouraging, aiding, abetting, covering up or
any other type of complicity involving an anti-doping regulation violation or any Attempted
violation.

3. PROOF OF DOPING

3.1 Burdens and standards of proof

The BWF and its Member Associations shall have the burden of establishing that an anti-doping
regulation violation has occurred. The standard of proof shall be whether the BWF or its Member
Association has established an anti-doping regulation violation to the comfortable satisfaction of
the hearing panel bearing in mind the seriousness of the allegation which is made. This standard
of proof in all cases is greater than a mere balance of probability but less than proof beyond a
reasonable doubt. Where these Regulations place the burden of proof upon the Player or other
Person alleged to have committed an anti-doping regulation violation to rebut a presumption or
establish specified facts or circumstances, the standard of proof shall be by a balance of
probability, except as provided in Regulations 10.4 and 10.6 where the Player must satisfy a
higher burden of proof.

3.2 Methods of establishing facts and presumptions

Facts related to anti-doping regulation violations may be established by any

reliable means, including admissions. The following rules of proof shall be
applicable in doping cases:

3.2.1 WADA-accredited laboratories are presumed to have conducted Sample analysis and
custodial procedures in accordance with the International Standard for Laboratories3.
The Player or other Person may rebut this presumption by establishing that a departure
from the International Standard for Laboratories occurred which could reasonably have
caused the Adverse Analytical Finding.

3
The WADA International Standard for Laboratories is available on WADA’s website at www.wada-ama.org
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

86
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

If the Player or other Person rebuts the preceding presumption by showing that a
departure from the International Standard for Laboratories occurred which could
reasonably have caused the Adverse Analytical Finding, then the BWF or its Member
Association shall have the burden to establish that such departure did not cause the
Adverse Analytical Finding.

3.2.2 Departures from any other International Standard or other anti-doping regulation
violation or policy which did not cause an Adverse Analytical Finding or other anti-
doping regulation violation shall not invalidate such results. If the Player or other
Person establishes that a departure from another International Standard or other anti-
doping regulation violation or policy which could reasonably have caused the Adverse
GCR

Analytical Finding or other anti-doping regulation violation, then the BWF or its
Member Association shall have the burden to establish that such departure did not cause
the Adverse Analytical Finding or the factual basis for the anti-doping regulation
violation.

3.2.3 The facts established by a decision of a court or professional disciplinary tribunal of

competent jurisdiction which is not the subject of a pending appeal shall be irrebuttable
evidence against the Player or other Person to whom the decision pertained of those
facts unless the Player or other Person establishes that the decision violated principles of
natural justice.

3.2.4 The hearing panel in a hearing on an anti-doping regulation violation may draw an
inference adverse to the Player or other Person who is asserted to have committed an
anti-doping regulation violation based on the Player’s or other Person’s refusal, after a
request made in a reasonable time in advance of the hearing, to appear at the hearing
(either in person or telephonically as directed by the tribunal) and to answer questions
either from the hearing panel or from the Anti-Doping Organisation asserting the anti-
doping regulation violation.

4. THE PROHIBITED LIST

4.1 Incorporation of the Prohibited List

These anti-doping regulations incorporate the Prohibited List which is published and revised by
WADA as described in Article 4.1 of the Code. The BWF will make the current Prohibited List
available to each Member Association, and each Member Association shall ensure that the current
Prohibited List is available to its members and constituents.4 Unless provided otherwise in the
Prohibited List and/or a revision, the Prohibited List and revisions shall go into effect under these
anti-doping regulations three months after publication of the Prohibited List by WADA without
requiring any further action by the BWF.

4.2 Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods identified on the Prohibited List

The Prohibited List shall identify those Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods which are
prohibited as doping at all times (both In-Competition and Out-of-Competition) because of their
potential to enhance performance in future Competitions or their masking potential and those
substances and methods which are prohibited In-Competition only. As described in Article 4.2 of
the Code, the BWF may request that WADA expand the Prohibited List for the sport of
Badminton. The BWF may also request that WADA include additional substances or methods,
which have the potential for abuse in the sport of Badminton, in the monitoring program
described in Article 4.5 of the Code. As provided in the Code, WADA shall make the final
decision on such requests by the BWF.

4.2.1 Specified Substances5

For purposes of the application of Regulation 10 (Sanctions on Individuals), all

Prohibited Substances shall be “Specified Substances” except substances in the classes

4
The Prohibited List in force is available on WADA's website at www.wada-ama.org
5
The list of Specified Substances is available on WADA's website at www.wada-ama.org
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

87
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

of anabolic agents and hormones and those stimulants and hormone antagonists and
modulators so identified on the Prohibited List. Prohibited Methods shall not be
Specified Substances.

4.2.2 New Classes of Prohibited Substances

In the event WADA expands the Prohibited List by adding a new class of Prohibited
Substances in accordance with Article 4.1 of the Code. WADA’s Executive Committee
shall determine whether any or all Prohibited Substances within the new class of
Prohibited Substances shall be considered Specified Substances under Article 4.2.2.

GCR
4.3 Criteria for including substances and methods on the Prohibited List

As provided in Article 4.3.3 of the Code, WADA’s determination of the Prohibited Substances
and Prohibited Methods that will be included on the Prohibited List shall be final and shall not be
subject to challenge by a Player or other Person.

4.4 Therapeutic Use6

4.4.1 Players with a documented medical condition requiring the use of a Prohibited
Substance or a Prohibited Method must first obtain a TUE. The presence of a Prohibited
Substance or its Metabolites or Markers (Regulation 2.1), Use or Attempted Use of a
Prohibited Substance or a Prohibited Method (Regulation 2.2), Possession of Prohibited
Substances or Prohibited Methods (Regulation 2.6) or administration of a Prohibited
Substance or Prohibited Method (Regulation 2.8) consistent with the provisions of an
applicable TUE issued pursuant to the International Standard for TUEs shall not be
considered an anti-doping regulation violation.

4.4.2 Subject to Regulation 4.4.3, Players included by the BWF in its Registered Testing Pool
and other Players participating in any International Event must obtain a TUE from the
BWF (regardless of whether the Player previously has received a TUE at the national
level). The application for a TUE must be made as soon as possible (in the case of a
Player in the Registered Testing Pool, this would be when he/she is first notified of
his/her inclusion in the pool) and in any event (save in emergency situations) no later
than 21 days before the Player’s participation in the Event.

4.4.3 The only exception to Regulation 4.4.2 is that, in accordance with Regulation 7.13 of the
International Standard for TUEs, Players not in the BWF’s Registered Testing Pool who
inhale Glucocorticosteroids and/or formoterol, salbutamol, salmeterol or terbutaline to
treat asthma or one of its clinical variants do not need a TUE in advance of participating
in an International Event unless so specified by the BWF. Instead, if necessary, any
such Player may apply for a Retroactive TUE after the Event in accordance with Article
7.13 of the International Standard for TUEs and Regulation 7.1.3 of these anti-doping
regulations.

4.4.4 TUE’s granted by the BWF shall be reported to the Player’s National Federation and to
WADA. Other Players subject to Testing who need to use a Prohibited Substance or a
Prohibited Method for therapeutic reasons must obtain a TUE from their National Anti-
Doping Organisation or other body designated by their National Federation, as required
under the rules of the National Anti-Doping Organisation/other body. National
Federations shall promptly report any such TUE’s to the BWF and WADA.

4.4.5 The BWF shall appoint a panel of physicians to consider requests for TUE’s (the "TUE
Panel"). Upon the BWF's receipt of a TUE request, the Chair of the TUE Panel shall
appoint one or more members of the TUE Panel (which may include the Chair) to
consider such request. The TUE Panel member(s) so designated shall promptly evaluate
such request in accordance with the International Standard for TUEs and render a
decision on such request, which shall be the final decision of the BWF.

6
The WADA International Standard for TUEs is available on WADA’s website at www.wada-ama.org
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

88
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

4.4.6 WADA, at the request of a Player or on its own initiation, may review the granting or
denial of any TUE by the BWF. If WADA determines that the granting or denial of a
TUE did not comply with the International Standard for TUEs in force at the time then
WADA may reverse that decision. Decisions on TUE’s are subject to further appeal as
provided in Regulation 13.

5. TESTING 7

5.1 Authority to Test

GCR

All Players under the jurisdiction of a Member Association shall be subject to In-Competition
Testing by the BWF, the Player's Member Association, and any other Anti-Doping Organisation
responsible for Testing at a Competition or Event in which they participate. All Players under the
jurisdiction of a Member Association, including Players serving a period of Ineligibility or a
Provisional Suspension shall also be subject to Out-of-Competition Testing at any time or place,
with or without advance notice, by the BWF, WADA, the Player's Member Association, the
National Anti-Doping Organisation of any country where the Player is present, the IOC during
the Olympic Games, and the IPC during Paralympic Games. Target Testing will be made a
priority.

5.2 Responsibility for BWF Testing

The BWF itself shall be responsible for drawing up a test distribution plan for the sport of
Badminton in accordance with Article 4 of the International Standard for Testing and for the
implementation of that plan, including overseeing all Testing conducted by the BWF. Testing
may be conducted by qualified persons so authorised by the BWF.

5.3 Testing standards

Testing conducted by the BWF and its Member Associations shall be in substantial conformity
with the International Standard for Testing in force at the time of Testing.

Blood (or other non-urine) Samples may be used either to detect Prohibited Substances or
Prohibited Methods, for screening procedure purposes, or for longitudinal haematological
profiling (“the passport”).. If the Sample is collected for screening only, it will have no
consequences for the Player other than to identify the Player for a urine test under these anti-
doping regulations. In these circumstances, the BWF may decide at its own discretion which
blood parameters are to be measured in the screening Sample and what levels of those parameters
will be used to indicate that a Player should be selected for a urine test. If however, the Sample is
collected for longitudinal haematological profiling (“the passport”), it may be used for anti-
doping purposes in accordance with Article 2.2 of the Code.

5.4 Coordination of Testing

The BWF and Member Associations shall promptly report completed tests through the WADA
clearing house to avoid unnecessary duplication in Testing.

5.5 Player whereabouts requirements

5.5.1 The BWF shall identify a Registered Testing Pool of those Players who are required to
comply with the whereabouts requirements of the International Standard for Testing,
and shall publish the criteria for Players to be included in this Registered Testing Pool as
well as a list of the Players meeting those criteria for the period in question.. The BWF
shall review and update as necessary its criteria for including Players in its Registered
Testing Pool, and shall revise the membership of its Registered Testing Pool from time
to time as appropriate in accordance with the set criteria. Each Player in the Registered
Testing Pool (a) shall advise the BWF of his/her whereabouts on a quarterly basis, in the
manner set out in Article 11.3 of the International Standard for Testing; (b) shall update
that information as necessary, in accordance with Article 11.4.2 of the International

7
The WADA International Standard for Testing is available on WADA’s website at www.wada-ama.org
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

89
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

Standard for Testing, so that it remains accurate and complete at all times; and (c) shall
make him/herself available for Testing at such whereabouts, in accordance with Article
11.4 of the International Standard for Testing.

5.5.2 A Player’s failure to advise the BWF of his/her whereabouts shall be deemed a Filing
Failure for the purposes of Regulation 2.4 where the conditions of Article 11.3.5 of the
International Standard for Testing are met.

5.5.3 A Player’s failure to be available for Testing at his/her declared whereabouts shall be
deemed a Missed Test for purposes of Regulation 2.4 where the conditions of Article
11.4.3 of the International Standard for Testing are met.

GCR
5.5.4 Each Member Association shall also assist its National Anti-Doping Organisation in
establishing a national level Registered Testing Pool of top-level national Players to
whom the whereabouts requirements of the International Standard for Testing shall also
apply. Where those Players are also in the BWF’s Registered Testing Pool, the BWF
and the National Anti-Doping Organisation will agree (with the assistance of WADA if
required) on which of them will take responsibility for receiving whereabouts filing from
the Player and sharing it with the other (and with other Anti-Doping Organisations) in
accordance with Regulation 5.5.5.

5.5.5 Whereabouts information provided pursuant to Regulations 5.5.1 and 5.5.4 shall be
shared with WADA and other Anti-Doping Organisations having jurisdiction to test a
Player in accordance with Articles 11.7.1(d) and 11.7.3(d) of the International Standard
for Testing, including the strict condition that it be used only for Doping Control
purposes.

5.6 Retirement and return to competition

5.6.1 A Player who has been identified by the BWF for inclusion in the BWF’s Registered
Testing Pool shall continue to be subject to these anti-doping regulations, including the
obligation to comply with the whereabouts requirements of the International Standard
for Testing, unless and until the Player (or the Member Association on behalf of the
Player) gives written notice to the BWF that the Player has retired or until the Player no
longer satisfies the criteria for inclusion in the BWF's Registered Testing Pool and has
been so informed by the BWF.

5.6.2 A Player who has given notice of retirement to the BWF may not resume competing
unless the Player notifies the BWF at least six (6) months before the Player expects to
return to competition and is available for unannounced Out-of-Competition Testing
including (if requested) complying with the whereabouts requirements of the
International Standard for Testing, at any time during the six (6) month period before
actual return to competition. The BWF may give notice of a different period than six
months at the time of receipt of notification of retirement.

5.6.3 Member Associations/National Anti-Doping Organisations may establish similar

requirements for retirement and returning to competition for Players in the national
Registered Testing Pool.

5.7 Selection of Players to be tested

5.7.1 At International Events, the BWF shall determine the number of finishing placement
tests, random tests and target tests to be performed.

5.7.2 The BWF shall target a certain number of Players not necessarily linked to final
placements in order to maximise the diversity of Players tested or based on information
provided by the WADA Clearinghouse on previous tests.

5.7.3 At National Events, each Member Association shall determine the number of Players
selected for Testing in each Competition and the procedures for selecting the Players for
Testing.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

90
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

5.7.4 In addition to the selection procedures in Regulations 5.7.1 and 5.7.2, the BWF at
International Events, and the Member Association at National Events, may also select
Players or teams for Target Testing so long as such Target Testing is not used for any
purpose other than legitimate Doping Control purposes.

5.7.5 Players selected for Testing shall be notified only after completing their last match of the
day. Should a Player be notified before completing the Player’s last match of the day,
the Player may appeal to the Referee. The Referee has discretion to cancel the Test.

5.7.6 Players shall be selected for Out-of-Competition Testing by the BWF and by Member
Associations through a process that substantially complies with the International
GCR

Standard for Testing in force at the time of selection.

5.8 Member Associations and the organising committees for Member Association Events shall
provide access to Independent Observers at Events as directed by the BWF.

6. ANALYSIS OF SAMPLES

Doping Control Samples collected under these anti-doping regulations shall be analysed in accordance
with the following principles:

6.1 Use of approved laboratories

The BWF shall send Doping Control Samples for analysis only to WADA-accredited laboratories
or as otherwise approved by WADA. The choice of the WADA-accredited laboratory (or other
method approved by WADA) used for the Sample analysis shall be determined exclusively by the
BWF.

6.2 Purpose of Collection and Analysis of Samples

Samples shall be analysed to detect Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods identified on
the Prohibited List and other substances as may be directed by WADA pursuant to Article 4.5 of
the Code (Monitoring Program), or to assist an Anti-Doping Organisation in profiling relevant
parameters in a Player’s urine, blood or other matrix, including DNA or genomic profiling, for
anti-doping purposes.

6.3 Research on Samples

No Sample may be used for any purpose other than as described in Article 6.2 of the Code
without the Player's written consent. Samples used for purposes other than Article 6.2 of the
Code shall have any means of identification removed such that they cannot be traced back to a
particular Player.

6.4 Standards for Sample analysis and reporting

Laboratories shall analyse Doping Control Samples and report results in conformity with the
International Standard for Laboratories.

6.5 Retesting Samples

A Sample may be reanalyzed for the purposes described in Regulation 6.2 at any time exclusively
at the direction of the BWF or WADA. The circumstances and conditions for retesting Samples
shall conform with the requirements of the International Standard for Laboratories.

7. RESULTS MANAGEMENT

7.1 Results Management for Tests initiated by BWF

Results management for Tests initiated by the BWF (including Tests performed by WADA
pursuant to agreement with the BWF) shall proceed as set out in this Regulation 7.
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

91
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

7.1.1 The results from all analyses must be sent to the BWF in encoded form, in a report
signed by an authorised representative of the laboratory. All communication must be
conducted in confidentiality and in conformity with ADAMS, a database management
tool developed by WADA.

7.1.2 Upon receipt of an A Sample Adverse Analytical Finding, the Secretary General, or if he
is from the same country as the player or not available, a member of the Council or
Executive Board shall conduct a review to determine whether:

• an applicable TUE has been granted; or

• there is any apparent departure from the International Standards for Testing or

GCR
International Standards for Laboratories that cause the Adverse Analytical Finding.

7.1.3 In the following circumstances:

(a) the Adverse Analytical Finding is for a Glucocorticosteroid, formoterol,

salbutamol, salmeterol or terbutaline; and

(b) the Sample in question was provided by a Player who is not in the BWF’s
Registered Testing Pool, during his/her participation in an International Event
for which (in accordance with Article 7.13 of the International Standard for
TUEs and these anti-doping regulations) the BWF does not require a TUE for
asthma medication in advance,

then, before the matter is referred to the BWF under Regulation 7.1, the Player shall be
given an opportunity to apply to the TUE Committee for a Retroactive TUE in
accordance with Article 7.13 of the International Standard for TUEs. The result of that
application shall be forwarded to the BWF for consideration in its review of the Adverse
Analytical Finding under Regulation 7.1.2.

7.1.4 If the initial review under Regulation 7.1.2 does not reveal an applicable TUE or
departure from the International Standard for Testing or the International Standard for
Laboratories that caused the Adverse Analytical Finding, the BWF shall promptly notify
the Player of:

• the Adverse Analytical Finding;

• the anti-doping regulation violated;

• the Player's right to promptly request the analysis of the B Sample or, failing such
request, that the B Sample analysis may be deemed waived;

• the scheduled date, time and place for the B Sample analysis (which shall be within
the time period specified in the International Standard for Laboratories) if the
Player or the BWF chooses to request an analysis of the B Sample;

• the right of the Player and/or the Player's representative to attend the B Sample
opening and analysis at the scheduled date, time and place if such analysis is
requested;

and

• the Player's right to request copies of the A and B Sample laboratory documentation
package which includes information as required by the International Standard for
Laboratories.

The BWF shall also notify the Player’s National Anti-Doping Organisation and WADA.
If the BWF decides not to bring forward the Adverse Analytical Finding as an anti-
doping regulation violation, it shall so notify the Player, the Player’s National Anti-
Doping Organisation and WADA.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

92
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

7.1.5 Arrangements shall be made for Testing the B Sample within the time period specified in
the International Standard for Testing. A Player may accept the A Sample analytical
results by waiving the requirement for B Sample analysis. The BWF may nonetheless
elect to proceed with the B Sample analysis.

7.1.6 The Player and/or the Player’s representative shall be allowed to be present at the
analysis of the B Sample. A representative of the Player's Member Association, as well
as a representative of the BWF, shall also be allowed to be present.

7.1.7 If the B Sample proves negative, then (unless the BWF takes the case forward as an anti-
doping regulation violation under Regulation 2.2) the entire test shall be considered
GCR

negative and the Player, the Player’s Member Association, and the BWF shall be so
informed.

7.1.8 If a Prohibited Substance or the Use of a Prohibited Method is identified, the findings
shall be reported to the Player, the Player’s Member Association, the BWF, and to
WADA.

7.1.9 For apparent anti-doping regulation violations that do not involve Adverse Analytical
Findings, the BWF shall conduct any necessary follow-up investigation and, at such time
as it is satisfied that an anti-doping regulation violation has occurred, it shall then
promptly notify the Player of the anti-doping regulation which appears to have been
violated, and the basis of the violation.

7.2 Results Management for Atypical Findings

7.2.1 As provided in the International Standards, in certain circumstances laboratories are

directed to report the presence of Prohibited Substances that may also be produced
endogenously as Atypical Findings that should be investigated further.

7.2.2 If a laboratory reports an Atypical Finding in respect of a Sample collected from a

Player by or on behalf of the BWF, the BWF shall conduct a review to determine
whether: (a) the Atypical Finding is consistent with an applicable TUE that has been
granted as provided in the International Standard for TUEs, or (b) there is any apparent
departure from the International Standard for Testing or International Standard for
Laboratories that caused the Atypical Analytical Finding.

7.2.3 If the initial review of an Atypical Finding under Regulation 7.2.2 reveals an applicable
TUE or departure from the International Standard for Testing or the International
Standard for Laboratories that caused the Atypical Finding, the entire test shall be
considered negative.

7.2.4 If the initial review of an Atypical Finding under Regulation 7.2.2 does not reveal an
applicable TUE or departure from the International Standard for Testing or the
International Standard for Laboratories that caused the Atypical Finding, the BWF shall
conduct the follow-up investigation required by the International Standards. If, once
that investigation is completed, it is concluded that the Atypical Finding should be
considered an Adverse Analytical Finding, the BWF shall pursue the matter in
accordance with Regulation 7.1.

7.2.5 The BWF will not provide notice of an Atypical Finding until it has completed its
investigation and has decided whether it will bring the Atypical Finding forward as an
Adverse Analytical Finding unless one of the following circumstances exists:

(a) If the BWF determines the B Sample should be analysed prior to the conclusion
of its follow-up investigation, it may conduct the B Sample analysis after
notifying the Player, with such notice to include a description of the Atypical
Finding and the information described in Regulation 7.1.4; or

(b) If the BWF receives a request, either from a Major Event Organisation shortly
before one of its International Events or from a sports organisation responsible

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

93
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

for meeting an imminent deadline for selecting team members for an

International Event, to disclose whether any Player identified on a list provided
but the Major Event Organisation or sports organisation has a pending Atypical
Finding, the BWF shall so identify any such Player after first providing notice
of the Atypical Finding to the Player.

7.3 Results management for Tests initiated during other International Events

Results management and the conduct of hearings from a test by the International Olympic
Committee, the International Paralympic Committee, or a Major Event Organisation, shall be

GCR
managed, as far as sanctions beyond Disqualification from the Event or the results of the Event,
by the BWF.

7.4 Results management for Tests initiated by Member Associations

Results management conducted by Member Associations shall be consistent with the general
principles for effective and fair results management which underlie the detailed provisions in
Regulation 7. Results of all Doping Controls shall be reported to the BWF and to WADA within
14 days of the conclusion of the Member Association's results management process. Any
apparent anti-doping regulation violation by a Player who is a member of that Member
Association shall be promptly referred to an appropriate hearing panel established pursuant to the
rules of the Member Association or national law. Apparent anti-doping regulation violations by
Players who are members of another Member Association shall be referred to the BWF for
hearing.

7.5 Results Management for Whereabouts Violations

7.5.1 Results management in respect of an apparent Filing Failure by a Player in the BWF’s
Registered Testing Pool shall be conducted by the BWF in accordance with Article
11.6.2 of the International Standard for Testing (unless it has been agreed in accordance
with Regulation 5.5.4 that the Member Association or National Anti-Doping
Organisation shall take such responsibility).

7.5.2 Results management in respect of an apparent Missed Test by a Player in the BWF’s
Registered Testing Pool as a result of an attempt to test the Player by or on behalf of the
BWF shall be conducted by the BWF in accordance with Article 11.6.3 of the
International Standard for Testing. Results management in respect of an apparent
Missed Test by such Player as a result of an attempt to test the Player by or on behalf of
another Anti-Doping Organisation shall be conducted by that other Anti-Doping
Organisation in accordance with Article 11.7.6(c) of the International Standard for
Testing.

7.5.3 Where, in any eighteen-month period, a Player in the BWF’s Registered Testing Pool is
declared to have three Filing Failures, or three Missed Tests, or any combination of
Filing Failures or Missed Tests adding up to three in total, whether under these anti-
doping regulations or under the rules of any other Anti-Doping Organisation, the BWF
shall bring them forward as an apparent anti-doping regulation violation.

7.6 Provisional Suspensions

7.6.1 If analysis of an A Sample has resulted in an Adverse Analytical Finding for a

Prohibited Substance that is not a Specified Substance, and a review in accordance with
Regulation 7.1.2 does not reveal an applicable TUE or departure from the International
Standard for Testing or the International Standard for Laboratories that caused the
Adverse Analytical Finding, the BWF must Provisionally Suspend the Player pending
the hearing panel’s determination of whether the Player has committed an anti-doping
regulation violation.

7.6.2 In any case not covered by Regulation 7.6.1 where the BWF decides to take the matter
forward as an apparent anti-doping regulation violation in accordance with the foregoing
provisions of this Regulation 7, the BWF may Provisionally Suspend the Player pending
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

94
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

the hearing panel’s determination of whether the Player has committed an anti-doping
regulation violation.

7.6.3 Where a Provisional Suspension is imposed, whether pursuant to Regulation 7.6.1 or

Regulation 7.6.2, the Player shall be given either: (a) an opportunity for a Provisional
Hearing before imposition of the Provisional Suspension or on a timely basis after
imposition of the Provisional Suspension; or (b) an opportunity for an expedited hearing
in accordance with Regulation 8 (Right to a Fair Hearing) on a timely basis after
imposition of a Provisional Suspension. Member Associations shall impose Provisional
Suspensions in accordance with the principles set forth in this Regulation 7.6.
GCR

7.6.4 If a Provisional Suspension is imposed based on an Adverse Analytical Finding in

respect of an A Sample, and any subsequent analysis of the B Sample analysis does not
confirm the A Sample analysis, then the Player shall not be subject to any further
Provisional Suspension on account of a violation of Article 2.1 of the Code (Presence of
a Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers). In circumstances where the
Player (or the Player’s team as may be provided in the rules of the BWF) has been
removed from a Competition based on a violation of Regulation 2.1 and the subsequent
B Sample analysis does not confirm the A Sample finding, if, without otherwise
affecting the Competition, it is still possible for the Player or team to be reinserted, the
Player or team may continue to take part in the Competition.

7.7 Retirement from Sport

If a Player or other Person retires while a results management process is underway, the BWF
retains jurisdiction to complete its results management process. If a Player or other Person
retires before any results management process has begun, the BWF (if it had jurisdiction over the
Player or other Person at the time the Player or other Person committed an anti-doping
violation) has jurisdiction to conduct results management.

8. RIGHT TO A FAIR HEARING

8.1 Hearings arising out of BWF Testing or Tests at International Events

8.1.1 The BWF shall appoint a standing panel consisting of a Chair and four other people with
experience in anti-doping ("BWF Doping Hearing Panel"). At least one of the BWF
Doping Hearing Panel shall be a person practicing law in the jurisdiction of a Member
Association. Each Doping Hearing Panel Member shall be independent of the BWF staff,
BWF Council and Continental Confederation staff or Council..

8.1.2 When it appears, following the Results Management process described in Regulation 7,
that these anti-doping regulations have been violated in connection with the BWF
Testing or Testing at an International Event then the case shall be assigned to the BWF
Doping Hearing Panel for adjudication.

8.1.3 The Chair of the BWF Doping Hearing Panel shall appoint three members from the
panel (which may include the Chair) to hear each case, and appoint a Chair of the panel
for that case. The Chair will as far as practicable appoint a lawyer to the Doping Hearing
Panel, if that is not practicable, BWF shall ensure that the panel has independent legal
advice available to it. The appointed members shall have had no prior involvement with
the case and shall not have the same nationality as the Player or other Person alleged to
have violated these anti-doping regulations. Where there are insufficient Panel members
due to prior involvement, a nationality constraint, or unavailability, the BWF President
may appoint such additional Panel members as may be required.

8.1.4 Hearings pursuant to this Regulation shall be completed expeditiously following the
completion of the results management process described in Regulation 7. Hearings held
in connection with Events may be conducted on an expedited basis.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

95
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

8.1.5 The Member Association of the Player or other Person alleged to have violated these
anti-doping regulations may attend the hearing as an observer.

8.1.6 The BWF shall keep WADA fully apprised as to the status of pending cases and the
results of all hearings.

8.1.7 A Player or other Person may forego a hearing by acknowledging the anti-doping
regulation violation and accepting Consequences consistent with Regulations 9 and 10 as
proposed by the BWF. The right to a hearing may be waived either expressly by the
Player’s or Person’s failure to challenge the BWF’s assertion that an anti-doping
regulation violation within 14 days. Where no hearing occurs, the BWF shall submit to

GCR
the persons described in Regulation 13.2.3 a reasoned decision explaining the action
taken.

8.1.8 Decisions of the BWF Doping Hearing Panel may be appealed to Court of Arbitration
for Sport (“CAS”) as provided in Regulation 13.

8.2 Hearings arising out of national Testing

8.2.1 When it appears, following the Results Management process described in Regulation 7,
that these anti-doping regulations have been violated in connection with Testing other
than in connection with the BWF Testing or Testing at an International Event, the Player
or other Person involved shall be brought before a disciplinary panel of the Player’s or
other Person's Member Association for a hearing to adjudicate whether a violation of
these anti-doping regulations occurred, and if so, what Consequences should be imposed.

8.2.2 Hearings pursuant to this Regulation 8.2 shall be completed expeditiously and in all
cases within three months of the completion of the Results Management process
described in Regulation 7. Hearings held in connection with Events may be conducted
by an expedited process. If the completion of the hearing is delayed beyond three
months, the BWF may elect to bring the case directly before the BWF Doping Hearing
Panel at the responsibility and at the expense of the Member Association.

8.2.3 Member Associations shall keep the BWF and WADA fully apprised as to the status of
pending cases and the results of all hearings.

8.2.4 The BWF and WADA shall have the right to attend hearings as an observer.

8.2.5 The Player or other Person may forego a hearing by acknowledging the violation of
these anti-doping regulations and accepting Consequences consistent with Regulations 9
and 10 as proposed by the National Federation. The right to a hearing may be waived
either expressly or by the Player’s or other Person’s failure to challenge the National
Federation’s assertion that an anti-doping regulation violation has occurred within
fourteen (14) days. Where no hearing occurs, the National Federation shall submit to the
persons described in Regulation 13.2.3 a reasoned decision explaining the action taken.

8.2.6 Decisions by Member Associations, whether as the result of a hearing or the Player’s or
other Person's acceptance of Consequences, may be appealed as provided in Regulation
13.

8.2.7 Hearing decisions by the Member Association shall not be subject to further
administrative review at the national level except as provided in Regulation 13 or
required by applicable national law.

8.3 Principles for a fair hearing

All hearings pursuant to either Regulation 8.1 or 8.2 shall respect the following principles:

• a timely hearing;

• fair and impartial hearing body;

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

96
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

• the right to be represented at the Person's own expense;

• the right to be informed in a fair and timely manner of the asserted anti-doping regulation
violation;

• the right to respond to the asserted anti-doping regulation violation and resulting
Consequences;

• the right of each party to present evidence, including the right to call and question witnesses
(subject to the hearing body's discretion to accept testimony by telephone or written
submission);
GCR

• the Person's right to an interpreter at the hearing, with the Doping Panel to determine the
identity, and responsibility for the cost of the interpreter;

and

• a timely, written, reasoned decision, specifically including an explanation of the reason(s) for
any period of Ineligibility.

9. AUTOMATIC DISQUALIFICATION OF INDIVIDUAL RESULTS

A violation of these anti-doping regulations in Individual Sports in connection with an In-

Competition test automatically leads to Disqualification of the result obtained in that Competition
with all resulting Consequences, including forfeiture of any medals, points and prizes.

10. SANCTIONS ON INDIVIDUALS

10.1 Disqualification of results in Event during which an anti-doping regulation violation occurs

An anti-doping regulation violation occurring during or in connection with an Event may lead to
Disqualification of all of the Player's individual results obtained in that Event with all
Consequences, including forfeiture of all medals, points and prizes, except as provided in
Regulation 10.1.1.

10.1.1 If the Player establishes that the Player bears No Fault or Negligence for the violation,
the Player's individual results in the other Competitions shall not be Disqualified unless
the Player's results in Competitions other than the Competition in which the anti-doping
regulation violation occurred were likely to have been affected by the Player's anti-
doping regulation violation.

10.2 Ineligibility for presence, Use or Attempted Use, or Possession of Prohibited Substances and
Prohibited Methods

The period of Ineligibility imposed for a violation of Regulation 2.1 (presence of Prohibited
Substance or its Metabolites or Markers), Regulation 2.2 (Use or Attempted Use of Prohibited
Substance or Prohibited Method) and Regulation 2.6 (Possession of Prohibited Substances and
Prohibited Methods) shall be as follows, unless the conditions for eliminating or reducing the
period of Intelligibility, as provided in Regulations 10.4 and 10.5, or the conditions for increasing
the period of Ineligibility, as provided in Regulation 10.6 are met:

First violation: Two (2) years' Ineligibility.

10.3 Ineligibility for other anti-doping regulation violations

The period of Ineligibility for violations of these anti-doping regulations, other than those set out
in Regulation 10.2, shall be:

10.3.1 For violations of Regulation 2.3 (Refusing or failing to submit to Sample collection or
otherwise evading Sample collection) or Regulation 2.5 (Tampering with Doping

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

97
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

Control), the Ineligibility period shall be two (2) years unless the conditions provided in
Regulation 10.5, or the conditions provided in Regulation 10.6, are met.

10.3.2 For violations of Regulation 2.7 (Trafficking or Attempted Trafficking) or Regulation 2.8
(Administration of or Attempted administration of a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited
Method), the period of Ineligibility imposed shall be a minimum of four (4) years up to
lifetime Ineligibility unless the conditions provided in Regulation 10.5 are met. An anti-
doping regulation violation involving a Minor shall be considered a particularly serious
violation, and, if committed by Player Support Personnel for violations other than
Specified Substances referenced in Regulation 4.2.1, shall result in lifetime Ineligibility
for such Player Support Personnel. In addition, significant violations of Regulations 2.7

GCR
or 2.8 which may also violate non-sporting laws and regulations shall be reported to the
competent administrative, professional or judicial authorities.

10.3.3 For violations of Regulation 2.4 (Whereabouts violations or missed Tests), the period of
Ineligibility shall be at a minimum one (1) year and at a maximum two (2) years based
on the Player’s degree of fault.

10.4 Elimination or reduction of the period of Ineligibility for Specified Substances under specific
circumstances

Where a Player or other Person can establish how a Specified Substance entered his or her body
or came into his or her Possession and that such Specified Substance was not intended to enhance
the sport performance or mask the Use of a performance-enhancing substance, the period of
Ineligibility found in Regulation 10.2 shall be replaced with the following:

First violation: At a minimum, a reprimand and no period of Ineligibility from future

Events, and at a maximum, two (2) year's Ineligibility.

To justify any elimination or reduction, the Player or other Person must produce corroborating
evidence in addition to his or her word which establishes to the comfortable satisfaction of the
hearing panel the absence of an intent to enhance sport performance or mask the Use of a
performance-enhancing substance. The Player or other Person’s degree of fault shall be the
criterion considered in assessing any reduction of the period of Ineligibility.

10.5 Elimination or reduction of period of Ineligibility based on exceptional circumstances

10.5.1 No Fault or Negligence

If the Player establishes in an individual case involving an anti-doping regulation

violation that the Player bears No Fault or Negligence the otherwise applicable period of
Ineligibility shall be eliminated. When a Prohibited Substance or its Markers or
Metabolites is detected in a Player's Specimen in violation of Regulation 2.1 (Presence
of Prohibited Substance), the Player must also establish how the Prohibited Substance
entered the Player’s system in order to have the period of Ineligibility eliminated. In the
event this Regulation is applied and the period of Ineligibility otherwise applicable is
eliminated, the anti-doping regulation violation shall not be considered a violation for the
limited purpose of determining the period of Ineligibility for multiple violations under
Regulation 10.7.

10.5.2 No Significant Fault or Negligence

If a Player or other Person establishes in an individual case that the Player bears No
Significant Fault or Negligence, then the otherwise applicable period of Ineligibility may
be reduced, but the reduced period of Ineligibility may not be less than one-half of the
period of Ineligibility otherwise applicable. If the otherwise applicable period of
Ineligibility is a lifetime, the reduced period under this Regulation may be no less than
eight (8) years. When a Prohibited Substance or its Markers or Metabolites is detected
in a Player's Specimen in violation of Regulation 2.1 (Presence of Prohibited Substance),
the Player must also establish how the Prohibited Substance entered the Player’s system
in order to have the period of Ineligibility reduced.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

98
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

10.5.3 Substantial Assistance

The BWF Doping Hearing Panel may, prior to a final appellate decision under
Regulation 13 or the expiration of the time to appeal, suspend a part of the period of
Ineligibility imposed in an individual case where the Player or other Person has provided
Substantial Assistance to the BWF, criminal authority or professional disciplinary body
which results in the BWF (or other relevant body) discovering or establishing an anti-
doping rule violation by another Person or which results in a criminal or disciplinary
body discovering or establishing a criminal offence or the breach of professional rules by
another Person. After a final appellate decision under Regulation 13 or the expiration of
time to appeal, the BWF may only suspend a part of the otherwise applicable period of
GCR

Ineligibility with the approval of WADA. The extent to which the otherwise applicable
period of Ineligibility may be suspended shall be based on the seriousness of the anti-
doping regulation violation committed by the Player or other Person and the significance
of the Substantial Assistance provided by the Player or other Person to the effort to
eliminate doping in sport. No more than three-quarters of the otherwise applicable
period of Ineligibility may be suspended. If the otherwise applicable period of
Ineligibility is a lifetime, the non-suspended period under this Regulation must be no less
than eight (8) years. If the BWF suspends any part of the otherwise applicable period of
Ineligibility under this Regulation, the BWF shall promptly provide a written
justification for its decision to each Anti-Doping Organisation having a right to appeal
the decision. If the BWF subsequently reinstates any part of the suspended period of
Ineligibility because the Player or other Person has failed to provide the Substantial
Assistance which was anticipated, the Player or other Person may appeal the
reinstatement pursuant to Regulation 13.2.

10.5.4 Admission of an anti-doping regulation violation in the absence of other evidence

Where a Player or other Person voluntarily admits the commission of an anti-doping

regulation violation before having received notice of a Sample collection which could
establish an anti-doping regulation violation (or, in the case of an anti-doping regulation
violation other than Regulation 2.1, before receiving first notice of the admitted violation
pursuant to Regulation 7) and that admission is the only reliable evidence of the violation
at the time of admission, then the period of Ineligibility may be reduced, but not below
one-half of the period of Ineligibility otherwise applicable.

10.5.5 Where a Player or other Person establishes entitlement to reduction in sanction under
more than one provision of this Regulation

Before applying any reductions under Regulations 10.5.2, 10.5.3 or 10.5.4, the otherwise
applicable period of Ineligibility shall be determined in accordance with Regulations
10.2, 10.3, 10.4 and 10.6. If the Player or other Person establishes entitlement to a
reduction or suspension of the period of Ineligibility under two or more of Regulations
10.5.2, 10.5.3 or 10.5.4, then the period of Ineligibility may be reduced or suspended, but
not below one-quarter of the otherwise applicable period of Ineligibility.

10.6 Aggravating circumstances which may increase the period of Ineligibility

If BWF establishes in an individual case involving an anti-doping regulation violation other than
violations under Regulation 2.7 (Trafficking or Attempted Trafficking) and 2.8 (Administration or
Attempted administration) that aggravating circumstances are present which justify the
imposition of a period of Ineligibility greater than the standard sanction, then the period of
Ineligibility otherwise applicable shall be increased up to a maximum of four (4) years unless the
Player or other Person can prove to the comfortable satisfaction of the hearing panel that he or
she did not knowingly violate the anti-doping regulation.

A Player or other Person can avoid the application of this Regulation by admitting the anti-
doping regulation violation as asserted promptly after being confronted with the anti-doping
regulation violation by the BWF.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

99
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

10.7 Multiple violations

10.7.1 Second anti-doping regulation violation

For a Player’s or other Person’s first anti-doping regulation violation, the period of
Ineligibility is set forth in Regulations 10.2 and 10.3 (subject to elimination, reduction or
suspension under Regulation 10.4 or 10.5, or to an increase under Regulation 10.6). For
a second anti-doping regulation violation the period of Ineligibility shall be within the
range set forth in the table below.

GCR
Second Violation RS FFMT NSF St AS TRA

First Violation
RS 1-4 2-4 2-4 4-6 8-10 10-life
FFMT 1-4 4-8 4-8 6-8 10-life life
NSF 1-4 4-8 4-8 6-8 10-life life
St 2-4 6-8 6-8 8-life life life
AS 4-5 10-life 10-life life life life
TRA 8-life life Life life life life

Definitions for purposes of the second anti-doping regulation violation table:

RS (Reduced sanction for Specified Substance under Regulation 10.4): The anti-doping
regulation violation was or should be sanctioned by a reduced sanction under Regulation
10.4 because it involved a Specified Substance and the other conditions under
Regulation 10.4 were met.

FFMT (Filing Failures and/or Missed Tests): The anti-doping regulation violation was
or should be sanctioned under Regulation 10.3.3 (Filing Failures and/or Missed Tests).

NSF (Reduced sanction for No Significant Fault or Negligence): The anti-doping

regulation violation was or should be sanctioned by a reduced sanction under Regulation
10.5.2 because No Significant Fault or Negligence under Regulation 10.5.2 was proved
by the Player.

St (Standard sanction under Regulations 10.2 or 10.3.1): The anti-doping regulation

violation was or should be sanctioned by the standard sanction of two years under
Regulation 10.2 or 10.3.1.

AS (Aggravated sanction): The anti-doping regulation violation was or should be

sanctioned by an aggravated sanction under Regulation 10.6 because the Anti-Doping
Organisation established the conditions set forth under Regulation 10.6.

TRA (Trafficking or Attempted Trafficking and administration or Attempted

administration): The anti-doping regulation violation was or should be sanctioned by a
sanction under Regulation 10.3.2.

10.7.2 Application of Regulations 10.5.3 and 10.5.4 to second anti-doping regulation violation

Where a Player or other Person who commits a second anti-doping regulation violation
establishes entitlement to suspension or reduction of a portion of the period of
Ineligibility under Regulation 10.5.3 or Regulation 10.5.4, the hearing panel shall first
determine the otherwise applicable period of Ineligibility within the range established in
the table in Regulation 10.7.1, and then apply the appropriate suspension or reduction of
the period of Ineligibility. The remaining period of Ineligibility, after applying any
suspension or reduction under Regulations 10.5.3 and 10.5.4, must be at least one-fourth
of the otherwise applicable period of Ineligibility.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

100
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

10.7.3 Third anti-doping regulation violation

A third anti-doping regulation violation will always result in a lifetime period of

Ineligibility, except if the third violation fulfils the condition for elimination or reduction
of the period of Ineligibility under Regulation 10.4 or involves a violation of Regulation
2.4 (Filing Failures and/or and Missed Tests). In these particular cases, the period of
Ineligibility shall be from eight (8) years to life ban.

10.7.4 Additional regulations for certain potential multiple violations

GCR

For purposes of imposing sanctions under Regulation 10.7, an anti-doping regulation

violation will only be considered a second violation if the BWF (or its Member
Associations) can establish that the Player or other Person committed the second
anti-doping regulation violation after the Player or other Person received notice
pursuant to Regulation 7 (Results Management), or after the BWF (or its Member
Associations) made reasonable efforts to give notice, of the first anti-doping
regulation violation; if the BWF (or its Member Associations) cannot establish this,
the violations shall be considered together as one single first violation, and the
sanction imposed shall be based on the violation that carries the more severe
sanction; however, the occurrence of multiple violations may be considered as a
factor in determining Aggravating Circumstances (Regulation 10.6).

If, after the resolution of a first anti-doping regulation violation, the BWF discovers
facts involving an anti-doping regulation violation by the Player or other Person
which occurred prior to notification regarding the first violation, then the BWF shall
impose an additional sanction based on the sanction that could have been imposed if
the two violations would have been adjudicated at the same time. Results in all
Competitions dating back to the earlier anti-doping regulation violation will be
Disqualified as provided in Regulation 10.8. To avoid the possibility of a finding of
Aggravating Circumstances (Regulation 10.6) on account of the earlier-in-time but
later-discovered violation, the Player or other Person must voluntarily admit the
earlier anti-doping regulation violation on a timely basis after notice of the violation
for which he or she is first charged. The same regulation shall also apply when the
BWF discovers facts involving another prior violation after the resolution of a
second anti-doping regulation violation.

10.7.5 Multiple anti-doping regulation violations during an eight (8) year period

For purposes of Regulation 10.7, each anti-doping regulation violation must take place
within the same eight (8) year period in order to be considered multiple violations.

10.8 Disqualification of results in Competitions subsequent to Sample collection or Commission of

an Anti-Doping Rule Violation

In addition to the automatic Disqualification of the results in the Competition which produced the
positive Sample under Regulation 9 (Automatic Disqualification of Individual Results), all other
competitive results obtained from the date a positive Sample was collected (whether In-
Competition or Out-of-Competition), or other doping violation occurred, through the
commencement of any Provisional Suspension or Ineligibility period, shall, unless fairness
requires otherwise, be Disqualified with all of the resulting Consequences including forfeiture of
any medals, points and prizes.

10.8.1 As a condition of regaining eligibility after being found to have committed an anti-
doping regulation violation, the Player must first repay all prize money forfeited under
this Regulation.

10.8.2 Allocation of forfeited prize money

Forfeited prize money shall be allocated first to reimburse the collection expenses
incurred by the BWF in order to perform the necessary steps to collect the prize money

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

101
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

back, then to reimburse the expenses incurred by the BWF in order to conduct results
management in the case, with the balance, if any, allocated in accordance with the
BWF’s specific rules.

10.9 Commencement of Ineligibility period

Except as provided below, the period of Ineligibility shall start on the date of the hearing decision
providing for Ineligibility or, if the hearing is waived, on the date Ineligibility is accepted or
otherwise imposed. Any period of Provisional Suspension (whether imposed or voluntarily
accepted) shall be credited against the total period of Ineligibility imposed.

GCR
10.9.1 Delays not attributable to the Player or other Person

Where there have been substantial delays in the hearing process or other aspects of
Doping Control not attributable to the Player or other Person, the BWF or Anti-Doping
Organisation imposing the sanction may start the period of Ineligibility at an earlier date
commencing as early as the date of Sample collection or the date on which another anti-
doping regulation violation last occurred.

10.9.2 Timely admission

Where the Player promptly (which, in all events, means before the Player competes
again) admits the anti-doping regulation violation after being confronted with the anti-
doping regulation violation by BWF, the period of Ineligibility may start as early as the
date of Sample collection or the date on which another anti-doping regulation violation
last occurred. In each case, however, where this Regulation is applied, the Player or
other Person shall serve at least one-half of the period of Ineligibility going forward from
the date the Player or other Person accepted the imposition of a sanction, the date of a
hearing decision imposing a sanction, or the date the sanction is otherwise imposed.

10.9.3 If a Provisional Suspension is imposed and respected by the Player, then the Player
shall receive a credit for such period of Provisional Suspension against any period of
Ineligibility which may ultimately be imposed.

10.9.4 If a Player voluntarily accepts a Provisional Suspension in writing from the BWF and
thereafter refrains from competing, the Player shall receive a credit for such period of
voluntary Provisional Suspension against any period of Ineligibility which may
ultimately be imposed. A copy of the Player’s voluntary acceptance of a Provisional
Suspension shall be provided promptly to each party entitled to receive notice of a
potential anti-doping regulation violation under Article 14.1 of the Code and Regulation
7.

10.9.5 No credit against a period of Ineligibility shall be given for any time period before the
effective date of the Provisional Suspension or voluntary Provisional Suspension
regardless of whether the Player elected not to compete or was suspended by his or her
team.

10.10 Status during Ineligibility

10.10.1 Prohibition against participation during Ineligibility

No Person who has been declared Ineligible may, during the period of Ineligibility,
participate in any capacity in a Competition or activity (other than authorised anti-
doping education or rehabilitation programs) authorised or organised by the BWF or any
Member Association or a club or other member organisation of the BWF or any Member
Association or in Competitions authorised and organised by any professional league or
any international or national level Event organisation. In addition, for any anti-doping
regulation violation not involving Specified Substances described in Regulation 10.4,
some or all sport-related financial support or other sport-related benefits received by
such Person will be withheld by the BWF and its Member Associations. A Person
subject to a period of Ineligibility longer than four years may, after completing four
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

102
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

years of the period of Ineligibility, participate in local sport events in a sport other than
sports subject to the jurisdictions of the BWF and its Member Associations, but only so
long as the local sport event is not at a level that could otherwise qualify such Person
directly or indirectly to compete in (or accumulate points toward) a national
championship or International Event.

A Player or other Person subject to a period of Ineligibility shall remain subject to

Testing.

10.10.2 Violation of the prohibition of participation during Ineligibility

GCR

Where a Player or other Person who has been declared Ineligible violates the prohibition
against participation during Ineligibility described in Regulation 10.10.1, the results of such
participation shall be Disqualified and the period of Ineligibility which was originally
imposed shall start over again as of the date of the violation. The new period of Ineligibility
may be reduced under Regulation 10.5.2 if the Person establishes he or she bears No
Significant Fault or Negligence for violating the prohibition against participation. The
determination of whether a Person has violated the prohibition against participation, and
whether a reduction under Regulation 10.5.2 is appropriate, shall be made by the BWF.

10.10.3 Withholding of financial support during Ineligibility

In addition, for any anti-doping regulation violation not involving a reduced sanction for
Specified Substances as described in Regulation 10.4, some or all sport-related financial
support or other sport-related benefits received by such Person will be withheld by BWF
and its Member Associations.

10.11 Reinstatement Testing

As a condition of regaining eligibility at the end of a specified period of Ineligibility, a Player

must, during any period of Provisional Suspension or Ineligibility, be available for Out-of-
Competition Testing by the BWF, the applicable Member Association, and any other Anti-Doping
Organisation having Testing jurisdiction, and must, if requested, provide current and accurate
whereabouts information. If a Player subject to a period of Ineligibility retires from sport and is
removed from Out-of-Competition Testing pools and later seeks reinstatement, the Player shall
not be eligible for reinstatement until the Player has notified the BWF and the applicable Member
Association and has been subject to Out-of-Competition Testing for a period of time equal to the
period of Ineligibility remaining as of the date the Player had retired.

During such remaining period of Ineligibility, a minimum of two tests must be conducted on the
Player with at least three months between each test. The Member Association shall be
responsible for conducting the necessary tests, but tests by any Anti-Doping Organisation may be
used to satisfy the requirement. The results of such tests shall be reported to the BWF. In
addition, immediately prior to the end of the Ineligibility period, a Player must undergo Testing
by the BWF for the Prohibited Substances and Methods for Out-of-Competition Testing. Once
the period of a Player's suspension has expired, and the Player has fulfilled the conditions of
reinstatement, then the Player will become automatically re-eligible and no application by the
Player or by the Player's Member Association will then be necessary.

10.12 Imposition of financial sanctions

The BWF may impose financial sanctions on any person who has breached an anti-doping
regulation However, no financial sanction may be considered a basis for reducing the period of
Ineligibility or other sanction which would otherwise be applicable under the Code.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

103
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

11. CONSEQUENCES TO TEAMS

11.1 Where more than one member of a team 8 in a Team Sport has been notified of a possible anti-
doping regulation violation under Regulation 7 in connection with an Event, the BWF shall
conduct appropriate Target Testing of the team during the Event Period. If more than two
members of a team in a Team Sport are found to have committed an anti-doping regulation
violation during an Event period, the BWF shall impose an appropriate sanction on the team (e.g.,
loss of points, Disqualification from a Competition or Event, or other sanction) in addition to any
Consequences imposed upon the individual Player(s) committing the anti-doping regulation
violation.

GCR
11.2 If a member of a team is found to have committed a violation of these anti-doping regulations
during an Event, the team shall be Disqualified from the Event.

11.3 In doubles Competitions, the partner of the Player found guilty of a doping offence under these
anti-doping regulations will incur the same prize money and World Ranking points penalties as
the offender.

12. SANCTIONS AND COSTS ASSESSED AGAINST MEMBER ASSOCIATIONS

12.1 The BWF has the authority to withhold some or all funding or other non-financial support to
Member Associations that are not in compliance with these anti-doping regulations.

12.2 The BWF may elect to take additional disciplinary action against Member Associations with
respect to recognition, the eligibility of its officials and Players to participate in International
Events and fines based on the following:

12.2.1 Four or more violations of these anti-doping regulations (other than violations involving
Regulations 2.4 and 10.4) are committed by Players or other Persons affiliated with a
Member Association within a 12-month period in testing conducted by the BWF or Anti-
Doping Organisations other than the Member Association or its National Anti-Doping
Organisation. In such event the BWF may in its discretion elect to:

• ban all officials from that Member Association for participation in any BWF
activities for a period of up to two years;

and / or

• fine the Member Association up to US $100,000. (For purposes of this Regulation,

any fine paid pursuant to Regulation 12.2.2 shall be credited against any fine
assessed.)

If four or more violations of these anti-doping regulations (other than violations

involving Regulations 2.4 and 10.4) are committed in addition to the violations described
in Regulation 12.2.1 by Players or other Persons affiliated with a Member Association
within a 12-month period in testing conducted by the BWF or Anti-Doping
Organisations other than the Member Association or its National Anti-Doping
Organisation, then the BWF may suspend that Member Association’s membership for a
period of up to four (4) years.

12.2.2 More than one Player or other Person from a Member Association commits an anti-
doping regulation violation during an International Event. In such event the BWF may
fine that Member Association up to US $20,000.

12.2.3 A Member Association has failed to make diligent efforts to keep the BWF informed
about a Player's whereabouts after receiving a request for that information from the
BWF. In such event the BWF may fine the Member Association an amount up to US

8 “Team” in these Regulations does not mean “pair” in doubles, but rather a team competition consisting of one

or more matches in a tie, where the team winning most matches wins the tie (eg the Thomas, Uber or Sudirman
Cups)
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

104
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

$20,000 per Player in addition to requiring payment (by that Member Association) of all
of the BWF’s costs incurred in Testing that Member Association's Players.

13. APPEALS

13.1 Decisions subject to appeal

Decisions made under these anti-doping regulations may be appealed as in this Regulation 13.
Such decisions shall remain in effect while under appeal unless the appellate body orders
otherwise. Before an appeal is commenced, any post-decision review authorised in Regulation
GCR

8.2.7 must be exhausted.

13.1.1 Where WADA has a right to appeal under Regulation 13 and no other party has appealed
a final decision within the BWF or its Member Associations process, WADA may appeal
such decision directly to CAS without having to exhaust other remedies in the BWF or its
Member Associations process.

13.2 Appeals from decisions regarding anti-doping regulation violations, Consequences, and
Provisional Suspensions

• A decision that an anti-doping regulation violation was committed;

• a decision imposing Consequences for an anti-doping regulation violation;
• a decision that no anti-doping regulation violation was committed;
• a decision that an anti-doping regulation violation cannot go forward for procedural reasons;
• a decision under Regulation 10.10.2 (Violation of the prohibition of participation during
Ineligibility);
• a decision the BWF or its Member Association lacks jurisdiction to rule on an alleged anti-
doping regulation violation or its Consequences;
• a decision by any Member Association not to bring forward an Adverse Analytical Finding or
an Atypical Finding as an anti-doping regulation violation, or a decision not to go forward
with an anti-doping regulation violation after an investigation under Regulation 7;
and
• a decision to impose a Provisional Suspension as a result of a Provisional Hearing or
otherwise in violation of Regulation 7.6

may be appealed exclusively as provided in this Regulation 13.2.

13.2.1 In cases arising from participation in an International Event or in cases involving

International-Level Players, the decision may be appealed exclusively to the CAS in
accordance with the provisions applicable before such court.

13.2.2 In cases involving Players that do not have a right to appeal under Regulation 13.2.1,
each Member Association shall have in place an appeal procedure that respects the
following principles:

• a timely hearing;

• a fair and impartial hearing body;

• the right to be represented at the Person’s expense;

and

• a timely, written, reasoned decision.

The BWF’s rights of appeal with respect to these cases are in Regulation 13.2.3.

13.2.3 In cases under Regulation 13.2.1, the following parties shall have the right to appeal to
CAS:

• the Player or other Person who is the subject of the decision being appealed;
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

105
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

• the other party to the case in which the decision was rendered;

• the BWF;

• any other Anti-Doping Organization under whose rules a sanction could have been
imposed

• the International Olympic Committee or International Paralympic Committee, as

applicable, where the decision may have an effect in relation to the Olympic Games

GCR
or Paralympic Games, including decisions affecting eligibility for the Olympic
Games or Paralympic Games;

and

• WADA.

In cases under Regulation 13.2.2, the parties having the right to appeal to the national-
level reviewing body shall be as provided in the Member Association's rules but, at a
minimum, shall include:

• the Player or other Person who is the subject of the decision being appealed;

• the other party to the case in which the decision was rendered;

• the BWF;

• the National Anti-Doping Organisation of the Person’s country of residence;

and

• WADA.

For cases under Regulation 13.2.2, WADA and the BWF shall also have the right to
appeal to CAS with respect to the decision of the national-level reviewing body.

13.3 Failure to render a timely decision by an Anti-Doping Organisation

Where, in a particular case, the BWF or its Member Associations fail to render a decision with
respect to whether an anti-doping regulation violation was committed within a reasonable
deadline set by WADA, WADA may elect to appeal directly to CAS as if the BWF or its Member
Association had rendered a decision finding no anti-doping regulation violation. If the CAS panel
determines that an anti-doping regulation violation was committed and that WADA acted
reasonably in electing to appeal directly to CAS, then WADA’s costs and attorneys fees in
prosecuting the appeal shall be reimbursed to WADA by the BWF or its Member Associations.

13.4 Appeals from decisions granting or denying a TUE

Decisions by WADA reversing the grant or denial of a TUE exemption may be appealed
exclusively to CAS by the Player, the BWF, or National Anti-Doping Organisation or other body
designated by a Member Association which granted or denied the exemption. Decisions by Anti-
Doping Organisations other than WADA denying TUEs, and which are not reversed by WADA,
may be appealed by International-Level Players to CAS and by other Players to the national level
reviewing body described in Regulation 13.2.2. If the national level reviewing body reverses the
decision to deny a TUE, that decision may be appealed to CAS by WADA.

When the BWF, National Anti-Doping Organizations or other bodies designated by Member
Associations fail to take action on a properly submitted TUE application within a reasonable time,
their failure to decide may be considered a denial for purposes of the appeal rights provided in
this Regulation.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

106
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

13.5 Appeal from decisions pursuant to Regulation 12

Decisions by the BWF pursuant to Regulation 12 may be appealed exclusively to CAS by the
Member Association.

13.6 Time for filing appeals

The time to file an appeal to CAS shall be twenty-one (21) days from the date of receipt of the
decision by the appealing party. The above notwithstanding, the following shall apply in
connection with appeals filed by a party entitled to appeal but which was not a party to the
proceedings having lead to the decision subject to appeal:
GCR

The above notwithstanding, the filing deadline for an appeal or intervention filed by WADA shall
be the later of:

(a) Twenty-one (21) days after the last day on which any other party in the case could have
appealed, or

(b) Twenty-one (21) days after WADA’s receipt of the complete file relating to the decision.

If such a request is made within the ten (10) day period, then the party making such request shall
have twenty-one (21) days from receipt of the file to file an appeal to CAS.

The above notwithstanding, the following shall apply in connection with appeals filed by a party
entitled to appeal but which was not a party to the proceedings having lead to the decision subject
to appeal:

(a) Within ten (10) days from notice of the decision, such party/ies shall have the right to request
from the body having issued the decision a copy of the file on which such body relied;

(b) If such a request is made within the ten (10) day period, then the party making such request
shall have twenty-one (21) days from receipt of the file to file an appeal to CAS.

14. MEMBER ASSOCIATIONS’ INCORPORATION OF THE BWF REGULATIONS, REPORTING

AND RECOGNITION

14.1 Incorporation of the BWF anti-doping regulations

All Member Associations shall comply with these anti-doping regulations. The Rules of each
Member Association shall specifically provide that all Players, Player Support Personnel and
other Persons under the jurisdiction of the Member Association shall be bound by these anti-
doping regulations.

14.2 Statistical Reporting

Member Associations shall report to the BWF at the end of every year results of all Doping
Controls within their jurisdiction sorted by Player and identifying each date on which the Player
was tested, the entity conducting the test, and whether the test was In-Competition or Out-of-
Competition. The BWF may periodically publish Testing data received from Member
Associations as well as comparable data from Testing under the BWF's jurisdiction.

The BWF shall publish annually a general statistical report of its Doping Control activities during
the calendar year with a copy provided to WADA.

14.3 Doping Control information clearing house

When a Member Association has received an Adverse Analytical Finding on one of its Players, it
shall report the following information to the BWF and WADA within fourteen (14) days of the
process described in Regulations 7.1.2 to 7.1.4: the Player’s name, country, sport and discipline
within the sport, whether the test was In-Competition or Out-of-Competition, the date of Sample
collection and the analytical result reported by the laboratory. The Member Association shall also
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

107
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

regularly update the BWF and WADA on the status and findings of any review or proceedings
conducted pursuant to Regulation 7 (Results Management), Regulation 8 (Right to a Fair
Hearing) or Regulation 13 (Appeals), and comparable information shall be provided to the BWF
and WADA within 14 days of the notification described in Regulation 7.1.9, with respect to other
violations of these anti-doping regulations. In any case in which the period of Ineligibility is
eliminated under Regulation 10.5.1 (No Fault or Negligence) or reduced under Regulation 10.5.2
(No Significant Fault or Negligence), the BWF and WADA shall be provided with a written
reasoned decision explaining the basis for the elimination or reduction. Neither the BWF nor
WADA shall disclose this information beyond those persons within their organisations with a need
to know until the Member Association has made public disclosure or has failed to make public
disclosure as required in Regulation 14.4.

GCR
14.4 Public disclosure

14.4.1 Neither the BWF nor its Member Association shall publicly identify Players whose
Samples have resulted in Adverse Analytical Findings, or who were alleged to have
violated other of these anti-doping regulations until it has been determined in a hearing
in accordance with Regulation 8 that an anti-doping regulation violation has occurred, or
such hearing has been waived, or the assertion of an anti-doping regulation violation has
not been timely challenged or the Player has been Provisionally Suspended. Once a
violation of these anti-doping regulations has been established, it shall be Publicly
Reported within 20 days. The BWF or its Member Association must also report within
20 days appeal decisions on an anti-doping rule violation. The BWF or its Member
Association shall also, within the time period for publication, send all hearing and appeal
decisions to WADA.

14.4.2 In any case where it is determined, after a hearing or appeal, that the Player or other
Person did not commit an anti-doping rule violation, the decision may be disclosed
publicly only with the consent of the Player or other Person who is the subject of the
decision. The BWF or its Member Association shall use reasonable efforts to obtain
such consent, and if consent is obtained, shall publicly disclose the decision in its
entirety or in such redacted form as the Player or other Person may approve.

14.4.3 Neither the BWF nor its Member Association or WADA accredited laboratory, or official
of either, shall publicly comment on the specific facts of a pending case (as opposed to
general description of process and science) except in response to public comments
attributed to the Player, other Person or their representatives.

14.5 Recognition of decisions by the BWF and Member Associations

Any decision of the BWF or a Member Association regarding a violation of these anti-doping
regulations shall be recognised by all Member Associations, which shall take all necessary action
to render such decisions effective.

15. RECOGNITION OF DECISIONS BY OTHER ORGANISATIONS

Subject to the right to appeal provided in Regulation 13, the Testing, TUEs and hearing results or other
final adjudications of any Signatory to the Code which are consistent with the Code and are within the
Signatory’s authority, shall be recognised and respected by the BWF and its Member Associations. The
BWF and its Member Associations may recognise the same actions of other bodies which have not
accepted the Code if the rules of those bodies are otherwise consistent with the Code.

16. STATUTE OF LIMITATIONS

No action may be commenced under these anti-doping regulations against a Player or other Person for a
violation of an anti-doping regulation contained in these anti-doping regulations unless such action is
commenced within eight (8) years from the date the violation occurred.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

108
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

17. BWF COMPLIANCE REPORTS TO WADA

The BWF will report to WADA on the BWF's compliance with the Code every second year and shall
explain reasons for any non-compliance.

18. AMENDMENT AND INTERPRETATION OF ANTI-DOPING REGULATIONS

18.1 These anti-doping regulations may be amended from time to time by the BWF Council.

18.2 Except as provided in Regulation 18.5, these anti-doping regulations shall be interpreted as an
GCR

independent and autonomous text and not by reference to existing law or statutes.

18.3 The headings used for the various Parts and Regulations of these anti-doping regulations are for
convenience only and shall not be deemed part of the substance of these anti-doping regulations
or to affect in any way the language of the provisions to which they refer.

18.4 The Introduction and the Definitions in these Regulations shall be considered integral parts of
these anti-doping regulations.

18.5 These anti-doping regulations have been adopted pursuant to the applicable provisions of the
Code and shall be interpreted in a manner that is consistent with applicable provisions of the
Code. The comments annotating various provisions of the Code may, where applicable, assist in
the understanding and interpretation of these anti-doping regulations.

18.6 Notice to a Player or other Person who is a member of a Member Association may be
accomplished by delivery of the notice to the Member Association.

18.7 These anti-doping regulations shall come into full force and effect on 1 January 2009 (the
“Effective Date”). They shall not apply retrospectively to matters pending before the Effective
Date; provided, however, that:

18.7.1 Any case pending prior to the Effective Date, or brought after the Effective Date based
on an anti-doping regulation violation that occurred prior to the Effective Date, shall be
governed by the predecessor to these anti-doping regulations in force at the time of the
anti-doping regulation violation, subject to any application of the principle of lex mitior
by the hearing panel determining the case.

18.7.2 Any Regulation 2.4 whereabouts violation (whether a Filing Failure or a Missed Test)
declared by the BWF under rules in force prior to the Effective Date that has not expired
prior to the Effective Date and that would qualify as a whereabouts violation under
Article 11 of the International Standard for Testing shall be carried forward and may be
relied upon, prior to expiry, as one of the three Filing Failures and/or Missed Tests
giving rise to an anti-doping regulation violation under Regulation 2.4 of these anti-
doping regulations.

18.7.3 Where a period of Ineligibility imposed by the BWF under regulations in force prior to
the Effective Date has not yet expired as of the Effective Date, the Person who is
Ineligible may apply to the BWF for a reduction in the period of Ineligibility in light of
the amendments made to the Code as from the Effective Date. To be valid, such
application must be made before the period of Ineligibility has expired.

18.7.4 Subject always to Regulation 10.7.5, anti-doping regulation violations committed under
regulations in force prior to the Effective Date shall be taken into account as prior
offences for purposes of determining sanctions under Regulation 10.7. Where such pre-
Effective Date anti-doping regulation violations involved a substance that would be
treated as a Specified Substance under these anti-doping regulations, for which a period
of Ineligibility of less than two (2) years was imposed, such violation shall be considered
a Reduced Sanction violation for purposes of Regulation 10.7.1.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

109
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

19. DOPING CONTROL ORGANISATION / PROCEDURES

19.1 Administrative Arrangements

19.1.1 The BWF reserves the right to arrange random and targeted doping tests during all
qualifying and final competition matches of the BWF events and BWF sanctioned
tournaments. The BWF shall decide on the number of tests to be carried out both ‘in-
competition’ and ‘out-of-competition’. The BWF shall also decide at which laboratory
among those accredited by WADA the analyses of such tests shall be carried out.

GCR
19.1.2 The BWF shall designate accredited and qualified doping control officers to carry out
doping tests at the tournaments as well as unannounced out-of-competition doping tests.
The BWF may delegate this responsibility by procuring the services of National Anti-
Doping Organisations or other anti-doping organisations to carry out doping controls –
out-of-competition testing.

19.1.3 The doping control officer must be a physician or a qualified / accredited doping control
officer. The doping control officer shall be responsible for the entire doping test
procedure, including the immediate dispatch of urine samples to the relevant laboratory
and copies of the forms to the BWF. The BWF shall provide the doping control officer
with the material required to carry out the tests as required.

19.2 Doping test procedure for urine samples

19.2.1 For random selection, the players to be tested shall be drawn by lots by the doping
control officer in the doping control room. The tournament referee or his assistant shall
witness any random draw for the selection of players.

19.2.2 The doping control officer shall fill in the BWF Doping Control Form and shall then
hand over to the chaperone with advice to serve the summons for doping to the selected
player after completion of the selected players last match of the day. The player shall
report immediately to the doping control station. The player will be under constant
observation of the chaperone till he reports to the doping station.

19.2.3 The number of dope tests per day and days of testing shall be determined by the BWF.

19.2.4 The BWF is entitled to summon additional players to be tested in addition to the players
who have been drawn by lots.

19.2.5 The BWF may decide to conduct out-of-competition doping testsbefore or after a
tournament. .

19.3 Doping Control Room

19.3.1 In the case of in-competition doping tests, only the following people are allowed into the
doping control room:
. the players to be tested (who have been served a summons)
. an official delegate from the participating team, preferably the team doctor or support
person representing the player and as selected by the player
. the doping control officer
. an accredited assistant(s) of the doping control officer
. a local official, if requested
. the BWF tournament referee or his assistant referees
. an interpreter approved by the BWF, if requested
. a WADA independent observer (where applicable).

19.3.2 The players drawn to undergo a doping test shall remain in the waiting room of the
doping test area until they are called in to give samples. Non alcoholic drinks that are
free from prohibited substances shall be made available to the players in the form of
unopened and sealed bottles or cans, some of which are placed in the refrigerator in the
Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

110
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

doping control room. No player or support person of the player shall bring food or drinks
into the doping control area.

19.4 Sample Collection

19.4.1 The doping control officer is responsible for the doping test procedure. The doping
control officer shall check the player’s identity against the player’s accreditation card or
other photo identification.

19.4.2 First, the player himself shall pick the utensils required for the procedure:
• a sealed and sterilised beaker
GCR

• a polystyrene box containing two transparent glass bottles, one marked sample “A” and
the other sample “B”, each packed and sealed in a transparent plastic bag. A code
number is laser engraved on the bottles and bottle caps and also marked on the
polystyrene box.

19.4.3 The player shall urinate into the sterilised beaker under the supervision of the doping
control officer or his assistant. The urine volume shall be at least 90 ml (“A” 60 ml, “B”
30 ml), unless unexpected problems arise, in which case Regulation 19.4 applies.

19.4.4 The player shall pour the urine into bottles “A” and “B”. The doping control officer shall
explain the procedure to him.

19.4.5 The doping control officer shall ascertain the specific weight, using the last remaining
drops of urine in the beaker. The readings are recorded into the BWF doping form.

19.4.6 After the urine sample has been poured into bottles “A” and “B”, the player himself
(Regulation: 19.3.4) shall close them tight. Both the player and the doping control
officer will check that the bottles are properly sealed and in good and proper condition.
The player shall ensure that no urine can leak out and compare the code numbers on both
bottles, the bottle caps and the particulars on the BWF doping form. The player shall
then sign the form, followed by the person accompanying him and the doping control
officer.

19.4.7 The doping control officer shall then give the player a copy of the duly completed
doping form – “Player’s Copy”.

19.4.8 The “A” and “B” samples of all the players tested and the laboratory copy (yellow copy)
shall be delivered to the laboratory by the doping control officer or by courier.

19.5 Procedure if the stipulated urine volume of 90 ml is not obtained

19.5.1 The player shall select a polystyrene box as in Regulation. 19.3.2. without removing the
red security ring he shall open bottle “A” only and select an interim sealing set (interim
sealing device and numbered security tape). The player (Regulation: 19.3.4.) shall pour
the urine into bottle “A” and seal it, using the interim sealing device before replacing the
cap on the bottle. Next, he shall place bottle “A” back in the polystyrene box, which also
contains bottle “B”, and seal it with the security tape, the number of which is registered
on doping form with the player’s signature. The doping control officer shall check, in
full view of the player, that the container ahs been properly checked. The player shall
then return to the waiting room. The box shall remain under the control of the doping
control officer. As soon as the player is able to give a further urine sample, he shall
select a new, sealed and sterilised beaker, into which he shall then urinate under the
supervision of the doping control officer or his assistant.

The player (Regulation: 19.3.4) shall then pour the urine from bottle “A” into the beaker
containing the freshly produced urine. If the urine volume is still below 90 ml, the
process shall be repeated. Once the urine volume of 90 ml has been obtained, the
procedure shall be continued as from Regulations. 19.3.3 to 19.3.8.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

111
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

19.6 The International Standard for Testing

19.6.1 In the event of any inconsistency between these Regulations and the International
Standard for Testing, the International Standard for Testing will prevail.

GCR

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

112
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

APPENDIX 1 – DEFINITIONS

ADAMS. The Anti-Doping Administration and Management System is a Web-based database management tool
for data entry, storage, sharing and reporting designed to assist stakeholders and WADA in their anti-doping
operations in conjunction with data protection legislation.

Adverse Analytical Finding. A report from a laboratory or other WADA-approved entity that, consistent with
the International Standard for Laboratories, identifies in a Specimen the presence of a Prohibited Substance or
its Metabolites or Markers (including elevated quantities of endogenous substances) or evidence of the Use of a
Prohibited Method.
GCR

Anti-Doping Organisation. A Signatory that is responsible for adopting rules for initiating, implementing or
enforcing any part of the Doping Control process. This includes, for example, the International Olympic
Committee, the International Paralympic Committee, other Major Event Organisations that conduct Testing at
their Events, WADA, International Federations, and National Anti-Doping Organisations.

Attempt. Purposely engaging in conduct that constitutes a substantial step in a course of conduct planned to
culminate in the commission of an anti-doping regulation violation. Provided, however, there shall be no anti-
doping regulation violation based solely on an Attempt to commit a violation if the Person renounces the
attempt prior to it being discovered by a third party not involved in the Attempt.

Atypical Finding. A report from a laboratory or other WADA approved entity which requires further
investigation as provided by the International Standard for Laboratories or related Technical Documents prior
to the determination of an Adverse Analytical Finding.

Code. The World Anti-Doping Code.

Competition. A single race, match, game or singular athletic contest. For example, a basketball game or the
finals of the Olympic 100-meter race in athletics. For stage races and other athletic contests where prizes are
awarded on a daily or other interim basis the distinction between a Competition and an Event will be as
provided in the rules of the applicable International Federation.

Consequences of anti-doping regulation violations (or Consequences). A Player's or other Person's violation
of an anti-doping regulation may result in one or more of the following: (a) Disqualification means the
Player’s results in a particular Competition or Event are invalidated, with all resulting Consequences including
forfeiture of any medals, points and prizes; (b) Ineligibility means the Player or other Person is barred for a
specified period of time from participating in any Competition or other activity or funding as provided in
Regulation 10.9; and (c) Provisional Suspension means the Player or other Person is barred temporarily from
participating in any Competition prior to the final decision at a hearing conducted under Regulation 8 (Right to
a Fair Hearing).

Disqualification. See Consequences of anti-doping regulation violations above.

Doping Control. All steps and processes from test distribution planning through to ultimate disposition of any
appeal including all steps and processes in between such as provision of whereabouts information, Sample
collection and handling, laboratory analysis, TUE, results management, and hearings.

Event. A series of individual Competitions conducted together under one ruling body (eg, the Olympic Games,
BWF World Championships, or Pan American Games).

Event Period. The time between the beginning and end of an Event, as established by the ruling body of the
Event.

In-Competition. Unless provided otherwise in the rules of an International Federation or other relevant Anti-
Doping Organisation, In-Competition means the period commencing twelve hours before a Competition in
which the Player is scheduled to participate through the end of such Competition and the Sample collection
process related to such Competition.

Independent Observer Program. A team of observers, under the supervision of WADA, who observe and may
provide guidance on the Doping Control process at certain Events and report on observations.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

113
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

Individual Sport. Any sport that is not a Team Sport.

Ineligibility. See Consequences of anti-doping regulation violations above.

International Event. An Event where the International Olympic Committee, the International Paralympic
Committee, an International Federation, a Major Event Organisation, or another international sport
organisation is the ruling body for the Event or appoints the technical officials for the Event.

International-Level Player. Players designated by one or more International Federations as being within the
Registered Testing Pool for an International Federation.

GCR
International Standard. A standard adopted by WADA in support of the Code. Compliance with an
International Standard (as opposed to another alternative standard, practice or procedure) shall be sufficient to
conclude that the procedures addressed by the International Standard were performed properly. International
Standards shall include any Technical Documents issued pursuant to the International Standard.

Major Event Organisations. This term refers to the continental associations of National Olympic Committees
and other international multi-sport organisations that function as the ruling body for any continental, regional or
other International Event.

Marker. A compound, group of compounds or biological parameters that indicates the Use of a Prohibited
Substance or Prohibited Method.

Member Association. A national or regional entity which is a member of or is recognised by the BWF as the
entity governing Badminton in that nation or region.

Metabolite. Any substance produced by a biotransformation process.

Minor. A natural Person who has not reached the age of majority as established by the applicable laws of the
Person’s country of residence.

National Anti-Doping Organisation. The entity(ies) designated by each country as possessing the primary
authority and responsibility to adopt and implement anti-doping regulations, direct the collection of Samples,
the management of test results, and the conduct of hearings, all at the national level. This includes an entity
which may be designated by multiple countries to serve as regional Anti-Doping Organisation for such
countries. If this designation has not been made by the competent public authority(ies), the entity shall be the
country's National Olympic Committee or its designee.

National Event. A sport Event involving international or national-level Players that is not an International
Event.

National Federation. A national or regional entity which is a member of or is recognised by the BWF as the
entity governing badminton in that nation or region.

National Olympic Committee. The organisation recognised by the International Olympic Committee. The term
National Olympic Committee shall also include the National Sport Confederation in those countries where the
National Sport Confederation assumes typical National Olympic Committee responsibilities in the anti-doping
area.

No Fault or Negligence. The Player's establishing that the Player did not know or suspect, and could not
reasonably have known or suspected even with the exercise of utmost caution, that the Player had Used or been
administered the Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.

No Significant Fault or Negligence. The Player's establishing that the Player’s fault or negligence, when
viewed in the totality of the circumstances and taking into account the criteria for No Fault or Negligence, was
not significant in relationship to the anti-doping regulation violation.

Out-of-Competition. Any Doping Control which is not In-Competition.

Participant. Any Player or Player Support Personnel.

Person. A natural Person or an organisation or other entity.

Part III - Section 1B
Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

114
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

Player. Any Person who participates in sport at the international level (as defined by each International
Federation), the national level (as defined by each National Anti-Doping Organisation including but not limited
to those Persons in its Registered Testing Pool) and any other competitor in sport who is otherwise subject to
the jurisdiction of any Signatory or other sports organisation accepting the Code. All provisions of the Code,
including, for example, Testing and therapeutic use exemptions, must be applied to international and national-
level competitors. Some National Anti-Doping Organisations may elect to test and apply anti-doping rules to
recreational-level or masters competitors who are not current or potential national caliber competitors.
National Anti-Doping Organisations are not required, however, to apply all aspects of the Code to such
Persons. Specific national rules may be established for Doping Control for non-international-level or non-
national-level competitors without being in conflict with the Code. Thus, a country could elect to test
recreational-level competitors but not require therapeutic use exemptions or whereabouts information. In the
GCR

same manner, a Major Event Organisation holding an Event only for masters-level competitors could elect to
test the competitors but not require advance therapeutic use exemptions or whereabouts information. For
purposes of Regulation 2.8 (Administration or Attempted Administration) and for purposes of anti-doping
information and education, any Person who participates in sport under the authority of any Signatory,
government, or other sports organisation accepting the Code is a Player.

Player Support Personnel. Any coach, trainer, manager, agent, team staff, official, medical, para-medical
personnel, parent or any other Person working with, treating or assisting a Player participating in or preparing
for sports Competition.

Publicity Report. To disseminate or distribute information to the general public or persons beyond those
persons entitled to earlier notification in accordance with Regulation 14.4.

Possession. The actual, physical Possession, or the constructive Possession (which shall be found only if the
Person has exclusive control over the Prohibited Substance/Method or the premises in which a Prohibited
Substance/Method exists); provided, however, that if the Person does not have exclusive control over the
Prohibited Substance/Method or the premises in which a Prohibited Substance/Method exists, constructive
Possession shall only be found if the person knew about the presence of the Prohibited Substance/Method and
intended to exercise control over it. Provided, however, there shall be no anti-doping regulation violation
based solely on Possession if, prior to receiving notification of any kind that the Person has committed an anti-
doping regulation violation, the Person has taken concrete action demonstrating that the Person never intended
to have Possession and has renounced Possession by explicitly declaring it to an Anti-Doping Organisation.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this definition, the purchase (including by any electronic or other
means) of a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method constitutes Possession by the Person who makes the
purchase.

Prohibited List. The List identifying the Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods.

Prohibited Method. Any method so described on the Prohibited List.

Prohibited Substance. Any substance so described on the Prohibited List.

Provisional Hearing. For purposes of Regulation 7, an expedited abbreviated hearing occurring prior to a
hearing under Regulation 8 (Right to a Fair Hearing) that provides the Player with notice and an opportunity to
be heard in either written or oral form.

Provisional Suspension. See Consequences of anti-doping regulation violation above.

Registered Testing Pool. The pool of top level Players established separately by each International Federation
and National Anti-Doping Organisation who are subject to both In-Competition and Out-of-Competition
Testing as part of that International Federation's or National Anti-Doping Organisation's test distribution plan.
Each International Federation shall publish a list which identifies those Players included in its Registered
Testing Pool either by name or by clearly defined, specific criteria.

Referee. The one person in overall charge of the technical delivery of the tournament including the schedule of
matches, application of the rules and the conduct of the players (see Law 17 – BWF Laws of Badminton).

Retroactive TUE. As defined in the International Standard for TUEs.

Sample/Specimen. Any biological material collected for the purposes of Doping Control.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

115
 GCR – Anti-Doping Regulations

Signatories. Those entities signing the Code and agreeing to comply with the Code, including the International
Olympic Committee, International Federations, International Paralympic Committee, National Olympic
Committees, National Paralympic Committees, Major Event Organisations, National Anti-Doping
Organisations, and WADA.

Substantial Assistance. For purposes of Regulation 10.5.3, a Person providing Substantial Assistance must: (1)
fully disclose in a signed written statement all information he or she possesses in relation to anti-doping
violations, and (2) fully cooperate with the investigation and adjudication of any case related to that
information, including, for example, presenting testimony at a hearing if requested to do so by an Anti-Doping
Organisation or hearing panel. Further, the information provided must be credible and must comprise an
important part of any case which is initiated or, if no case is initiated, must have provided a sufficient basis on

GCR
which a case could have been brought.

Tampering. Altering for an improper purpose or in an improper way; bringing improper influence to bear;
interfering improperly; obstructing, misleading or engaging in any fraudulent conduct to alter results or prevent
normal procedures from occurring; or providing fraudulent information to an Anti-Doping Organisation.

Target Testing. Selection of Players for Testing where specific Players or groups of Players are selected on a
non-random basis for Testing at a specified time.

Team Sport. A sport in which the substitution of players is permitted during a Competition.

Testing. The parts of the Doping Control process involving test distribution planning, Sample collection,
Sample handling, and Sample transport to the laboratory.

Trafficking. Selling, giving, transporting, sending, delivering or distributing a Prohibited Substance or

Prohibited Method (either physically or by any electronic or other means) by a Player, Player-Support
Personnel or any other Person subject to the jurisdiction of an Anti-Doping Organisation to any third party;
provided, however, this definition shall not include the actions of “bona fide” medical personnel involving a
Prohibited Substance used for genuine and legal therapeutic purpose or other acceptable justification, and shall
not include actions involving Prohibited Substances which are not prohibited in Out-of-Competition Testing
unless the circumstances as a whole demonstrate such Prohibited Substances are not intended for genuine and
legal therapeutic purposes.

TUE. As defined in Regulation 2.6.1.

TUE Panel. As defined in regulation 4.4.3.

Use. The utilisation, application, ingestion, injection or consumption by any means whatsoever of any
Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.

WADA. The World Anti-Doping Agency.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 3
Updated: 3rd June 2011

116
 GCR - Players’ Code of Conduct

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 4

PLAYERS’ CODE OF CONDUCT

1. PURPOSES

The purposes of this Code are:

GCR

1.1 to ensure and maintain an orderly and fair administration and conduct for BWF-sanctioned
tournaments, and to protect the players’ rights and the respective rights of the BWF, sponsors, and
the public;

1.2 to uphold the good name of the BWF and the integrity of the sport of Badminton world-wide.

2. APPLICABILITY

2.1 This Code is applicable to all BWF-sanctioned tournaments and the players participating in them.

2.2 All players, at all times, shall be subject to the Code and the Laws of Badminton. Each player who
is entered or nominated to participate in an BWF-sanctioned tournament shall accept this Code, the
Competition Regulations and the Laws of Badminton and then, in effect, is bound by them.

2.3 Any player who commits any offence defined in Regulations 3 to 5 shall be deemed to have
breached this Code. Breaches of the Code constitute the basis for disciplinary action against the
player.

3. PLAYER’S COMMITMENT AND ENTRY OFFENCES

3.1 Late withdrawal

Withdrawing from either the qualifying or main draw after publication of the draw without evidence
or proof of “bona fide” injury, illness, bereavement or other emergency situation

3.2 Playing another tournament

Having entered and been accepted into either the qualifying or main draw of a BWF-sanctioned
tournament and playing in another Badminton tournament during the period of that tournament.

3.3 Playing after declaring non-availability due to injury

Withdrawing from a future tournament due to injury or illness and playing in any Badminton
tournament during the period between the date of notification of injury/illness and the said
tournament from which the player has withdrawn.

3.4 Early departure from tournament

Making travel arrangements which would preclude the player from participation in scheduled
matches or interfere with their commitment to attend dope-tests.

4. PLAYER’S ON-SITE OFFENCES

4.1 Inappropriate conduct

4.1.1 During any match or at any time while within the precincts of the site of an BWF-
sanctioned tournament, not conducting oneself in an honourable and sportsmanlike manner.
Part III- Section 1B
Appendix 4
Updated: 3rd June 2011

117
 GCR - Players’ Code of Conduct

4.1.2 Before, during and after any match does not comply with the goodwill formalities such as
thanking TOs, shaking hand with opposing players, etc.

4.2 Dress violations

4.2.1 Failing to dress and present oneself for play in a suitable smart manner. Clean and
acceptable Badminton sports clothing shall be worn.

4.2.2 Failing to comply with the conditions of entry of each tournament with regard to clothing
and advertising regulations.

GCR
4.3 Failure to complete a match

Failing to complete a match in progress unless reasonably unable to do so.

4.4 Late arrival for match/no match

4.4.1 Arriving late for a match, resulting in No show.

4.4.2 Withdrawing from any event in a tournament whilst still fit enough to compete on the same
day in another event in that said tournament, i.e. players may not default without good
reason from one event to concentrate their efforts in another during the same tournament.

4.5 Failure to use best efforts

Not using one’s best efforts to win a match.

4.6 Trying to influence line judges

Trying to influence the decision of line judges by arm, hand, or racket gestures, or orally.

4.7 Seeking coaching

Seeking coaching during play except as permitted under the Laws. Communication of any kind,
audible or visible, between a player and a coach may be construed as coaching.

4.8 Failure to fulfill media obligation

4.8.1. Failing to attend any pre-tournament media conference organized a day prior to their first
scheduled singles or doubles match;

4.8.2. Failure to give on-court interviews for television immediately after a match whether the
match has been won or lost;

4.8.3. Unless injured and physically unable to appear, failing to attend any post-match media
conference organised after conclusion of each match whether the player was the winner or
loser, providing that this does not interfere with the preparation for the player’s next match.

4.8.4. Failure to assist with the promotion of a tournament and the game in general. A player
must be willing to participate on request in at least one appropriate activity of not more
than one hour’s duration (such as autograph-signing, participating in “meet the public”,
question and answer sessions, etc.).

4.9 Violating ceremony protocol

When participating in the finals of a tournament, not participating in the final ceremonies directly
after the match or not wearing the style of clothing (eg tracksuit, uniform) requested by the
organisers

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 4
Updated: 3rd June 2011

118
 GCR - Players’ Code of Conduct

4.10 Audible obscenity

Using words commonly known and understood in any language to be profane or indecent and
uttered clearly and loudly enough to be heard by the umpire or spectators.

4.11 Visible obscenity

Making of gestures or signs with the hands and/or racket or shuttle that commonly have an obscene
or offensive meaning

4.12 Abuse of shuttle

GCR

4.12.1 Intentionally hitting a shuttle dangerously or recklessly within or out of the court, hitting a
shuttle with negligent disregard for the consequences, or deliberately damaging a shuttle.

4.12.2 Deliberately tampering with the shuttle to affect its flight or speed.

4.13 Abuse of racket or equipment

Intentionally and violently destroying or damaging rackets or other equipment, or intentionally and
violently hitting the net, court, umpire’s chair or other fixtures during a match.

4.14 Oral abuse

Making a statement within the precincts of the tournament site, directed at an official, opponent,
spectator or other person that implies dishonesty or is derogatory, insulting or otherwise abusive

4.15 Physical abuse

Physically abusing an official, opponent, spectator or other person. Even the unauthorised touching
of such persons may be regarded as physical abuse.

4.16 Unsportsmanlike conduct

Conducting oneself in a manner that is clearly abusive or detrimental to the sport

5. PLAYER’S MAJOR OFFENCES

5.1 Conduct contrary to the integrity of the game

Engaging in conduct contrary to the integrity of the game of Badminton. If a player is convicted of
serious violation of a criminal law of any country, the punishment for which includes possible
imprisonment, that player may be deemed by virtue of such conviction to have engaged in conduct
contrary to the integrity of the game of Badminton. In addition, if a player has at any time behaved
in a manner severely damaging to the reputation of the sport, that player may be deemed by virtue
of such behaviour to have engaged in conduct contrary to the integrity of the game of Badminton.

5.2 Wagers

Wagering anything of value in connection with an tournament in which one will be, or is, competing.

5.3 Bribes or other payments

Offering, giving, soliciting, or accepting, or agreeing to offer, give, solicit, or accept, anything of
value to or from any person with the intent to influence any player’s efforts or the result of a match
in any BWF-sanctioned tournament.

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 4
Updated: 3rd June 2011

119
 GCR –DIM

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 5

DECLARATION ON INTEGRITY OF MATCHES

It is a fundamental principle of sport that the outcome of a match is determined by the skill of the players, and
that anything that attacks the integrity of a match brings the whole of a sport into disrepute.

GCR
Recently (particularly on gaming companies’ Internet websites) there has been a significant growth in
gambling on the outcome, on the progress of the score, and on other matters in such matches. Other sports
have had their reputation damaged by allegations (some later proved correct) that players and others associated
with the sport have sought to influence the outcome of a match for financial gain, or have acted in such a way
as to raise fears that the match outcome (or indeed any aspect of the match) was in some way pre-determined.

Recognising that such gambling is outside the control of the BWF, but wishing to retain Badminton’s
reputation for integrity, it is therefore recommended that severe penalties (possibly including exclusion from
the sport for life) be applied to anyone, whether a player, or a court or team official, who influences (or
attempts to influence) the normal outcome or progress of a match as determined by the skills and tactics of the
players involved, typically but not always, for personal financial gain.

Players and team officials are also asked to note the Players’ Code of Conduct (Part III – Section 1B, Appendix
4) which already lists such offences as failing to use one’s best efforts to win a match, wagering, and accepting
bribes or other payments.

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 5
Updated: 3rd June 2011

120
 GCR –World Ranking System

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 6

WORLD RANKING SYSTEM

[Note: Competition Regulation 30]

1. Definition
GCR

1.1 The World Ranking and World Junior Ranking are lists of players / pairs in order of strength. There
is one list for each of the five Badminton events in the World Ranking and World Junior Ranking.
The system used to rank players / pairs is explained below:

1.2 The world team ranking is a list of member associations in order of strength

1.3 Players / pairs:

1.3.1 win ranking points by playing in tournaments that are graded.

1.3.2 in the World Ranking are ranked if they have played in two or more graded tournaments in
the last 52 weeks. In the World Junior Ranking one or more graded tournaments in the last
52 weeks

1.3.3 win ranking points by playing in and winning matches in tournaments

1.3.4 the higher the level of tournament, the more points are won.

1.3.5 the further reached in a competition, the more points are won.

1.3.6 can be seeded based on their World Ranking and World Junior Ranking.

1.3.7 can qualify for the Olympic Games and the World Championships based on their World
Ranking.

2. Tournaments included in the Rankings

2.1 The World Rankings are compiled from the results of tournaments that are sanctioned by the BWF
(except Junior tournaments) held over the last 52 week period. All tournaments eligible, under the
criteria at the end of this section, are graded and the details of the grade are published in the
International Calendar of Tournaments.

2.2 The World Junior Rankings are compiled from the results of BWF World Ranking tournaments
(results from a maximum of 2 BWF World Ranking sanctioned tournaments may be included in a
junior player’s World Junior Ranking) and the junior tournaments that are sanctioned by the BWF
held over the last 52 week period. All tournaments eligible, under the criteria at the end of this section,
are graded and the details of the grade are published in the International Calendar and Junior Calendar
of Tournaments.

3. World Ranking and World Junior Ranking Lists

3.1 The Rankings are published on a Thursday every week. The complete Ranking lists are available
on the BWF web site: www.bwfbadminton.org.

4. Points system

4.1 Players/pairs win points according to how far they progress in the draw of a particular event.

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

121
 GCR –World Ranking System

4.2 If a player/pair:

4.2.1 had a bye in the first round and lost in the second round – they receive first round loser’s
points.

4.2.2 had a bye in the first round, won in the second round and lost in the third round – they
receive third round loser’s points.

4.2.3 had a walkover in the first round and lost in the second round – they receive second round
loser’s points.

GCR
4.2.4 had a bye in the first round, walkover in the second round and lost in the third round – they
receive third round loser’s points.

4.2.5 in tournament levels 3 & 4 had a wildcard entry and lost in the first round they receive no
world ranking points.

4.2.6 in a tournament with rounds in group play (pool matches) they will receive points
according to the finishing position in the group, equal to the equivalent finishing position in
a knock out format tournament.

For example a player/pair finishing in fourth place in a group, in a draw containing

eight groups of four would receive round of 64 loser’s points;

Eight groups of four are played.

Number 1 in the group proceeds to the knockout stage, playing for position 1, 2, 3/4
and 5/8

Number 2 in the group would receive position 9/16 world ranking points

Number 3 in the group would receive position 17/32 world ranking points

Number 4 in the group would receive positions 33/64 world ranking points.

5. Ranking

5.1 World Ranking - 10 or fewer World Ranking tournaments in the last 52 weeks

If a player or pair has competed in the same event at 10 or fewer World Ranking tournaments then
the ranking is worked out by adding the points won at the tournaments.

5.2 World Ranking - 11 or more World Ranking tournaments in the last 52 weeks

If a player or pair has competed in the same event at 11 or more World Ranking tournaments, only
the 10 highest points scored in the tournaments during the previous 52 week period count towards
their ranking.

5.3 World Junior Ranking – 5 or fewer World Junior Ranking tournaments in the last 52 weeks

If a player or pair has competed in the same event at 5 or fewer World Junior Ranking tournaments
then the ranking is worked out by adding the points won at the tournaments. Up to a maximum of 2
BWF sanctioned World Ranking tournaments shall be included in the player or pair’s World Junior
Ranking.

5.4 World Junior Ranking – 6 or more World Junior Ranking tournaments in the last 52 weeks

If a player or pair has competed in the same event at 6 or more World Junior Ranking tournaments,
only the 5 highest points scored in the tournaments during the previous 52 week period count
towards their World Junior ranking, of which a maximum of 2 BWF sanctioned World Ranking
tournaments shall be included in the player or pair’s World Junior Ranking.

5.5 Tournaments included in World Junior Rankings

• 2 BWF sanctioned World Ranking tournaments (refer table 6.4)

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

122
 GCR –World Ranking System

• World Junior Championships

• BWF sanctioned Junior tournaments
• Individual Junior Continental Championships

6. Points lists

6.1 Players / pairs are ranked using points. The player / pair with the highest calculated points will be
ranked number one and so on.

6.2 If two or more players / pairs have identical points, then the players / pairs who have played in the
most tournaments will be ranked higher. If players / pairs have identical points and have played in
GCR

an identical number of tournaments, then these players / pairs are ranked equal.

6.3 So, if say 5 players are ranked 1 to 5, and then there are three players with equal points and number
of tournaments, the ranking would be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, 6, 9, 10, etc.

6.4 The tables that follow show the points awarded in BWF-sanctioned tournaments.

Runner * 3/ 5/ 9/ 17/ 33/ 65/ 129/ 257/ 513/

Winner
Up 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024
BWF Tournaments
(BWF World
12000 10200 8400 6600 4800 3000 1200 600 240 120 60
Championships and
Olympic Games)
BWF Superseries Finals
11000 9350 7700 6050 4320 2660 1060 520
Superseries Premier
Superseries 9200 7800 6420 5040 3600 2220 880 430
Grand Prix Gold 7000 5950 4900 3850 2750 1670 660 320 130 60 30
Grand Prix 5000 4250 3500 2720 1920 1170 460 220 90 40 25
International Challenge 4000 3400 2800 2200 1520 920 360 170 70 30 20
International Series 2500 2130 1750 1370 920 550 210 100 40 20 10
Future Series 1700 1420 1170 920 600 350 130 60 20 10 5

* At the Olympic Games 3rd place will receive 9200 points. Fourth place will receive 8400 points.

6.5 World Junior Ranking point table.

Runner 3/ 5/ 9/ 17/ 33/ 65/ 129/ 257/ 513/

Winner
Up 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024
World Junior
12000 10200 8400 6600 4800 3000 1200 600 240 120 60
Championships
Asian Junior
9200 7800 6420 5040 3600 2220 880 430
Championships
European Junior
Championships and
7000 5950 4900 3850 2750 1670 660 320 130 60 30
Upgraded Asian
International Tournaments
Upgraded Asian and
European Junior 5000 4250 3500 2750 1920 1170 460 220 90 40 25
International Tournaments
Asian & European Junior
4000 3400 2800 2200 1520 920 360 170 70 30 20
International Tournaments
Africa, Pan Am and
Oceania Continental 2500 2130 1750 1370 920 550 210 100 40 20 10
Junior championships
Africa, Pan Am and
Oceania Junior 1700 1420 1170 920 600 350 130 60 20 10 5
International Tournaments.

• Badminton Asia Confederation may select up to 2 tournaments to upgrade to European

Junior Championships level and up to 3 tournaments to the upgraded Asian and European
Tournaments level as stated in World Junior ranking table above.
• Badminton Europe can select up to 3 tournaments to upgrade to the upgraded Asian and
European International Tournaments level.

6.5.1 Eligibility.
• Players must be under 19 years of age to be eligible in the World Junior Ranking.

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

123
 GCR –World Ranking System

• Players will be removed from the World Junior Ranking once they have reached 19 years of
age on 1st January.
• In doubles players will be ranked as individuals and not as pairs.

6.6 World Championships & Olympic Games

• World Championships & Olympic Games are rated as BWF tournaments.

6.7 Continental Championships/Continental Multi Sports Games Individual Championships

6.7.1 Individual Championships

GCR
• Asian Championships are graded as a Grand Prix Gold
• European Championships are graded as a Grand Prix Gold
• Oceania Championships are graded as a Grand Prix
• Panamerican Championships are graded as a Grand Prix
• African Championships are graded as an International Series

6.7.1.1 At the request of the Continental Confederation, points earned in the Continental
Multi-sport Games Individual Championships can be included in the World
Ranking instead of Continental Individual Championships as specified in 6.1.1
above. The Continental Confederations shall ensure that such Multi-sport Games
Individual Championships follow similar competition regulations as the
Continental Individual Championships.

6.7.1.2 The level of tournament for the ranking points purposes shall be the same as
specified in 6.7.1.1.

6.7.2 Team Championships

See team calculation below.

7. Team Championships point calculation / Continental Multi- Sports Games Team Championships

7.1 Team Championships that are included in the World Ranking are:

• Continental Team Championships

• Sudirman Cup
• Continental stage of the Thomas & Uber Cups
• Thomas & Uber Cups Final stage

7.1.1 At the request of the Continental Confederation, points earned in the Continental Multi-sport
Games Team Championships can be included in the World Ranking instead of Continental
Team Championships as specified in 7.1.1 above. The Continental Confederations shall
ensure that such Multi-sport Games Team Championships follow similar competition
regulations as the Continental Team Championships.

7.1.2 The level of tournament for the ranking points purposes shall be the same as specified in
7.1.1.
7.2 Players / pairs can only win points for their best result in a 52 week period in any of the above team
Championships.

7.2.1 If a player / pair win a match, they get their average (calculation of average is shown below)
plus the sum of the total ranking points of their opponent(s) divided by 100.

7.2.2 If a player / pair lose a match, they get their average (see calculation below).

7.2.3 If a player / pair win a match, but do not have a World Ranking, then they win 1 point plus
the sum of the total ranking points of their opponent(s) divided by 100.

7.2.4 If a player / pair lose a match and do not have a World Ranking, then they win no points
Part III- Section 1B
Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

124
 GCR –World Ranking System

7.2.5 If a player / pair win a match, but they do not have a World Ranking and their opponent(s)
do not have a World Ranking, then they get 2 points.

7.3 Average:

7.3.1 If a player / pair has played in fewer than 11 tournaments in the last 52 weeks

Divide the points won by the number of tournaments played in

7.3.2 If a player / pair has played in 11 or more tournaments in the last 52 weeks
GCR

Divide the 10 best points won by 10

Example of the logic used to calculate a World Ranking

How many tournaments

has player/pair played in?

More
1 2-10
than 10

No World Ranking Add all points Discard lowest World

(but results recorded together for World Ranking points so that
for future) Ranking 10 tournaments are
included in the World
Ranking

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

125
 GCR –World Ranking System

8. World Team Ranking.

The BWF World Team Ranking system is to measure the overall strength of players from all Member
Associations participating in BWF sanctioned tournaments. The Member Associations are ranked based on
the results achieved by their players and their teams, the team earning highest number of raking points being
ranked the highest. The system used to rank the teams is explained below.

8.1 World Team Ranking points are awarded to a highest ranked player / pair from each Member
Association in each of the five Badminton events i.e. Men’s Singles (MS), Women’s Singles
(WS), Men’s Doubles (MD), Women’s Doubles (WD) and Mixed Doubles (XD) based on their

GCR
world ranking as per the recently published BWF World Ranking.

8.2 World Team Ranking points are also awarded for the Member Association’s finishing position in
the Team championships held in the last 52 weeks i.e. Thomas and Uber Cups, Sudirman Cup.

8.3 Where there is a pair competing together in the World Ranking from two different Member
Associations and one or both players are ranked highest for their respective Member Associations,
General Competition Regulations 12.6.1 shall be applied. A Member Association’s Team Ranking
points in such cases will include the eligible player’s points from the mixed member association
pair and the points from the next eligible highest ranked player to determine their notional ranking
points after applying the procedure in General Competition Regulations 12.6.1.

8.4 The world team ranking is published on a quarterly basis on first Thursday of April, July, October
and January. The complete World Team Ranking list is available on the BWF website.
www.bwfbadminton.org

8.5 The World Team Rankings are compiled from the points allocated in a 52 week period as shown in
the tables below:

Table A - Table showing points to be awarded to the Member Associations for the highest rank of the player /
pair of that country in the BWF World Ranking list.

Event Points to be awarded to the teams based on the BWF World Rank of the player / pair
Top 3 Top 10 Top 20 Top 50 Top 100 Top 200 Top 500 Below
WR WR WR WR WR WR WR WR 500
MS 1500 1200 1000 750 500 250 100 10
WS 1500 1200 1000 750 500 250 100 10
MD 1500 1200 1000 500 250 125 50 5
WD 1500 1200 1000 500 250 125 50 5
MX 1500 1200 1000 500 250 125 50 5

Table B – Table showing points to be awarded to the finalists in Thomas & Uber Cups based on their ranking
in each of the Competition

Team rank Thomas and Uber Cups

1 2500
2 2000
3/4 1500
5/8 1000
9/12 750

Table C - Table showing points to be awarded to the teams participating in the continental stage of Thomas and
Uber Cups in each continent based on their ranking in each Competition.

Rank Teams from Europe Rank Teams from Asia

1 MA qualified to finals 1 MA qualified to finals
Part III- Section 1B
Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

126
 GCR –World Ranking System

2 MA qualified to finals 2 MA qualified to finals

3 MA qualified to finals 3 MA qualified to finals
4 If MA not qualified to finals 4 If MA not qualified to finals
600 650
5-6 567.50 5 625
7 – 12 437.50 6 600
13-18 287.50 7-8 467.50
19- 24 137.50 9-12 387.50
25 - 26 37.50 13 -18 325.00
GCR

Rank Teams from Rank Teams from Africa Rank Teams from
Pan AM Oceania
1 MA qualified to 1 MA qualified to finals 1 MA qualified to finals
finals
2 400 2 300 2 300
3 375 3–4 287.50 3 275
4 350 5–8 187.50 4 250
5-6 312.5 9 - 11 100.00 4 225
7–8 262.5
9-10 212.50
11 175.00

Table D - Table showing points to be awarded to the teams participating in the Sudirman Cup based on their
ranking in the Competition.

Team rank Sudirman Cup

1 5000
2 4000

3000
5/8 2000
9/12 1500
13 1250
14 1225
15 1200
16 1175
17 1150
18 1125
19 1100
20 1075
21 1050
22 1025
23 1000
24 975
25 950
26 925
27 900
28 875
29 850
30 825
31 800
32 775
Part III- Section 1B
Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

127
 GCR –World Ranking System

33 750
34 725
35 700
36 675
37 650
38 625
39 600
40 575

GCR
41 550
42 525
43 500
44 475
45 450
46 425
47 400
48 375
49 350
50 325

9. Criteria for World Ranking Tournaments

9.1 Tournaments concluded within 52-week period complying with the following criteria shall be
included in the World Ranking:

9.1.1 Results of the latest tournaments.

9.1.2 Only one BWF World Championship.
9.1.3 Only one Continental Championship from each continent.
9.1.4 Not more than three tournaments within a country in the following way:

Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Superseries Premier Grand Grand International International Futures
Superseries Prix Gold Prix Challenge Series Series
Number of 2
0 0 1 0 0
tournaments Only in case of China
included in 2
0 0 0 1 0
WR in a 52 Only in case of China
week period 2
per Member 0 0 0 0 1
Only in case of China
Association 1 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 0 1 1
0 2 0 1 0 0
0 2 0 0 1 0
0 2 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 1 1 0

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

128
 GCR –World Ranking System

0 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1

9.2. Criteria for World Junior Ranking Tournaments

Tournaments concluded within 52-week period complying with the following criteria shall be included in the
World Junior Ranking:
GCR

9.2.1 Results of the latest tournaments.

9.2.2 Maximum two BWF Ranking tournaments (Refer 6.4).
9.2.3 Only one BWF World Junior Championship.
9.2.4 Only one Continental Junior Championship from each continent.
9.2.5 Only one tournament within a country.

9 Entries

9.1 The main competition must include Men’s Singles, Women’s Singles, Men’s Doubles, Women’s
Doubles and Mixed Doubles. However, the BWF reserves the right to accept tournaments which do
not comply with this requirement.

9.2 The number of entries in each event draw in the main competition must be at least:

Men’s Singles 8 Players

Women’s Singles 8 Players
Men’s Doubles 8 Pairs
Women’s Doubles 8 Pairs
Mixed Doubles 8 Pairs

9.3 In both World Rankings and World Junior Rankings if the minimum number of entries is not met
in an event, that event will not be included in the World Ranking or World Junior Ranking.
Example: if Women’s Singles had 6 entries only in the draw, but the other events had 10, Men’s
Singles, Men’s Doubles, Women’s Doubles and Mixed Doubles would be included, but not
Women’s Singles. If this happens the Events Committee also reserves the right not to accept the
tournament for World ranking or World Junior Ranking in the following year’.

10 Organisation

10.1 Separation of players between the qualifying and main draws to be according to the BWF
Competition Regulations.

10.2 Seeding to be according to the BWF Competition Regulations.

10.3 Vacancies in the draw to be filled according to the latest World Ranking and World Junior
Ranking as per timelines specified in Appendix8. (Refer Part III – Section 1B, Apppendix 8).

10.4 Draw to be made according to the BWF Competition Regulations.

10.5 Draw to be made as per timelines specified in Appendix8. (Refer Part III – Section 1B, Apppendix
8).

10.6 Referee for Superseries and World Grand Prix tournaments to be appointed by the BWF.

10.7 For level 4 and Junior tournaments, Continental Confederations to be responsible for making the
draw

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

129
 GCR –World Ranking System

12. Results

12.1 The draw must be e-mailed to BWF, via the stipulated software file, as soon as it has been made.

12.2 The results must be e-mailed to the BWF, using the stipulated software file on a daily basis showing
full player names, Member Associations who have entered the players and the BWF numbers where
players have them.

12.3 Final results must be e-mailed to the BWF within 24 hours of the conclusion of the event, using
the stipulated software file. In case of contingency, the print out of the updated draws must be faxed
within the stipulated time. Those not received will be excluded from the World Ranking.

GCR

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 6
Updated: 3 June 2011

130
 GCR – Adjusted and Notional Ranking

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 7

EXPLANATION OF ADJUSTED AND NOTIONAL RANKING

1. Notional ranking for seeding

1.1 Explanation:
GCR

1.1.1. When a pair is newly-formed (e.g. because of injury or a change in partnership), the new
pair may be composed of two strong players who would in all likelihood achieve a high
WR once they have played together for some time.

1.1.2. Notional ranking is a method to estimate the strength of such newly-formed pairs, and to
seed them when appropriate.

1.1.3. The pre-requisite for having notional ranking is that at least one player in the pair must
have played with different partners during the 52 weeks period prior the seeding date.

1.2 The process of computation of Notional Ranking points as stated in Regulation 12.6.1 is illustrated
as below.

A and X never played before:

A’s highest ranking is with B = 400 points in 4 tournaments = 100 points/tournament
X’s highest ranking is with Y = 300 points in 6 tournaments = 50 points/tournament

400 + 300 = 100 + 50 = 75

4 6 2
2
75 (points, as above) x 10 (tournaments) = 750
750 x 80% = 600

The flow chart explains the process used to calculate the ranking to be used seed players

Have A and B got a World no Did A and B played as a pair

Ranking as a pair within 52 weeks?
no
yes yes
Take World Ranking points then rework the
Have they played in 8 or more
points Take the highest World Ranking
tournaments according to that
If played in Multiply Result then points A has won with another
World Ranking?
Tournaments points by divide by partner and the highest World
2 10 5 Ranking points B has with
yes no 3 10 5 another partner
4 10 5
5 10 5 Divide the number of points won
Use World Ranking
6 10 6 by the number of tournaments
7 10 7 played in add these sums
together, divide by 2. Multiply
by 10 and calculate 80% of that
The resultant points are used to determine A
& B’s adjusted world ranking. A and B
eligible for seeding, if entries with world The resultant points are used to determine
ranking are less than the permissible seeding A and B’s notional ranking. A and B
places. eligible for seeding, if entries with world
ranking are less than the permissible
seeding places.

Part III- Section 1B

Appendix 7
Updated: 3rd June 2011

131
 GCR – Datelines for Tournaments

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 8

DATES LINES FOR TOURNAMENTS

Days from

GCR
Start of Grand Prix
tournament Super Series Gold Grand Prix Level 4
Week 0 Tuesday 0 Day tournament starts
Week 1 Tuesday 7 Draw
Withdrawal
Week 2 Sunday 9
without penalty
Week 2 Friday 11 Seeding
Ranking for
Main draw
Week 2 Thursday 12
seeding and
draw
Week 2 Tuesday 14 Draw Draw Draw
Week 3 Monday 15 M&Q
Withdrawal Withdrawal Withdrawal
Week 3 Sunday 16
without penalty without penalty without penalty
Week 3 Friday 18 Seeding Seeding Seeding
Ranking for
Ranking for Ranking for Ranking for
M&Q,
Main draw Main draw Main draw
Week 3 Thursday 19 qualifying draw
seeding and seeding and seeding and
seeding,
draw draw draw
Promotions
Week 3 Tuesday 21 Entries close

Week 4 Monday 22 M&Q M&Q

Ranking for Ranking for
M&Q, M&Q,
Week 4 Thursday 26 qualifying draw qualifying draw
seeding, seeding,
Promotions Promotions
Week 4 Tuesday 28 Entries close Entries close
Week 5 Monday 29 M&Q
Ranking for
M&Q,
Week 5 Thursday 33 qualifying draw
seeding,
Promotions
Week 5 Tuesday 35 Entries close

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 8
Updated: 3rd June 2011

132
 GCR – Code of Conduct

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 9

CODE OF CONDUCT FOR COACHES, TEAM AND TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

1. For the purpose of this Code, a coach / team official is any one taking the seat / role of a coach / team
GCR

official during a match.

2. Coaches / Team officials, during a match and / or while they are on or off the court,

2.1 shall be dressed appropriately and must remain seated in the designated chairs provided at each end
of the court behind his / her player / players except at the approved intervals;

2.2 must not coach when the shuttle is in play or in any manner distract opposing player or disrupt play,;

2.3 must not delay the game by coaching in any form;

2.4 in the regulation breaks during a match, must return to their designated chairs as soon as the Umpire
announces that there are twenty seconds remaining;

2.5 must not verbally abuse or intimidate in any form such as shouting making gesture, towards or in
any other way distract any spectator, tournament official, technical official, opposing coach or
opposing team official, or opposing player;

2.6 must not attempt to communicate in any way with opposing players or coaches or team officials;

2.7 must not make or attempt to make any unwelcome, abusive or intimidating physical contact in any
way with any spectator, tournament official, technical official, opposing players, coaches or team
officials.

2.8 must not bring the sport into disrepute through media comments relating to technical officials either
pre or post match that are personal in nature, imply bias, or question the integrity of the technical
officials in charge of the match or tournament.

3. Sanctions for Breach of Code of Conduct for Coaches and Team Officials & Technical Officials

3.1 If a Coach / Team Official

3.1.1 attempts to convey information to a player by any means while shuttle is in play (2.2)

the Umpire will call a ‘let’ (Law 14.2.5)..

3.2 If a Coach / Team Official

3.2.1 fails to remain seated while play is in progress (2.1);

3.2.2 Attempts to delay the game (2.3);

3.2.3 fails to return to the designated chair when the twenty second announcement is made (2.4);

3.2.4 in any way abuses, intimidates or distracts a Tournament Official, Technical Official,
another Coach / Team Official or an opposing player (2.5);

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 9
Updated: 3rd June 2011

133
 GCR – Code of Conduct

3.2.5 attempts to communicate in any way with opposing players or Coaches or Team Officials
during the course of a match (2.6);

• the Umpire will give a verbal warning to the offending Coach / Team Official.

3.3 If the same offence as listed in 3.2 is committed again or any offence as listed in 3.1 is committed,
the Umpire will call the Referee to the court. The Referee may remove the Coach / Team Official
from the playing area.

3.4 In the case of flagrant breaches of this Code of Conduct or on physical contact (2.7), the Umpire
will call the Referee to the court. The Referee will remove the offending Coach / Team Official

GCR
from the arena floor and may have the Coach / Team Official removed from the arena for the
remainder of the event or part thereof.

3.5 In case of action by the Referee as stated in 3.4 above, the place of such coach / team official shall
not be substituted by any other coach / team official during the match.

3.6 If BWF adjudge that there is a breach of 2.8 the Member Association of the official concerned will
be automatically fined US$500 and an explanation sought for the comments. If so decided by BWF
further punishment such as a ban from entering the arena floor for a stipulated period or number of
events may also be applied.

4. Persistent or flagrant breaches of this Code of Conduct will be reported to the BWF immediately by means
of the Referee’s Report Sheet or by way of a Incident Report Form depending upon severity of offence.

5. Wagers

5.1 Wagering anything of value in connection with a tournament in which one will be, or is working at, in
any accredited capacity may result in disciplinary proceedings including possible fines and suspension
against Coaches ,Team Officials and Technical Officials who are reported for such a breach’

6. Any coach, team or technical official who commits any offence defined in clauses 3 to 5 shall be deemed
to have breached this Code. Breaches of the Code constitute the basis for disciplinary action against the
coach, team or technical official. General Competition Regulations 31 Penalties applies.’ The disciplinary
process may lead to an offending Coach or Team Official being fined or banned from entering an arena or
an arena floor for a stipulated period or number of events.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 9
Updated: 3rd June 2011

134
 GCR Sanction Policy

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 10

BWF SANCTION POLICY

1. The Member Association must apply for and receive the sanction from the BWF for a tournament and
competitive matches as defined in General Competition Regulations 2.2 to 2.12. BWF may give special
GCR

dispensation line in under Exhibition matches.

2. The applications for the sanction in the prescribed format must reach the BWF within stipulated time specified
below:

Level Application Routing for Last day on which the For tournaments organized during the
sanction and date application for sanction to Olympic Qualifying period (OQP)
modification of a reach BWF
tournament
Level 4 On recommendation 4 months prior to the date of 4 months prior to the date of the
from the Continental commencement of the tournament but not later than 30th
Confederation tournament April of the year of commencement of
the OQP.
Level 3 Directly to BWF 9 months prior to the date of 9 months prior to the date of the
commencement of the tournament but not later than 30th
tournament April of the year of commencement of
the OQP.
Level 2 Directly to BWF Prior to the date notified by Prior to the date notified by the BWF
the BWF for that purpose. for that purpose, but not later than 30th
April of the year of commencement of
the OQP.
Level 1 Directly to BWF Prior to the date notified by Prior to the date notified by the BWF
the BWF for that purpose. for that purpose, but not later than 30th
April of the year of commencement of
the OQP.

E.g. In the Olympic Qualifying Period, in case of Level 4 tournaments: For tournaments starting after 1st
September 2011 onwards till 30th April 2012 tournament sanction must be obtained by 30th April 2011. For
tournaments organised from 1st May to 31st August, 2011, the 4 month’s application period will apply.

3. On commencement of the Olympic Qualifying Period, no additional tournament eligible for world ranking
points can be sanctioned during the Olympic Qualifying Period. There shall be no change in the status of the
sanctioned tournament except cancellation of a tournament during the OQP.

4. The BWF has power to refuse sanction of a proposed tournament or event. If sanction is refused, the reason
shall be notified to the Member Association applying.

5. The use of the title “Premier”, “Superseries” or “Grand Prix” in connection with one or more tournaments, as
well as individual tournament names, shall be subject to the BWF approval. Such tournaments shall then be
organized in accordance with the Regulations for the Superseries or Grand Prix, as applicable.

6. The use of the titles listed in the hierarchical structure for the BWF sanctioned tournaments shall be restricted
only to one tournament per country with the minimum prize money level listed in the table of Prize Money
Levels.

7. The use of the title “World” and “BWF” in connection with a badminton tournament shall be subject to the
BWF approval.

8. A calendar for the next two years shall be published on the BWF Website, and shall contain the names, dates
and level of all BWF-sanctioned tournaments.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 10
Updated: 3rd June 2011

135
 GCR Sanction Policy

9. Where a change of date is requested, the BWF can only exercise this power following full consultation with
each Member Association directly concerned and only in accordance with the principles of sanction, so there
will be no conflict with other sanctioned tournaments.

10. Application for sanction for new tournaments with less than the required notice in Regulation 2 will not be
considered except in special circumstances.

11. The calendar for the Premier and Superseries tournaments has been finalized for calendar years 2011-13.

10. The following shall be the limit of tournaments conducted in a country during a calendar year.

GCR
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Superseries Premier Grand Grand International International Futures
Superseries Prix Gold Prix Challenge Series Series

2
0 0 1 0 0
Only in case of China
2
0 0 0 1 0
Only in case of China
2
0 0 0 0 1
Only in case of China
1 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 1 0 0
Number of 1 0 1 0 1 0
tournaments 1 0 1 0 0 1
included in 1 0 0 1 1 0
WR in a 52 1 0 0 1 0 1
week period 1 0 0 0 1 1
per Member 0 2 0 1 0 0
Association 0 2 0 0 1 0
0 2 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1

However, the BWF reserves the right to accept additional tournaments under special circumstances.

Number of tournaments per continent:

Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Premier and Grand Prix Grand Prix International International Futures
Superseries Gold Challenge Series Series
Total number of
tournaments 12
No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit
included in a worldwide
Calendar year

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 10
Updated: 3rd June 2011

136
 GCR Sanction Policy

Responsible for sanction:

Level Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Category Premier Grand Prix Grand Prix International International Futures Series
and Gold Challenge Series
Superseries
Sanction by BWF on BWF on BWF on
BWF BWF BWF Recommendation Recommendation Recommendation
of CC of CC of CC
GCR

The CC shall have their own principals for recommendation for sanction of Level 4 tournaments.

The following principles will be used when sanctioning tournaments:

Basic Hierarchical Structure of Tournaments:

Invitational/exhibition
tournaments
To encourage:
• prize money
• creativity
would fit outside the WR
points structure, but
successful event organisers
could apply to hold Premier
and Super Series
tournaments if criteria were
met.

Prize Money Levels

Tournament Prize Money

Level 1 Thomas / Uber Cup, Sudirman Cup, World

Championships, Suhandinata Cup, Enopi Cup, World Determined by BWF
Senior Championships
Level 2 Superseries Masters Finals Minimum USD 500,000
Level 2 Superseries Premier Minimum USD 350,000 (in Year 2011 and 2012)
Minimum USD 400,000 (in 2013 )
Level 2 Superseries Minimum USD 200,000
Level 3 Grand Prix Gold Minimum USD 120,000
Level 3 Grand Prix Minimum USD 50,000
Level 4 International Challenge Minimum USD 15,000
Level 4 International Series Minimum USD 5,000
Level 4 Future Series Less than USD 5,000

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 10
Updated: 3rd June 2011

137
 GCR Sanction Policy

Principles of Sanctioning

Tournament Principle
Level 1 and 2 Ideally, three weeks (minimum two weeks) gap before and after a BWF tournament or
a run of two Superseries level tournaments
Levels 1, 2 and 3 Level 2 & 3 tournaments cannot be sanctioned with overlapping dates of Level 1
Level 2 and 3 Should try to avoid tournaments standing alone
Can have overlapping dates but shall be in different continents
Level 2 and 4 Can have overlapping dates as they should attract a different standard of player
Level 3 and 4 Should try to avoid tournaments standing alone

GCR
Can have overlapping dates.
Level 2 Superseries Should aim to have three weeks (minimum 2 weeks) before or after any other level 1
tournaments and such a gap after a pair of Superseries tournaments.

Ideally two level 2 tournaments should pair each other, however, there will be
occasions where a level 3 tournament will have to pair with a lone Superseries
tournament.

A level 3 tournament can be held the week before or after a Superseries tournament if
it is in the same continent.

There must be no more than 3 tournaments in a row of Level 1 to 3 in the same

continent.
Level 3 Can have overlapping dates in two different continents.
Grand Prix Gold
Grand Prix Can be sanctioned in connection with level 2 tournament.

No more than 3 tournaments in a row in one continent of Level 1 to 3.

Level 4 International Can have overlapping dates with level 2 and Level 3.
Challenge
Level 4 International Can have overlapping dates with level 2 and Level 3.
Series
Level 4 Futures Can be planned on any dates
Invitational and Cannot be sanctioned the week before and after any level 1, 2 and 3 tournaments
exhibition tournaments unless the tournament is in a different continent of the level 1, 2 and 3 tournament.
Special dispensation may be granted by BWF.

General
Tournaments stick to the same weekend each year (provided there are no clashes with big multi sports games or big
multi sports games will result in a restructuring of the whole calendar)
Priority for weekends given to higher prize money tournaments.
The tournament must be organised within the geographical territory of the applicant Member Association.
The continental championships shall not clash with the dates of Level 1 to 3 in any continent. They should be
conducted to the extent possible in the slot specifically reserved for that purpose.
No change to calendar three months before a tournament is due to take place. (General Competition Regulation 3)
If a Superseries tournament cancelled, the tournament sanctioned date is withdrawn.
Level 2 to 4 tournaments must start and finish in the same Calendar Week (Monday to Sunday).
Principles will be non-negotiable.
It will be mandatory that all Superseries organisers are present at meetings whenever called by the BWF to discuss
Superseries or calendar.

Part III - Section 1B

Appendix 10
Updated: 3rd June 2011

138
 Offences and Penalties

PART III

SECTION 1B

APPENDIX 11

OFFENCES AND PENALTIES

Offence Nature of penalty Incidence of Penalty Amount

GCR

Withdrawal from any BWF sanctioned Additional penalty For third withdrawal US$ 1,000
tournament for three or more times in six over and above
calendar months including breach of Players normal withdrawal And every subsequent US$ 500
Code of Conduct – fees withdrawal
3.1 – Late Withdrawal &4.4.2 – Dress
violations
Breach of Players Code of Conduct 3.2 - For first incidence US$ 250
Playing another Tournament.
Having entered and been accepted into either And every subsequent US$ 500
the qualifying or main draw of a BWF incidence
sanctioned tournament and playing in another
tournament during the period of that
tournament.
Breach of Players Code of Conduct 3.3 - For first incidence US$ 250
Playing after declaring non-availability due to
injury. And every subsequent US$ 500
Withdrawing from a future tournament due to incidence
injury or illness and playing in any Badminton
tournament during the period between the
notification of injury/illness and the said
tournament from which the player has
withdrawn
Breach of Players Code of Conduct 3.4 -early For first incidence US$ 250
departure from tournament.
Making travel arrangements which would And every subsequent US$ 500
preclude the player from participation in incidence
scheduled matches or interfere with their
commitment to attend dope testing
Breach of Players Code of Conduct 4.8 - For first incidence US$ 250
Failure to fulfil media obligations
• Failing to attend any pre-tournament media And every subsequent US$ 500
conference organised a day prior to their incidence
first scheduled match
• Failure to give on-court interviews for
television immediately after a match
whether the match has been won or lost.
• Failing to attend any post match media
conference (unless injured or physically
unable to appear or doing so would
interfere with preparation for the players
next match)
• Failure to assist with the promotion of a
tournament and the game in general. A
player must be willing to participate on
request in at least one appropriate activity
of not more than one hour’s duration (such
as autograph signing, ‘meet the public’
question and answer session etc.

Part III, Section 1B

Appendix 11
Updated: 3rd June 2011

139
 Offences and Penalties

Offence Nature of penalty Incidence of Penalty Amount

Breach of Players Code of Conduct 4.9 - For first incidence US$ 250
Violating ceremony protocol
When participating in the finals of a And every subsequent US$ 500
tournament, not participating in the final incidence
ceremonies directly after the match or not
wearing the style of clothing (eg tracksuit,
uniform) requested by the organisers.
Breach of Players Code of Conduct 4.3 - For first incidence US$ 250

GCR
Failure to complete a match
Failing to complete a match in progress And every subsequent US$ 500
unless reasonably unable to do so. incidence
Breach of Players Code of Conduct 4.4 - For first incidence US$ 250
late arrival for a match
Arriving late for a match resulting in No And every subsequent US$ 500
show incidence
A yellow card in any BWF sanctioned For third yellow card US$ 500
tournament in a calendar year
And every subsequent US$ 250
yellow card
Failure to comply with GCR 19 to 21. For every incidence US$ 250

Breach of Coaches Code of Conduct For first incidence US$ 250

Coaches/Team officials must not coach
when the shuttle is in play or in any And every subsequent US$ 500
manner distract opposing player or disrupt incidence
play.

3.2.1 fails to remain seated while play is in

progress (2.1),

3.2.2 attempts to delay the game (2.3),

3.2.3 fails to return to chair when 20

second announcement is made (2.4),

3.2.4 in any way abuses, intimidates or

distracts a tournament official, technical
official, another Coach/Team official or an
opposing player (2.5),

3.2.5 attempts to communicate in any way

with opposing players or Coaches or Team
officials during the course of a match (2.6).

Code of Conduct - Coaches & Team

Officials and Technical officials - Anti
Betting.
Breach of regulations 2.8 by media
comments to bring the sport to disrepute
A red card in any BWF sanctioned For red card US$ 500
tournament
Failure to attend a media conference when For every default US$ 250
called upon.
Failure to attend a meeting by Referee and For every default US$ 250
/ or Tournament Management
Withdrawal of 10 or more players from For every default US$ 1000
any one tournament

Part III, Section 1B

Appendix 11
Updated: 3rd June 2011

140
 Offences and Penalties

Offence Nature of penalty Incidence of Penalty Amount

Withdrawal of entire team without Penalty in addition to For every default US$ 1,000
attending Managers’ Meeting and / or the withdrawal fees
discussing the matter with the Committee and penalty payable by
of Management each player.
Will automatically
initiate the disciplinary
proceedings.
Non-submission of the final results on day For every default US$ 250
GCR

of conclusion of the tournament

Part III, Section 1B

Appendix 11
Updated: 3rd June 2011

141
 Disciplinary Regulations

PART III

SECTION 2

DISCIPLINARY REGULATIONS

1. APPLICABILITY

1.1 These Regulations are created by the BWF to control how disciplinary action can be instituted in
accordance with Rules 16 and 17, and one or more of Law 16 and Competition Regulations 25, 29,
31, and 32.

1.2 The term “respondent” in these Regulations shall refer to the player, competition official, or other
person who is alleged to have committed the offence in question. If a Member Association is

DisCipLinaRy
alleged to have committed the offence, “respondent” shall refer to the representative designated by
the Member Association to represent it in the proceedings.

ReG
2. DISCIPLINARY COMMITTEE

2.1 Council has power to appoint a standing Disciplinary Committee to deal with disciplinary matters as
they arise or to appoint a specific Disciplinary Committee to deal with a particular alleged offence.

2.2 A Disciplinary Committee shall comprise the Chair, who will conduct any meeting of the
Committee, and two other members. All members of a Disciplinary Committee must be members
of Council. Two members must be present at a meeting to form a quorum, and the Chair shall have
a casting vote in the case of equality.

2.3 A member of a Disciplinary Committee may not be a witness or give written evidence in a
particular case, and must not have been an official at a tournament where an alleged offence took
place, or a witness to the alleged offence.

3. DISCIPLINARY PROCESS

3.1 It shall be permissible to consider an alleged offence using only written reports and evidence. In
such cases, the Disciplinary Committee must take its decision based only on the written reports and
evidence, and any submission from the respondent or the respondent’s Member Association.
However, alleged offences against the dope-testing regulations must be heard at a meeting to which
the respondent concerned is invited.

3.2 Any respondent who is alleged to have committed an offence must be informed in writing via their
Member Association of the fact that a Disciplinary Committee is considering the alleged offence,
and outlining the nature of the evidence available.

3.3 For all but hearings for offences against the dope-testing regulations, copies of any written evidence
or reports shall be sent with the letter about the alleged offence. This is to allow the respondent to
be aware of the evidence and to permit a written submission to be made stating any facts and
circumstances from the respondent’s viewpoint, and/or the Member Association’s viewpoint.

3.4 When a respondent attends a Disciplinary Committee meeting, the respondent shall be entitled to be
accompanied by an adviser or representative, together with an interpreter if desired, as meetings will
be conducted in English, the official BWF language.

3.5 Timescale and venue

3.5.1 Any disciplinary Committee meeting shall be convened as quickly as is practicable

following receipt of evidence of misconduct.

Part III – Section 2

Updated: 3rd December, 2010

142
 Disciplinary Regulations

3.5.2 The venue for a Disciplinary Committee meeting shall be set by the BWF. The venue shall
normally be held in the same continent as the respondent’s main residence, but this shall be
entirely at the BWF’s discretion.

3.6 At a Disciplinary Committee meeting, any expenses of a respondent, any adviser or

representative,and interpreter, together with the expenses of any witnesses called by the respondent
must be met by the respondent or the respondent’s Member Association.

Expenses of the meeting room, administration and travel and subsistence of the committee and any
persons requested to attend by the BWF shall be met by the BWF.

3.7 A Disciplinary Committee meeting shall be conducted without formal rules of procedure, but
adhering to the following general principles:

3.7.1 The Chair is in charge of the meeting and any rulings from the Chair are binding.
DisCipLinaRy

3.7.2 The only people who may be present at the meeting are the Committee, a Minute Secretary,
ReG

the respondent, the respondent’s adviser or representative, an interpreter, a representative

of the respondent’s Member Association, a person introducing the evidence to substantiate
the alleged offence, and a particular witness. Additional observers without the right of
speaking may be present at the discretion of the Chair.

3.7.3 The Chair shall start the meeting by introducing those present and explaining each person’s
role.

3.7.4 A person introducing the evidence (who must not be a member of the Disciplinary
Committee) shall first of all summarise the case against the respondent and shall then
introduce the evidence available. In the case of written evidence, the respondent through
his/her Member Association shall be sent a copy a reasonable time in advance of the
meeting.

3.7.5 For each piece of evidence, the respondent, the respondent’s adviser or representative, and
the representative of the respondent’s Member Association shall have the right to ask
questions.

3.7.6 If a witness or expert is called, questions may be asked of the witness by the respondent,
the respondent’s adviser or representative, and the representative of the respondent’s
Member Association.

3.7.7 After the evidence against the respondent has been presented, the respondent or the
respondent’s adviser or representative may introduce additional evidence or call witnesses
or experts.

3.7.8 Any member of the Disciplinary Committee may ask questions of any witness.

3.7.9 After all evidence and witnesses have been heard, the respondent or the respondent’s
adviser or representative will be given an opportunity to summarise the respondent’s point
of view.

3.7.10 The Committee shall consider their decision with no other person present.

3.7.11 If the Committee decision is that the respondent is found guilty of the alleged offence then,
before deciding on any penalty, the respondent or the respondent’s adviser or
representative shall be given the opportunity to make a statement.

3.7.12 With no other person present, the Committee shall consider what penalty, if any, is to be
applied, and shall then announce it.

3.7.13 The decision (guilty or not, and any penalty applied) shall be confirmed in writing as soon
as possible after the meeting to the respondent through the respondent’s Member
Association.

Part III – Section 2

Updated: 3rd December, 2010

143
 Disciplinary Regulations

3.7.14 The fact that a Disciplinary Committee meeting is being held, the name of the respondent,
and the proceedings themselves shall normally be kept confidential by the BWF. This
shall not preclude the BWF from confirming outline details if it is evident that the media
are aware of the meeting. The decision of the Committee shall be publicised at the BWF’s
discretion.

4. APPEALS

4.1 The respondent (or the respondent’s Member Association) may appeal against a Disciplinary
Committee decision.

4.2 An appeal will only be valid if:

4.2.1 it is made in writing within 14 days of the Disciplinary Committee decision;

DisCipLinaRy
4.2.2 it states the grounds for the appeal; and

ReG
4.2.3 it is accompanied by a deposit of US $100, which will not be returned if the appeal is
considered trivial or frivolous by the Appeal Committee.

4.3 Council shall appoint an Appeal Committee to deal with each specific appeal. The Appeal
Committee shall consist of three members, none of whom must have been present in any capacity at
any initial Disciplinary Committee that dealt with the particular case.

4.4 The general procedure of the Appeal Committee shall follow that of a Disciplinary Committee.

4.5 An Appeal Committee can reverse a finding of guilt, or can vary the penalty imposed by the original
Disciplinary Committee. Variation of a penalty can be to increase or decrease any element of the
penalty, as the Appeal Committee at its sole discretion sees fit.

Part III – Section 2

Updated: 3rd December, 2010

144
 Thomas and Uber Cups

PART III

SECTION 3

REGULATIONS FOR THE THOMAS AND UBER CUPS

1. DEFINITION

The Competition for the Thomas Cup shall be the ‘Men’s Team World Badminton Championship’, and the
Competition for the Uber Cup shall be the ‘Women’s Team World Badminton Championship’. Every
Member Association (Rule 2.1) shall be entitled to take part subject to the conditions of Regulation 4.

2. GENERAL ORGANISATION

2.1 The Competitions shall be conducted in accordance with the Laws of Badminton. The General
Competition Regulations will apply except where specific provisions are contained in these
Regulations. Where there is any conflict or apparent conflict, the Regulations for the Thomas and
Uber Cups shall take precedence.

2.2 Each Competition shall be managed by the BWF, who shall appoint a Committee of Management
for the purpose. The Committee of Management shall be of at least three persons, one member of
the BWF Events Committee, one from the host Member Association and the Referee. The
BwF Team

Committee of Management shall have power to co-opt persons and also to delegate any of the duties
evenTs

to a sub-Committee.

3. METHOD OF COMPETITION

3.1 The two Competitions shall be held together every two years. The Continental Stage shall be
organised within a period from 1 January to 28th February and the Final Stage from 1 May to 30
June. (Annexure I).

3.2 The Competition shall be held in two stages – a continental stage and the final stage, known as the
“Thomas and Uber Cup Finals”.

3.3 Continental stage format

3.3.1 Each Continental Confederation shall organise a Continental stage tournament to determine
the required number of qualifiers from their continent.

3.3.2 Each Continental Confederation shall communicate to the BWF on the day of completion
of the Continental Stage Competition a list of teams in ranking order. This list shall
include one more team than the number of places at the Thomas and Uber Cup Finals
allocated (see Regulation 3.4.2) to the respective Continental Confederation.

3.3.3 The seeding and draw process as described in 3.4 shall be implemented for the Continental
Stage tournament in the similar manner.

3.4 Final stage format

3.4.1 The final stage shall be contested by 12 teams which includes

No. Of teams Description / Continent
One Trophy holder
One Host Member Association
Three Asia
Three Europe
One Oceania
One Africa
One PanAm
One additional, Higher ranked team between the next highest ranked teams from Asia and
if available Europe based on the Ranking method as stated in Regulation 3.4.5

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

145
 Thomas and Uber Cups

3.4.2 If the trophy holder is the host Member Association, then Badminton Asia and Badminton
Europe each will have four teams in the Competition
.
3.4.3 The final stage shall be played initially in groups, followed by a knockout draw.

3.4.4 Initially, the twelve teams shall play in four groups of three, where all teams in a given
group play each other. A final overall ranking order for each group shall be achieved (see
diagram below).

Group A Group B Group C Group D

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3

3.4.5 Seeding:

3.4.5.1 The participating teams will be seeded based on the overall strength of the team.

3.4.5.2 The overall strength of the team will be determined based on the World Ranking
list as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.4.5.3 Total ranking points of highest ranked three singles players and two doubles pairs

BwF Team
from each country shall be compared to determine the overall strength of the

evenTs
team. Where no world ranking is available the ranking points will be taken as
zero.

3.4.5.4 On such determination, all the teams will be ranked in their order of strength.

3.4.6 Draw:

3.4.6.1 The top two ranked teams shall be dealt with as follows:

a) No. 1 placed at the top of Group A

b) No. 2 placed at the top of Group D

3.4.6.2 The other ranked teams shall be dealt with as follows:

a) No. 3 and 4 drawn by lot at the top of Groups B and C.

b) No. 5 to 8 drawn by lot at the second position of the groups.
c) No. 9 to 12 drawn by lot at the third position of the groups.

3.4.7 The draw to allocate teams to the groups shall be conducted in a manner determined by the
Committee of Management.

3.5 In all group play, the team ranking order shall be established in accordance with General
Competition Regulation 16:

3.6 A match conceded due to illness, injury, or other unavoidable hindrance shall count as if completed
without the conceding side scoring another point.

3.7 All results of any team that has been disqualified or withdraws before completing the group matches
shall be entirely deleted.

3.8 Draw for the Knock-out stage:

3.8.1 The draw for the knock-out stage of the Competition shall be done immediately after the last
match of the group play off is over.

3.8.2 Two top ranked teams from each group will qualify for this stage.

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

146
 Thomas and Uber Cups

3.8.3 The top teams of each group will be ranked in order of their strength in the manner described
in Regulation 3.4.6, based on the most recently published World Ranking immediately
preceding the date of the draw. These teams will be considered as Seed No. 1 to 4 for the
draw.

3.8.4 The 4 seeded teams will be placed in the draw as per General Competition Regulation 12.
Remaining teams will be placed in the draw by lot.

4. ENTRIES

4.1 Continental entries

4.1.1 Each Continental Confederation may promulgate qualification standards for entry of teams
and nomination of players

4.1.2 For each Continental stage tournament, a closing date for entries shall be published by the
Continental Confederation concerned.

4.1.3 Only entries reaching the Continental Confederations by the closing date shall be accepted.

4.1.4 Each Member Association is responsible for determining the criteria and method of
BwF Team

selecting players for entry, and for entering players, to represent their Association.
evenTs

4.1.5 Member Associations shall enter by stating the Competition(s) it is desired to enter (ie
Thomas and/or Uber Cups).

4.2 Rejection of entries

The Committee of Management shall have power to reject the entry of any Member Association:

4.2.1 which contains a condition unresolved at the time of the draw;

4.2.2 whose entry is considered against the interest of the Competition or the game; or

4.2.3 which is in arrears in payment of subscriptions or which has any other debts to the BWF.

5. FINAL STAGE DRAW

5.1 The final stage draw, at which each competing Member Association may be represented, shall be
made as per the date lines as specified in the Annexure I.

5.2 Full details of the draw shall be notified forthwith to each competing Member Association.

5.3 Any team withdrawing from the Competition or defaulting after the draw has been made shall:

5.3.1 immediately give a written explanation to the Chief Operating Officer; and

5.3.2 render themselves liable to such action as shall be decided by BWF.

6. RIGHTS

All commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of like nature at all venues,
and other rights associated primarily with the Competitions shall belong exclusively to the BWF. In
determining the financial arrangements with the Continental Confederations, and the Member Association
organising the final stage, the BWF may grant licences and concessions in respect of such rights, including
the direct grant of all or part of such rights to the Continental Confederations, the Member Association
organising the final stage and/or commercial organisations.

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

147
 Thomas and Uber Cups

7. FINANCE

7.1 The BWF shall determine the financial arrangements at the final stage venue.

7.2 The Continental Confederation shall determine the financial arrangements at their respective
continental stage venue.

7.3 The BWF may require the promoting Member Association at the final stage venue to submit a
proper statement of accounts.

7.4 Every Member Association taking part in the Competitions shall be responsible for all expenses
incurred by its players and officials including travel, hotel accommodation and other expenses.

7.5 The BWF shall advise all competing Member Associations of any payments to be made in
accordance with the Competitions or any other financial matters and any conditions pertaining
thereto.

8. APPOINTMENT OF REFEREE

8.1 The BWF shall:

BwF Team
8.1.1 appoint a Referee and deputy Referee(s) for the final stage venue; and

evenTs
8.1.2 approve the Referee and deputy Referee(s) for each continental stage venue.

8.2 The additional responsibilities of the Referee in this Competition are:

8.2.1 to ensure that the stipulated procedure and order of play is adhered to and that all teams
comply with the Regulations for play at the venue;

8.2.2 to make the final decision on any matter upon appeal being made by a Team Manager; and

8.2.3 to confer with the Team Managers and make it known that the Referee is permitted to
suspend or abandon play if the spirit of competition is not as it should be.

8.3 There shall be no appeal against the decision of the Referee.

9. QUALIFICATION OF PLAYERS

Players shall be qualified to represent a Member Association in accordance with General Competition
Regulation 8.

10. TEAM MANAGER

10.1 Each Member Association concerned shall appoint a manager of its team within the stipulated time
as per Annexure I.

10.2 In default of such appointment, a team shall forthwith choose its own manager.

10.3 As soon as appointed, the name of the manager shall be notified to the Referee.

10.4 From the time of arrival at the venue, the manager shall assume all administrative and other
responsibilities on behalf of the Member Association and team concerned in connection with the
conduct of the Competition.

10.5 The Team Manager shall attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee and / or Committee of
Management. (Refer Part III Section 1B - GCR – Regulation 31.2).

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

148
 Thomas and Uber Cups

11. CONSTITUTION OF TIES AND TEAMS

11.1 Each tie shall be decided by the results of

First Singles;
Second Singles;
Third Singles;
First Doubles; and
Second Doubles.
11.2

11.2.1 In group play, all five matches of each tie shall be played.
11.2.2 In non-group play, each tie shall be stopped when the tie is decided.

11.3 In singles, each team shall play its three players according to the order as determined by Regulation
13.2.

11.4 In doubles, each team shall play its two pairs according to the order as determined by Regulation
13.2.

11.5 No player shall play in more than one singles and one doubles match.
BwF Team
evenTs

12. NOMINATION OF TEAMS

12.1 Each competing Member Association is responsible for determining the criteria and method of
selecting players for nomination, and for nominating players, to represent its Association.

12.2 Each competing Member Association shall nominate to the BWF not fewer than four players and
not more than ten players, from whom its team will be selected for a tie, within the stipulated time
as per Annexure I.

12.3 Ranking Order

12.3.1 All players nominated shall be listed in order consistent with current World Rankings in
singles. Players with no World Ranking shall be placed in the ranking order according to
current singles strength.

12.3.2 Pairings with no World Ranking shall be placed in the ranking order according to current
doubles strength. To arrive at a final ranking order, the Referee will use the procedures in
General Competition Regulations 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 where they apply’

4 nominated players : the 6 possible pairings

5 nominated players : the 10 possible pairings
6 nominated players : the 15 possible pairings
7, 8, 9 or 10 players : the 21 possible or most probable pairings

Pairings with no World Ranking shall be placed in the ranking order according to current
doubles strength. To arrive at a final ranking order, the Referee will use the procedures in
General Competition Regulations 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 where they apply.

12.3.3 The Referee has discretion to amend the ranking order for players or pairings without a
world ranking.

12.4 Nomination of team for a tie

12.4.1 Each manager shall hand to the Referee within stipulated time fixed (Annexure I) before
the start of any tie the composition of the team for each tie in the order as stated in
Regulation 11.1.

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

149
 Thomas and Uber Cups

12.4.2 These players and pairings shall be selected from those previously nominated and be in the
order as ranked (Regulation 12.1 to 12.3). The ranking order of any doubles pairing not
previously listed shall be at the discretion of the Referee, who will use General
Competition Regulations 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 where they apply.

12.5 The use of General Competition Regulations 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 in Regulation 13 shall apply to pairs
regardless of whether or not they competed together during the ranking period.

13. ORDER OF PLAY

13.1 There are eight permissible orders of play:

13.1.1 First singles - first doubles - second singles - second doubles - third singles

13.1.2 First singles - second doubles - second singles - first doubles - third singles

13.1.3 First singles - second singles - first doubles - third singles - second doubles

13.1.4 First singles - second singles - second doubles - third singles - first doubles

13.1.5 First singles - second singles - third singles - first doubles - second doubles

BwF Team
evenTs
13.1.6 First singles - second singles - third singles - second doubles - first doubles

13.1.7 First singles - first doubles - second singles - third singles -second doubles

13.1.8 First singles - second doubles - second singles - third singles - first doubles

13.2 Determining order of play

13.2.1 Orders of play 13.1.1 to 13.1.8 will be considered in turn and the first order of play will be
used which has no player playing in two consecutive matches or playing doubles before
singles.

13.2.2 If all eight orders of play, 13.1.1 to 13.1.8 result in a player playing in two consecutive
matches or playing doubles before singles, order of play 13.1.5 will be used.

13.3 Any player participating in two matches is entitled to a minimum interval of 30 minutes between
them.

14. SUBSTITUTIONS

14.1 The Referee may sanction a substitute or substitutes for a player who, in the opinion of the Referee,
is incapacitated by illness, accident or other unavoidable hindrance provided that:

14.1.1 the team that plays after the substitution conforms to the initially-nominated ranking order
for singles and doubles;

14.1.2 any substitute player/pair is lower ranked than the player/pair being replaced (if necessary
re-ordering the remaining player/pairs);

14.1.3 for a substitution after the first match of the tie has started due any illness or injury has been
sustained since the teams were nominated, any pair unaffected by the need for substitution
is left unchanged.

14.2 A substituted player shall not take part in that tie.

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

150
 Thomas and Uber Cups

15. DISQUALIFICATION

15.1 The Referee may disqualify any team which fails to report its arrival for the Competition within
stipulated time as stated in Annexure I or such other period as may have previously been agreed
with the Referee.

15.2 The Referee has power to disqualify any team which fails to carry out its required programme, or
whose team manager fails to attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee.

15.3 The Referee shall have power to disqualify at any stage of the Competition:

15.3.1 any team which has failed to carry out its obligations or breaches the Rules and Regulations
of the BWF; or

15.3.2 a player, or a team that includes a player, breaching the Anti-Doping Regulations.

16. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

BWF has power on behalf of the BWF to make and publish amendments to the Thomas & Uber Cup
Regulations.
BwF Team
evenTs

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

151
 Thomas and Uber Cups

Annexure I

Timelines for Thomas & Uber Cups

Date line Action Responsibility Regulation

Reference
1 January Appointment of Committee of Management. BWF 2.2
1 January Appointment of Referee and Deputy Referees BWF 8.1.1
for Final Stage
1 January Approve Referee and Deputy Referees for BWF 8.1.2
Continental Stage
1 January to 28 February Conduct of Continental Stage Competition Continental 3.3
Confederations
On date of completion of Intimation of Results and names of teams of Continental 3.3.2
Continental Stage teams in Ranking Order to BWF Confederations
Competition
1st Thursday of March Seeding Date - World Ranking Date for the BWF 5.1
purpose of deciding the Seeding for Group
Play
Immediately following the BWF will decide the date of the draw BWF 5.1
seeding date
1 May to 30 June Conduct of Final Stage Competition BWF 3.4

BwF Team
Thursday immediately Use World Ranking for the deciding the BWF 3.8.3

evenTs
preceding the date of Knock- strength of the teams qualified for Knock-out
out stage draw stage
Decide the Seeding of the qualified team for BWF 3.8.4
On completion of Group Play
Knock-out stage
of the Competitions
Conduct the Draw for Knock-out stage BWF 3.8.3
Thursday immediately Use World Ranking for the deciding the Member 13
preceding to 14 days prior to ranking order of the singles and doubles Associations
the start of Finals Stage players.
Competition
14 days prior to the start of Nominate Team players Member 13.2 and
Finals Stage Competition Associations 13.3
14 days prior to the start of Appointment of Manger by participating Member 10.1
Finals Stage Competition Teams Associations
48 hours prior to first Arrival of participating Teams Member 15.1
schedule tie Associations
4 hours prior to the time fixed Hand over the composition of the team for that Team Manager 12.4.1
for a tie or such other period time
as decreed by the Referee

Part III - Section 3

Thomas and Uber Cups
Updated: 3rd June 2011

152
 Sudirman Cup

PART III

SECTION 4

REGULATIONS FOR THE SUDIRMAN CUP

1. DEFINITION

The Competition for the Sudirman Cup shall be the ‘World Mixed Team Championships’ and every
Member Association (Rule 2.1) affiliated to the BWF shall be entitled to take part, subject to the
conditions of General Competition Regulations 5 and 6.

2. GENERAL ORGANISATION

2.1 The Competition shall be conducted in accordance with the Laws of Badminton. The General
competition regulations will apply except where specific provisions are contained in these
Regulations. Where there is any conflict or apparent conflict, the Regulations for the Sudirman Cup
shall take precedence.

2.2 Each Competition shall be managed by the BWF which shall appoint a Committee of Management
BwF Team

for the purpose. The Committee of Management shall be of at least three persons, one member of
evenTs

the BWF Events Committee, one from the host Member Association and the Referee. The
Committee of Management shall have power to co-opt other persons and also to delegate any of the
duties to a Sub-committee.

3. METHOD OF COMPETITION

3.1 Teams shall play in sub-groups where all teams play each other. A final overall ranking order shall
be achieved.

3.2 The group of the top twelve ranked teams shall play in four sub-groups of three.

3.3 As far as possible the remaining teams shall play in groups of eight, organised in two sub-groups of
four. Some variation shall be allowed in the sizes of groups and sub-groups amongst the lowest-
ranked teams to accommodate the number of entries.

3.4 Groups for successive competitions

The Committee of Management shall determine the groups for successive competitions as follows:

3.4.1 The participating teams will be ranked based on the overall strength of the team.

3.4.2 The overall strength of the team will be determined based on the World Ranking list as
stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.4.3 Total ranking points of highest ranked one men’s singles player, one women’s singles
player, one men’s doubles pair, one women’s doubles pair and one mixed doubles pair from
each country shall be compared to determine the overall strength of the team. Where no
world ranking is available the ranking points will be taken as zero.

3.4.3.1 World ranking points of Mixed Nationality pairs ranking points shall not be
included in the team ranking .

3.4.3.2 General competitions regulations 12.6.1 shall be applied for the next ranked pair
of the same nationality in replacement of a Mixed nationality pair in the world ranking.

3.4.4 On such determination, all the teams will be ranked in their order of strength.

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

153
 Sudirman Cup

3.4.5 The top twelve teams play in group one, the next eight in group two, the next eight in group
three and so on.

3.5 Ranking order in the sub-groups

In all group play, the team ranking order shall be established in accordance with General
Competition Regulation 16.

3.6 A match conceded due to illness, injury, or other unavoidable hindrance shall count as if completed
without the conceding side scoring another point.

3.7 All results of any team that has been disqualified or withdraws before completing the group matches
shall be entirely deleted.

3.8 Ranking and play-offs in the top group

3.8.1 The top group shall play in two stages - group play off and knock-out stage.

3.8.2 Two top ranked teams from each sub-group will qualify for knock-out stage.

3.8.3 The result of the knock-out stage shall decide the overall winner and runner-up.

BwF Team
3.8.4 The losing semi-finalist teams of the knock-out stage shall be ranked joint third.

evenTs
3.8.5 The losing quarter-finalist teams of the knock-out stage shall be ranked joint fifth.

3.8.6 The teams finishing third in each sub-group shall be ranked joint ninth.

3.8.7 There shall be no play-offs in the top group to determine the team rankings.

3.9 Ranking and play-offs in other groups

3.9.1 The winning teams in each sub-group shall play each other to determine the first and
second ranked teams in that group.

3.9.2 The teams finishing second in each sub-group shall play each other to determine the third
and fourth ranked teams in that group.

3.9.3 The teams finishing third in each sub-group shall play each other to determine the fifth and
sixth ranked teams in that group.

3.9.4 The teams finishing bottom in each sub-group shall play each other to determine the
seventh and eighth ranked teams in that group.

4. ENTRIES

4.1 The BWF shall send to all Member Associations an invitation to compete as stated in the timelines
in Annexure I.

4.2 Entries must be received by the BWF not later than the closing date notified in the invitation to
compete (Annexure I).

4.3 Only entries reaching the BWF by the closing date shall be accepted.

4.4 Each Member Association may promulgate qualification standards for entry of teams and
nomination of players

4.5 The Committee of Management shall have power to reject the entry of any Member Association:

4.5.1 which contains a condition unresolved at the time entries close;

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

154
 Sudirman Cup

4.5.2 whose entry is considered against the interest of the Competition or the game; or

4.5.3 which is in arrears in payment of subscriptions or which has any other debts to the BWF.

5. DRAW

5.1 The group play off stage draws for all groups, at which each competing Member Association may
be represented, shall be made as per the timelines as specified in the Annexure I.

Group Play off Stage

5.2 Draw for Group One

5.2.1 The top two ranked teams in that group shall be dealt with as follows:

a) No. 1 placed at the top of Sub-group A

b) No. 2 placed at the top of Sub-group D

5.2.2 The other ranked teams shall be dealt with as follows:

c) No. 3 and 4 drawn by lot at the top of Sub-groups B and C.

BwF Team

d) No. 5 to 8 drawn by lot at the second position of the sub-groups.

evenTs

e) No. 9 to 12 drawn by lot at the third position of the sub-groups.

5.3 Draw for Group Two onwards

5.3.1 The top two ranked teams in that group shall be dealt with as follows:

a) No. 1 placed at the top of Sub-group A

b) No. 2 placed at the top of Sub-group B

5.3.2 The other ranked teams shall be dealt with as follows:

c) No. 3 and 4 drawn by lot at the second position of the sub-groups.

d) No. 5 and 6 drawn by lot at the third position of the sub-group.
e) No. 7 and 8 drawn by lot at the fourth position of the sub-groups.

Knock-out Stage:

5.4 The draw for the knock-out stage of the Competition for shall be done immediately after the last
match of the group play off is over.

5.5 The top teams of each sub-group will be ranked in order of their strength in the manner described in
Regulation 3.4 based on the most recently published World Ranking immediately preceding the date
of the draw. These teams will be considered as Seed No. 1 to 4 for the draw.

5.6 The 4 seeded teams will be placed in the draw as per General Competition Regulation 12.
Remaining teams will be placed in the draw by lot.

5.7 Full details of the draw at every stage shall be notified forthwith to each competing Member
Association.

5.8 Any team withdrawing from the Competition or defaulting after the draw has been made shall:

5.8.1 immediately give a written explanation to the Chief Operating Officer; and

5.8.2 render themselves liable to such action as shall be decided by BWF.

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

155
 Sudirman Cup

6. RIGHTS

All commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of like nature at all venues,
and other rights associated primarily with the event shall belong exclusively to the BWF. In determining
the financial arrangements at each venue with the organising Member Association, the BWF may grant
licences and concessions in respect of such rights, including the direct grant of all or part of such rights to
the organising Member Association and / or commercial organisations.

7. FINANCE

7.1 BWF shall allocate responsibility for hosting the Competition on organisational, financial and
commercial terms and conditions it agrees with the hosting Member Association.

7.2 The BWF may require the promoting Member Association at the final stage venue to submit a
proper statement of accounts.

7.3 The BWF shall be entitled to make grants to Member Associations who enter teams in the Sudirman
Cup Competition on such terms and conditions as the BWF may decide.

7.4 Every Member Association taking part in the Sudirman Cup Competition shall be responsible for all
expenses incurred by its players and officials including travel, hotel accommodation and other

BwF Team
expenses.

evenTs
7.5 The BWF shall advise all competing Member Associations of any payments to be made in
accordance with the Competitions or any other financial matters and any conditions pertaining
thereto.

8. APPOINTMENT OF REFEREE

8.1 BWF shall appoint a Referee and Deputy Referee(s) for the Competition.

8.2 The additional responsibilities of the Referee in this Competition are:

8.2.1 to ensure that the stipulated procedure and order of play is adhered to and that all teams
comply with the Regulations for play at the venue;

8.2.2 to make the final decision on any matter upon appeal being made by a Team Manager; and

8.2.3 to confer with the Team Managers and make it known that the Referee is permitted to
suspend or abandon play if the spirit of competition is not as it should be.

8.3 There shall be no appeal against the decision of a Referee.

9. QUALIFICATION OF PLAYERS

Players shall be qualified to represent a Member Association in accordance with General Competition
Regulation 8.

10. TEAM MANAGER

10.1 Each Member Association concerned shall appoint a manager of its team within the stipulated time
as per Annexure I.

10.2 In default of such appointment, a team shall forthwith choose its own manager.

10.3 As soon as appointed, the name of the manager shall be notified to the Referee.

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

156
 Sudirman Cup

10.4 From the time of arrival at the venue, the manager shall assume all administrative and other
responsibilities on behalf of the Member Association and team concerned in connection with the
conduct of the Competition.

10.5 The Team Manager shall attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee and / or Committee of
Management. (Refer Part III Section 1B - GCR – Regulation 31.2).

11. CONSTITUTION OF TIES AND TEAMS

11.1 Each tie shall be decided by the results of

One Men’s Singles;

One Women’s Singles;
One Men’s Doubles;
One Women’s Doubles;
One Mixed Doubles.

11.1.1 In group play, all five matches of each tie shall be played.

11.1.2 In non-group play, each tie shall be stopped when the tie is decided.
BwF Team

11.2 No player shall play in more than two matches.

evenTs

11.3 The size of the team shall be as per Regulation 12.2.

11.3.1 If, as a result of injury or illness sustained after arrival at the venue, a team has only one
male or one female player, that player may play in only one match, and the remaining two
matches involving that player’s sex shall be conceded to the opposing side.

If, for the above reasons, the team is reduced to two players only, either both of the same sex, or one of
each sex, the whole tie shall be conceded.

12. NOMINATION OF TEAMS

12.1 Each competing Member Association is responsible for determining the criteria and method of
selecting players for nomination, and for nominating players, to represent its Association.

12.2 Each competing Member Association shall nominate to the BWF, not fewer than two male and not
fewer than two female players; and not more than total 20 players, from whom its team will be
selected for a tie, within the stipulated time as per Annexure I.

12.3 Nomination of team for a tie

12.3.1 Each manager shall hand to the Referee within stipulated time fixed (Annexure I) before
the start of any tie the composition of the team for each tie in order as stated in Regulation
11.1.

12.3.2 These players shall be selected from those previously nominated (Regulation 12.2)

13. ORDER OF PLAY

13.1 The following are permissible orders of play:

13.1.1 Men’s Doubles – Women’s Singles – Men’s Singles – Women’s Doubles – Mixed Doubles

13.1.2 Men’s Singles – Women’s Singles – Men’s Doubles – Women’s Doubles – Mixed Doubles

13.1.3 Mixed Doubles – Men’s Singles – Men’s Doubles – Women’s Singles – Women’s Doubles

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

157
 Sudirman Cup

13.1.4 Mixed Doubles – Men’s Singles – Women’s Singles – Men’s Doubles – Women’s Doubles

13.1.5 Mixed Doubles – Women’s Singles – Men’s Singles – Women’s Doubles – Men’s Doubles

13.1.6 Women’s Singles – Men’s Singles – Women’s Doubles – Men’s Doubles – Mixed Doubles

13.2 Determining order of play

13.2.1 Orders of play 13.1.1 to 13.1.6 will be considered in turn and the first order of play will be
used which has no player playing in two consecutive matches or playing doubles before
singles.
13.2.2 If all six orders of play, 13.1.1 to 13.1.6 result in a player playing in two consecutive
matches or playing doubles before singles, order of play 13.1.2 will be used.

13.3 Any player participating in two matches is entitled to a minimum interval of 30 minutes between
them.

14. SUBSTITUTIONS

14.1 The Referee may sanction a substitute or substitutes for a player who, in the opinion of the Referee,
is incapacitated by illness, accident or other unavoidable hindrance provided that the substitute
player / pair is lower ranked than the player / pair being replaced.

BwF Team
evenTs
14.2 The ranking of player / pair shall be based on the most recently published World Ranking
immediately preceding the date of the competition.

14.3 For a substitution after the first match of the tie has started due to any illness or injury has been
sustained since the teams were nominated any pair unaffected by the need for substitution is left
unchanged.

14.4 The ranking of the players / pairs not ranked in the World Ranking shall be at the discretion of the
Referee, who will use General Competition Regulations 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 where they apply.

14.5 A substituted player shall not take part in that tie.

15. DISQUALIFICATION

15.1 The Referee may disqualify any team which fails to report its arrival for the Competition within
stipulated time as stated in Annexure I or such other period as may have previously been agreed
with the Referee.

15.2 The Referee has power to disqualify any team which fails to carry out its required programme, or
whose team manager fails to attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee.

15.3 The Referee shall have power to disqualify at any stage of the Competition:

15.3.1 any team which has failed to carry out its obligations or breaches the Rules and Regulations
of the BWF; or

15.3.2 a player, or a team that includes a player, breaching the Anti-Doping Regulations.

16. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

BWF has power to make and publish amendments to the Sudirman Cup Regulations.

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

158
 Sudirman Cup

Annexure I

Timelines for Sudirman Cup

Timeline Action Responsibility Regulation

Reference
1 August of previous calendar Send Letter of Invitation BWF 4.1
year of the Competition
1 January Appointment of Committee of Management. BWF 2.2
1 January Appointment of Referee and Deputy Referees BWF 10.1
15 February Sending the Entry for the Competition Member 4.2
Association
1st Thursday of March Seeding Date - World Ranking Date for the BWF 3.4.2
purpose of deciding the groups and Seeding
for Group Play
Immediately following the BWF will decide the date of the draw BWF 5
seeding date
1 May to 30 June Conduct of Competition BWF 3
Thursday immediately Use World Ranking for the deciding the BWF 5.5
preceding the date of Know- strength of the teams qualified for Knock-out
out stage draw stage
Decide the Seeding of the qualified team for BWF 5.4
BwF Team

On completion of Group Play

Knock-out stage
evenTs

of the Competitions
Conduct the Draw for Knock-out stage BWF 5.4
14 days prior to the start of Nominate Team players Member 12.2
Finals Stage Competition Associations
14 days prior to the start of Appointment of Manger by participating Member 11.1
Finals Stage Competition Teams Associations
48 hours prior to first Arrival of participating Teams Member 16.1
schedule tie Associations
4 hours prior to the time fixed Hand over the composition of the team for that Team Manager 12.3.1
for a tie or such other period time
as decided by the Referee
except Semi-Finals and Finals
of Top group
8 hours prior to the time fixed Hand over the composition of the team for that Team Manager 12.3.1
for a tie or such other period time
as decided by the Referee for
Semi-Finals and Finals of
Top group

Part III – Section 4

Sudirman Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

159
 Suhandinata Cup

PART III

SECTION 5

REGULATIONS FOR THE SUHANDINATA CUP

The Regulations for the Sudirman Cup shall apply for the Suhandinata cup with the following variations:

1. DEFINITION

The Competition shall be called the Suhandinata Cup for the World Junior Team Championships and every
Member Association affiliated to the BWF shall be entitled to take part, subject to the conditions of
Competition Regulations 5 and 6.

3. FORM OF COMPETITION

The Competition shall be held in conjunction with the World Junior Individual Championships for the
Enopi Cups and the Committee of Management will publish details at the same time as Member
Associations are invited to compete in those Championships.

BwF Team
evenTs
5. METHOD OF COMPETITION

5.1 The competition shall be held in two stages – a first stage and a final stage.

5.2 First stage

5.2.1 In the first stage all teams shall play in groups of four or five teams or groups/subgroups of
six to eight teams, where all teams play all other teams in the same group/subgroup. An
overall ranking order in the group shall be achieved.

5.2.2 For 32 or fewer teams entering there shall be four groups in the first stage. For 33 to 64
teams, there shall be eight groups. For more than 64 teams, there shall be 16 groups.

5.3 Final stage

5.3.1 The final stage shall consist of a series of ranking competitions.

5.3.2 Each ranking competition shall be played similar to a knock-out draw (with winning teams
progressing to the next round), but with losing teams going on to play losing teams from
the same round in further sub-competitions until a total ranking for the teams in that
ranking competition has been determined.

5.3.3 Each team shall play in the ranking competition determined by its place in its first stage
group.

5.3.4 The winner from each first stage group shall play in a ranking competition to determine
overall rankings 1 to 4, 1 to 8, or 1 to 16, depending on the number of groups in the first
stage.

5.3.5 The 2nd team from each first stage group shall play in a ranking competition to determine
overall rankings 5 to 8, 9 to 16, or 17 to 32, depending on the number of groups in the first
stage.

5.3.6 The 3rd (4th, 5th, etc) team from each first stage group shall play in similar ranking
competitions to those in Regulations 5.3.4 and 5.3.5 to determine further appropriate
overall rankings.

(Sudirman Cup Regulations 5.5, 5.6, 5.7 and 5.9 apply, but 5.8 does not).
Part III – Section 5
Suhandinata Cup
Updated: 3rd June 2011

160
 Olympic Games

PART III

SECTION 6 A

OLYMPIC QUALIFYING REGULATIONS FOR LONDON 2012

A. Events (5)

MEN’S EVENTS (2) WOMEN’S EVENTS (2) MIXED EVENTS (1)

Singles Singles Mixed Doubles

Doubles Doubles

B. Quota

QUALIFICATION TRIPARTITE HOST COUNTRY TOTAL*

COMMISSION PLACES*
PLACES

Men 82 3 85-87
2
Women 82 3 85-87
TOTAL 164 6 2 172

* There will be a maximum of 2 host country places quota assured in the draw of all the events together.
More than two players are permitted if all players have qualified in accordance with the eligibility criteria.
OLympiCs

QUOTA PER NOC

Men 9
Women 9
TOTAL 18

Total number of players /pairs from any one NOC in that event shall not exceed:

BWF Ranking as of 3 May 2012 Maximum quota

per event
Singles If all players are ranked 1 - 4 3 places
If all players are ranked 1 - 16 2 places
If one (1) player is included in the BWF ranking as of 3 May 2012 1 place
Doubles If all pairs are ranked 1 – 8 4 places (2 pairs)
If one (1) pair is included in the BWF ranking as of 3 May 2012 2 places (1 pair)

C. Athlete Eligibility

ATHLETE ELIGIBILITY
All athletes must comply with the provisions of the Olympic Charter currently in force and only those
athletes who have complied with the Olympic Charter may participate in the Olympic Games.

To be eligible to compete in the London 2012 Olympic Games, the players filling Tripartite Invitation
Places must have played in a minimum of 3 tournaments in singles counting towards the BWF ranking
list during the Olympic Qualifying period registered in the BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012. A player
filling an invitation place will be regarded as satisfying the minimum continental representation in that
event.

Part III - Section 6A

Updated: 3rd June 2011

161
 Olympic Games

D. Qualification System

QUALIFICATION PATHWAY

The BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012 will be used to determine qualification for the following number of
places in each event (players will be selected in turn):

Men’s Singles 38 places

Women’s Singles 38 places
Men’s Doubles 32 places (16 pairs)
Women’s Doubles 32 places (16 pairs)
Mixed Doubles 32 places (16 pairs)

Total 172 places

In singles the draw size will be a maximum of 64. In doubles the draw size will be 16.

The BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012 will be used to allocate qualifying places until a total of 38 places
in each singles event and 32 places (16 pairs) in each doubles event are allocated. An NOC which has
qualified more than its authorised number of quota places will need to confirm which of its eligible
player(s)/pair(s) the NOC wishes to enter.

In each singles event there shall be at least one player from each of the five BWF Continental
Confederations. If, for a particular Continental Confederation, there is no singles player qualified in an
event the player selected for the continental representation shall be the appropriate highest ranked player
in the BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012.

If there is no Continental Confederation player in the BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012 in a particular
singles event, then the player selected for continental representation shall be the winner(s) of the

OLympiCs
respective Continental Championships most recently concluded prior to 3 May 2012.

In each doubles events there shall be at least one pair from each of the five BWF Continental
Confederations provided the pair is ranked 50 or above in the BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012.

Considering qualification in all events, no more than two players/pairs from any one NOC can qualify
through the Continental representation system.

If any quota places become available because a player qualifies (and is selected) in more than one event
then these extra places will be allocated to the eligible singles events of the same gender.

The BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012 will be based on results during the period 2 May 2011 to 29 April
2012. Participation in any of the following will count towards the BWF ranking list during this period:

Thomas Cup & Uber Cup (all stages)

Sudirman Cup

World Championships

Super Series

Grand Prix Gold

Grand Prix

International Challenge

International Series

Future Series

Continental Championships (Individual and team)

Any other international sanctioned by the BWF and included in advance as being part of the World
Ranking and with prior BWF approval, individual and team events at other multi-sport Games

HOST COUNTRY REPRESENTATION

The host NOC (Great Britain) is entitled to enter a minimum of two players. If additional players qualify
under the regulations, they may also be entered.
Part III - Section 6A
Updated: 3rd June 2011

162
 Olympic Games

If two or more players from the host NOC (Great Britain) are not placed in qualifying positions from the
BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012 then the entitlement of two players shall be completed by the
qualification of an additional player or players from the BWF ranking list(s) nominated by the British
Olympic Association.

The player(s) qualifying for the host NOC will be the highest ranked player(s)/pair in the nominated
BWF ranking list(s) of 3 May 2012, or if there is no host NOC players/pair in the nominated BWF
ranking list, the NOC will decide the entries latest by 10 May 2012.

TRIPARTITE COMMISSION PLACES

Six (6) Tripartite Commission Invitation Places are made available for eligible NOCs.

On 1 November 2011, the International Olympic Committee will contact all those NOCs who are
eligible to apply for Tripartite Commission Invitation Places.

The deadline for NOCs to submit their requests for Tripartite Commission Invitation Places is 16
January 2012. In relation to the end of the qualification period, the Tripartite Commission will confirm,
in writing, the allocation of invitation places to the respective NOCs between 1 May and 9 July 2012.

Detailed information on Tripartite Invitation places is contained in the – Tripartite Commission

Invitation Places - Information Paper for NOCs – which is included in the Games of the XXX Olympiad,
London 2012 Qualification and Participation Criteria.

E. Confirmation process for quota places

OLympiCs

CONFIRMATION PROCESS FOR QUOTA PLACES

The list of initially qualified players/pairs for each event will be published as part of the World Ranking
list by the BWF and notified to the NOCs and Member Associations no later than 10 May 2012.

NOCs/Member Associations have until 31 May 2012 to confirm that they will use the qualification
places.

F. Reallocation of unused quota places

REALLOCATION OF UNUSED IF QUOTA PLACES

If an NOC has not confirmed by 31 May 2012 that it will use a quota place obtained through the BWF
World ranking list of 3 May 2012, the unused IF quota place will be reallocated to the next best ranked
eligible player/pair according to the same BWF Ranking, who has not yet qualified for the Olympic
Games. This process will be repeated until the quota has been filled for each gender.

REALLOCATION OF UNUSED HOST COUNTRY PLACES

As above (reallocation of unused IF quota places).

REALLOCATION OF UNUSED TRIPARTITE PLACES

Any unused places within the reserved quota of places will be reallocated by the Tripartite Commission.
If the places cannot be reallocated by the Tripartite Commission, they will be assigned to the respective
gender, using the process in place to reallocate unused IF quota places as outlined above.

Part III - Section 6A

Updated: 3rd June 2011

163
 Olympic Games

G. Qualification timeline

DATE MILESTONE
2 May 2011 Start of qualifying period for the BWF ranking list
1 November 2011 IOC will contact all NOCs who are eligible to apply for Tripartite Commission
Invitation Places
16 January 2012 Deadline for NOCs to submit their requests for Tripartite Invitation
Commission Places
29 April 2012 End of qualification period for the BWF ranking list of 3 May 2012
1 May – 9 July 2012 The Tripartite Commission will confirm, in writing, the allocation of Invitation
Places to NOCs
3 May 2012 BWF ranking list to be used to determine qualification. BWF will inform the
respective NOCs/IFs accordingly
10 May 2012 Deadline for host country to confirm if they will use their allocated host
country places.
31 May 2012 Deadline for NOC’s to confirm to BWF their selection of qualified
players/pairs
9 July 2012 Deadline for London 2012 Organising Committee to receive entry forms

OLympiCs

Part III - Section 6A

Updated: 3rd June 2011

164
 Olympic Games

PART III

SECTION 6 B

OLYMPIC GAMES
REGULATIONS FOR BADMINTON COMPETITION

BWF is empowered to produce specific regulations for the Olympic Games Badminton competition,
including, if thought fit, variations to the Competition Regulations.

1. The Competitions shall be conducted in accordance with the Laws of Badminton. The General
Competition Regulations will apply except where specific provisions are contained in these Regulations.
Where there is any conflict or apparent conflict, the Regulations for the Olympic Games Regulations for
Badminton shall take precedence.

2. Seeding

2.1. There shall be sixteen seeds in singles and four seeds in doubles of the five events in the Olympic
Games Badminton competition.

2.2. The seeds for the 2012 Olympic Games Badminton competition shall be determined using the BWF
ranking list of 3 May 2012.

3. Method of Competition

3.1. The competition shall be played in two stages – Group Play stage and Knock-out stage

3.2. The draw for the Competition, at which each competing Member Association may be represented,
OLympiCs

shall be made as per the date lines set in the General Competition Regulations.

3.3. Group play stage

3.3.1. Initially, the players / pairs will play in groups, as below, where all players / pairs in a given
group play each other. A final overall ranking order for each group shall be achieved (See
diagram below).

Events No. of Groups Maximum players / pairs in

each Group
Singles 16 4
Doubles 4 4

Singles:

Top Half

Group A Group B Group C Group D Group E Group F Group G Group H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Bottom Half:

Group I Group J Group K Group L Group M Group N Group O Group P

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Part III – Section 6 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

165
 Olympic Games

Doubles:

Group A Group B Group C Group D

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4

3.3.2. The participating players / pairs will be ranked based on the latest published World
Ranking list prior to the seeding date.

3.3.3. Draw

Singles:

3.3.3.1. The seeded players shall be placed at top of each group as follows:

a) No. 1 placed at the top of Group A

b) No. 2 placed at the top of Group P
c) No. 3 and 4 drawn by lot at the top of Groups E and L.
d) No. 5 to 8 drawn by lot at the top of Group C, G, J and N.
e) No. 9 to 16 drawn by lot at the top of the remaining groups.

3.3.3.2. The remaining players shall be distributed in groups by lot in step by step manner
in the serial order until all players in draw are placed (Step 5 to 8).

No. of No. of Group

players players A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
placed

OLympiCs
Step 1 2 1 2
(3.4.3.1)
Step 2 2 3/ 3/
(3.4.3.1) 4 4
Step 3 4 5/ 5/ 5/ 5/
(3.4.3.1) 8 8 8 8
Step 4 8 9/ 9/ 9/ 9/ 9/ 9/ 9/ 9/
(3.4.3.1) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Step 5 12 1 12 5 3 10 7 8 9 4 6 11 2
Step 6 10 1 5 3 10 7 8 9 4 6 2
Step 7 4 2 4 3 1
Step 8 4 4 2 1 3
Step 9 2 2 1
Additional 16 16 8 12 4 14 6 10 2 1 9 5 13 3 11 7 15
players

Doubles:

3.3.3.3. The seeded players shall be placed at top of each group as follows:

a) No. 1 placed at the top of Group A

b) No. 2 placed at the top of Group D
c) No. 3 and 4 drawn by lot at the top of Groups B and C.

3.3.3.4. The remaining players shall be distributed in groups by lot.

3.3.4. In all group play, the ranking order shall be established in accordance with General
Competition Regulation 16.

3.4. Knock-out stage

Singles:

3.4.1. Top ranked player from each group of the Group Play Stage will qualify for this stage.

Part III – Section 6 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

166
 Olympic Games

3.4.2. The draw for the Knock-out stage will be, as below, and the winners in each group will be
placed at the pre-designated places in the draw:

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
OLympiCs

Doubles

3.4.3. Two top ranked pairs from each group of the Group Play Stage will qualify for this stage.

3.4.4. The draw for the Knock-out stage will be, as below, and the two top ranked pairs in each
group will be placed at the pre-designated places in the draw:

A1

C2

B1

D2

A2

C1

B2

D1

4. Entries

4.1. Entries from any one NOC shall be drawn as follows:

4.1.1. the first and second ranked entries by lot in opposite halves of the draw;

Part III – Section 6 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

167
 Olympic Games

4.1.2. the third ranked entry by lot in one of the two remaining quarters / groups;

4.1.3. the ranking of entries from an NOC can be amended by the seeding. If this is done a new
ranking order is implicitly established and should be used for the purposes of Regulation
4.1.

4.2. A player / pair may participate in an event of the Olympic Games Badminton Competition only if
the player's / pair's entry is made by the closing date for entries as established by the relevant
Olympic Games Organising Committee.

5. Substitutions

5.1. No changes or substitutions of any kind can be made to the entries after they have been made.

6. Disqualification

6.1. If, for any reason, a player is disqualified before the Badminton competition finishes, that player
will receive no ranking points for any event entered. Where the disqualified player is part of a
doubles pair, that pair will be disqualified and receive no ranking points for the event entered.

6.2. Any beaten player / pair will remain eliminated from the draw and will receive ranking points as
loser(s).

OLympiCs

Part III – Section 6 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

168
 Olympic Games

PART III

SECTION 6 C

OLYMPIC GAMES
STATEMENT OF BADMINTON’S REQUIREMENT

The purpose of this Statement is to act as:

• an aid to bidding cities

• a reference against which the plans of cities hosting the Olympic Games will be measured

The Statement is not exhaustive, in the sense that it does not necessarily include responsibilities and obligations
placed on the Organising Committee for the Games by the International Olympic Committee.

The BWF reserves the right to amend the Statement from time to time.

1. EVENTS IN THE COMPETITION

The competition in Badminton must comprise all the following:

Men’s Singles
Women’s Singles
Men’s Doubles
Women’s Doubles
Mixed Doubles

2. PERIOD OF COMPETITION
OLympiCs

This will vary according to the number of competitors, but must always be at least nine days. In 2012
(with 172 players) the competition will be played over nine days. The schedule assumes three sessions of
play each day until the later stages of the competition.

3. NUMBER OF COMPETITORS

The number of competitors for 2012 is 172. The IOC decides the number of competitors.

4. TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

Officials fall into the following categories and numbers:

Technical Delegates 2
Referee 1
Deputy Referees 3
Umpires 24
Medical Officers 2
Match Co-ordinator 1
Umpire Co-ordinator 1
Line Judge Co-ordinator 1 *
Line Judges 80 *

* These officials are usually provided by the Member Association in the country in which the Games are
held, but the BWF policy is that at least 25% of positions are made available to experienced Line Judges
from outside that country, provided these Line Judges bear their own travel costs. Appointment of the
Line Judge Co-ordinator and Line Judges does, nonetheless, require the BWF approval. The BWF must be
involved in the training of Line Judges.

Part III - Section 6 C

Updated: 3rd June 2011

169
 Olympic Games

5. BWF OFFICIALS

5.1 In addition to the President and Chief Operating Officer, members of the BWF Secretariat play a
variety of roles at all major events, including the Olympic Games. Those expected to be in
attendance are:

Head of Administration
Director of Development
Director of Events
Communications Officer
Senior Events Officer

5.2 In addition to the Communications Officer, the BWF party will include:

BWF official photographer

BWF official journalist

6. ACCREDITATION

It is essential that all BWF staff, including those at 5.2, be given the necessary accreditation to enable them
to access all parts of the Competition venue.

7. BWF COUNCIL

The BWF Council, comprising the President, Deputy President, Vice Presidents (six), Members (17) and
Council Member from Athletes Commission normally attend the Games. The hotel housing the BWF
delegation will require meeting facilities – although not necessarily on the scale required for a Congress.

8. COMPETITION VENUE

OLympiCs
8.1 Field of Play. The floor of the field of play must measure not less than 46 metres by 30 metres.
The uninterrupted height above the floor must be not less than 12 metres. [Note: the field of play is
bounded by the first row of seating for spectators or others not involved in management of the
competition].

8.2 Flooring. The surface on which carpeting and court mats are placed must be a wooden, sprung
floor.

8.3 Court Equipment. Court mats, posts and nets for three competition courts and three warm-up
courts must be procured only from sources authorised by the BWF.

8.4 Shuttlecocks. Shuttlecocks must be procured only from sources authorised by the BWF. A secure
room must be provided for the storage of 700 dozen shuttlecocks, of at least three speeds (these will
vary according to conditions in the Competition Hall).

8.5 Lighting. The positioning and lux requirements of lighting over the field of play may vary
according to the nature and structure of the competition hall. Lighting must be situated at least one
metre outside, and at least 12 metres above, the court boundaries. There should be no direct glare
from lighting into the eyes of players on court. A lighting level of at least 1200 lux is required on
the court, when measured holding the light meter in the vertical plane at right angles to intended TV
camera shots. Court lighting must be capable of immediate response to the on/off switch. There
must be no external sources of light through windows etc. Lighting over spectator areas must be
capable of being dimmed during play.

8.6 Background. The walls or any material covering the walls, ‘A’ boards and other interior surrounds
(including seating) to the field of play must be of a dark colour. Light colours – white or yellow, for
example – must not be used. [Note: according to lighting placements and the height of the ceiling
above the lighting, it may also be inappropriate for the ceiling to be of a light colour]. Backgrounds
of any “look and feel” ‘A’ boards must meet with the BWF approval.

Part III - Section 6 C

Updated: 3rd June 2011

170
 Olympic Games

8.7 Air movement. The field of play must have minimal draughts or other air movement. Where air-
conditioning is normally used, special attention must be paid to its effects. Double-door (air-lock)
entry/exit points must be provided.

8.8 Seating. A minimum of 5,000 seats is required. This number includes Olympic Family
requirements. At venues in parts of Asia and Europe a greater seating capacity than 5,000 will
almost certainly be required.

8.9 Warm-up area. This must be close to the competition hall and accessible under cover. Space for
three courts is required. An uninterrupted height above the courts of at least 10 metres must be
provided. The requirements of 8.2, 8.3, 8.6 and 8.7 above will apply.

8.10 Coach videoing. Physical provision must be made for team coaches to video matches involving
their players, as is generally allowed at all BWF events. These videos are for private use and
analysis only, and users can, if desired, be required to sign appropriate commitments as to use of the
tapes.

9. TELEVISION and INTERNET COVERAGE

9.1 Television coverage must be provided for at least the central court throughout all sessions of the
competition.

9.2 “Real-time” scores must be provided to the internet, ie the score point by point in all matches as the
points are scored.

10. PRACTICE HALL

A hall (or halls) with eight or more courts is required for training before and during the period of
competition. Distance from the Athletes’ Village is more important than that from the Competition Hall.
OLympiCs

Although it may not be possible to replicate the exact conditions of the Competition Hall, the uninterrupted
height above the courts must be at least 9 metres. The requirements of 8.2, 8.3, 8.6 and 8.7 above will
apply.

11. EQUIPMENT

Basic equipment requirements are:

11.1 Field of play:

Wooden, sprung flooring

Carpeting around courts and to edge of field of play
Shuttlecocks (500 dozen)
Court mats (3)
Net Posts (6)
Nets (3)
Net/post measuring sticks (3)
Umpires’ chairs (3)
Service Judges’ chairs (3)
Boxes for used shuttles (3)
Mopping brooms and towels (6 of each at any one time)
Vacuum cleaner
Line Judges’ chairs (30)
2-minute interval indicators (3)
Electronic specialised scoreboards (6)
Main fixed electronic display board
Large videoscreen visible to the majority of spectators and showing the TV signal
Players’ kit boxes (12)
Drinking water dispensers (3)
Equipment to measure and record temperature, humidity and air pressure

Part III - Section 6 C

Updated: 3rd June 2011

171
 Olympic Games

11.2 Warm-up hall:

Shuttlecocks (included within 500 dozen in 11.1)

Wooden, sprung flooring
Matting/carpeting around courts and to edge of wooden flooring
Court mats (3)
Net posts (6)
Net/post measuring sticks (3)
Nets (3)
Drinking water dispensers (3)
Seats for players and coaches (30)

11.3 Practice hall:

Shuttlecocks (200 dozen)

Court mats (8)
Net posts (16)
Net/post measuring sticks (8)
Nets (8)
Seats for players and coaches (80)
Refreshment facilities and drinking water dispensers

[Note: the above numbers in 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3 are the operational requirements; spares must, of
course, be available].

11.4 Technical (Field of Play):

Work stations with individual phones for:

Referees

OLympiCs
Technical Delegates
Match Co-ordinator and assistants
Umpire Co-ordinator
Shuttlecock control
Medical Officers
TV liaison staff
Racket stringing

Court-side areas reserved for:

TV cameras
Press photographers

Mobile phones (7) for:

Technical Delegates
Referees
Chief Operating Officer

Wireless headset for:

Match Co-ordinator

Radios and pagers for:

Referees (4)
BWF Staff (12)
Technical Delegates (2)
Medical Officers (2)

Radio or telephone links:

when on court, from each Umpire and Service Judge to the Referee’s desk

12. TECHNICAL CONSULTATION

The BWF will require full consultation with the Organising Committee regarding establishment of many
technical aspects, but including especially:
Part III - Section 6 C
Updated: 3rd June 2011

172
 Olympic Games

Computer database
Computer elements of Match Control
Electronic specialised sport scoreboards
Lighting conditions
Air conditioning

13. TOURNAMENT CONDITION

The competition will be conducted under the BWF Regulations. The BWF will determine the qualification
process (subject to IOC approval), the timing and procedure of the draw, and the selection of seeded
players.

14. SEATING BY CATEGORY

Allocation of seating in the Competition Hall must take particular account – in terms both of numbers and
location – of the needs of players and team officials. The number of seats for this purpose should not be
less than the total player quota. Team officials, coaches, medical officers and staff must be accredited for
access to the players’ seating area(s).

15. BWF OFFICE REQUIREMENTS

Separate rooms at the competition venue are required for the following Federation personnel:

President
Chief Operating Officer
Secretariat
} in close proximity
OLympiCs

Technical Delegates
Referees
Communications Officer
} adjacent to Field of Play

16. PLAYERS FACILITIES

The following are the Federation’s basic requirements at the Competition Venue:

Players’ lounge
Changing rooms (men)
Changing rooms (women)
Physiotherapy room(s)
Medical Consultation room

17. FACILITIES FOR TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

The following are the basic requirements at the Competition Venue:

Briefing room (to hold up to 50 people)

Changing room (men)
Changing room (women)
Umpires’ lounge (to hold up to 30 people)
Line Judges’ lounge (to hold up to 50 people)
Secure lockers/cupboards

18. PRESS FACILITIES

The Press and Interview Rooms must be as close as possible to the Competition Hall, and any link between
the Press Facilities and the Competition Hall must be under cover. Professional interpretation into English
is required, with particular requirements in Chinese, Bahasa and Korean.

Part III - Section 6 C

Updated: 3rd June 2011

173
 ST
QUALIFICATION SYSTEM - A SUMMER YOUTH OLYMPIC GAMES IN 2010

BADMINTON WORLD FEDERATION (BWF)

A. Events and Quotas

MEN’S EVENTS (1) WOMEN’S EVENTS (1)

Men’s Singles Women’s Singles

QUOTA QUALIFIED VIA IF NOC UNIVERSALITY HOST COUNTRY TOTAL

PLACES PLACES
Men 23 8 1 32
Women 23 8 1 32
TOTAL 46 16 2 64

NOC QUOTA
A maximum of two (2) Men and two (2) Women from each NOC will qualify, and only if both Men
and/or both Women are among the top 7 of the World Junior Championships 2010.

ATHLETE ELIGIBILITY
To be eligible for the YOG, athletes must be born between 1 January 1992 and 31 December 1993.

B. Qualification System

PERFORMANCE & CONTINENTAL REPRESENTATION

B.1 The highest ranked Men and Women, one per NOC, shall qualify through their particular Youth
Continental Championships 2010 results / ranking list. Quota places attributed on performance within

yOG
continents are;

o Africa 2
o America 2
o Asia 5
o Europe 5
o Oceania 2

B. 2 If there is no Youth Continental Championships, then the athlete selected for continental
representation shall be the highest ranked of the respective Continental Ranking most recently
concluded prior to 1 May 2010.

B. 3 The remaining 7 places to qualify under the IF system will be selected through World Junior
Championships 2010 ranking list.

Players ranked 1 to 7 in the World Junior Championships 2010 ranking list for each event will be
considered in turn and will qualify unless a total of two athletes from any one NOC would thereby be
exceeded in that event.

Part III Section 7

Updated:3 June 2011
Original version: English

174
 ST
QUALIFICATION SYSTEM - A SUMMER YOUTH OLYMPIC GAMES IN 2010

( An NOC may have more than two athletes ranked 1 to 7 in the World Junior Championship 2010
ranking list for a particular event. In such a case, the NOC has the right to disregard ranking order
when determining its entries and select from any of the players ranked 1 to 7 in filling its two
qualification places for the respective event).

If the quota for Men’s Singles and Women’s Singles is still not filled, athletes ranked 8 and lower on
the BWF World Junior Championships 2010 ranking list will be considered in turn unless the athlete
is from an NOC which has already qualified an athlete in that event. The process of taking athletes in
turn from the BWF World Junior Championships 2010 ranking list will continue until the quota 7
athletes for that event is filled under the IF qualification process.

HOST COUNTRY REPRESENTATION

The highest ranked Man and the highest ranked Women on the World Junior Championships 2010
ranking list will be invited on 1 May 2010.
In case there are no ranked athletes, the host NOC may appoint the National Champion in the most
recently held national junior championships.

C. Reallocation of unused quota places

UNUSED IF QUOTA PLACES

In case a number of qualified athletes are not selected by their NOC by 1 June 2010, the BWF will on
5 June 2010 invite this number of athletes, taking them in turn from the same Continent, from the
World Junior Championships 2010 ranking list until the quota is filled.

UNUSED HOST COUNTRY PLACES

In case there are unused host country places by 1 June 2010, these places will be added to the IF
quota places for qualification via the World Junior Championships 2010 ranking list, so that a
maximum total of 25 Men and 25 Women are qualified by 5 June 2010 under the IF quota.
yOG

UNUSED NOC UNIVERSALITY PLACES

In the event that the quota of NOC universality places are not filled, the unused places will be added
to the IF quota places for qualification via the World Junior Championships 2010 ranking list, so that
the total of 32 Men and 32 Women are filled by 25 June 2010.

D. Qualification timeline

DATE MILESTONE
December 2009 Invitation to NOCs to submit preferences for NOC Universality Places
1 January - 30 April 2010 YOG 2010 IF qualification period
1 January – 30 March 2010 Continental Championships.
1 April – 30 April 2010 2010 World Junior Championships
June 2010 Final allocation of NOC Universality Places
June – 14 July 2010 Reallocation of unused NOC universality places and final reallocation
period for unused quota places
15 July 2010 Entries deadline (by name) for all sports

Part III Section 7

Updated:3 June 2011
Original version: English

175
 Youth Olympic

PART III

SECTION 7B

YOUTH OLYMPIC GAMES

REGULATIONS FOR BADMINTON COMPETITION

Council is empowered to produce specific regulations for the Youth Olympic Games Badminton
competition, including, if thought fit, variations to the Competition Regulations.

1. The competition shall be conducted according to the BWF General Competition Regulations except where
provided otherwise in these regulations.

2. Seeding

2.1. There shall be eight seeds in each of the singles events in the Youth Olympic Games Badminton
competition.

2.2. The seeds for the 2010 Youth Olympic Games Badminton competition shall be determined as
under:

2.2.1.First six seeds based on the ranking order derived from the World Junior Championships
2010.
2.2.2.The seventh seed shall be the next highest ranked player from Asian Junior Championships
2010.
2.2.3.The eighth seed shall be the next highest ranked player from Europe Junior Championships
2010 or specific YOG Qualification Championships between 1 January and 30 March
2010.

3. Method of Competition

3.1. The competition shall be played in two stages – Group Play and Knock-out stage

yOG
3.2. The draw group play off stage cum the knock-out stage, at which each NOC may be represented,
shall be made as per the date lines set by the Singapore Youth Olympic Organising Committee.

3.3. Group play stage

3.3.1. Initially, the players in each event shall play in eight groups of four, where all players in a
given group play each other. A final overall ranking order for each group shall be
achieved (See diagram below).

Group A Group B Group C Group D Group E Group F Group G Group H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3.3.2. Draw

3.3.2.1. The seeded players shall be dealt with as follows:

a) No. 1 placed at the top of Group A

b) No. 2 placed at the top of Group H
c) No. 3 and 4 drawn by lot at the top of Groups C and F.
d) No. 5 to 8 drawn by lot at the top positions of the remaining groups.

Part III – Section 7B

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

176
 Youth Olympic

3.3.2.2. Subject to Regulation 4, the remaining players shall be distributed in groups by

lot.

3.3.3. In all group play, the ranking order shall be established in accordance with General
Competition Regulation 16.

3.3.4. A match conceded due to illness, injury, or other unavoidable hindrance shall count as if
completed without the conceding side scoring another point.

3.3.5. All results of any player that has been disqualified or withdraws before completing the
group matches shall be entirely deleted.

3.4. Knock-out stage

3.4.1. Top ranked player from each group will qualify for this stage.

3.4.2. The draw for the Knock-out stage will be as under and the winners in each group will be
placed at the pre-designated places in the draw:

H
yOG

4. Entries

4.1. Entries from any one NOC shall be drawn as follows:

4.1.1. the first and second ranked entries by lot in opposite halves of the draw i.e Group A to D
and Group E to H;

4.1.2. the ranking of entries from a NOC can be amended by the seeding. If this is done a new
ranking order is implicitly established and should be used for the purposes of Regulation
4.1.

4.2. A player may participate in an event of the Youth Olympic Games Badminton Competition only if
the player's entry is made by the closing date for entries as established by the relevant Youth
Olympic Games Organising Committee.

5. Substitutions

5.1. No changes or substitutions of any kind can be made to the entries after they have been made.

Part III – Section 7B

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

177
 Youth Olympic

6. Disqualification

6.1. If, for any reason, a player is disqualified before the Badminton competition finishes, that player
will receive no ranking points for any event entered, when junior ranking is established.

6.2. Any beaten player will remain eliminated from the draw and will receive ranking points as loser,
when junior ranking is established.

yOG

Part III – Section 7B

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

178
 Youth Olympic

PART III

SECTION 7C

YOUTH OLYMPIC GAMES

STATEMENT OF BADMINTON’S REQUIREMENT

The purpose of this Statement is to act as:

• an aid to bidding cities

• a reference against which the plans of cities hosting the Youth Olympic Games will be measured

The Statement is not exhaustive, in the sense that it does not necessarily include responsibilities and obligations
placed on the Organising Committee for the Games by the International Olympic Committee.

The BWF reserves the right to amend the Statement from time to time.

1. EVENTS IN THE COMPETITION

The competition in Badminton must comprise all the following:

Men’s Singles
Women’s Singles

2. PERIOD OF COMPETITION

This will vary according to the number of competitors, but must always be at least five days. In 2010, the
competition will be played over five days. The schedule assumes three sessions of play each day until the
later stages of the competition.

3. NUMBER OF COMPETITORS

The number of competitors for 2010 is 64. The IOC decides the number of competitors.
yOG

4. TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

Officials fall into the following categories and numbers:

Technical Delegate 1
Referee 1
Deputy Referees 1
Umpires 16
Medical Officers 2
Match Co-ordinator 1
Umpire Co-ordinator 1
Line Judge Co-ordinator 1 *
Line Judges 66 *

* These officials are usually provided by the Member Association in the country in which the Games are
held, but the BWF policy is that at least 10% of positions are made available to experienced Line Judges
from outside that country. Appointment of the Line Judge Co-ordinator and Line Judges does,
nonetheless, require the BWF approval. The BWF must be involved in the training of Line Judges.

Part III – Section 7C

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

179
 Youth Olympic

5. BWF OFFICIALS

5.1. In addition to the President and Chief Operating Officer, members of the BWF Secretariat play a
variety of roles at all major events, including the Youth Olympic Games. Those expected to be in
attendance are:

Head of Administration
Director of Development
Director of Events
Communications Officer

5.2. In addition to the Communications Officer, the BWF party will include:

BWF official photographer

BWF official journalist

6. ACCREDITATION

It is essential that all BWF staff, including those at 5.2, be given the necessary accreditation to enable them
to access all parts of the Competition venue.

7. BWF REPRESENTATIVES

The BWF Representatives, comprising the President and COO normally attend the Games.

8. COMPETITION VENUE

8.1. Field of Play. The floor of the field of play must measure not less than 46 metres by 30 metres.
The uninterrupted height above the floor must be not less than 12 metres. [Note: the field of play is
bounded by the first row of seating for spectators or others not involved in management of the
competition].

8.2. Flooring. The surface on which carpeting and court mats are placed must be a wooden, sprung
floor.

yOG
8.3. Court Equipment. Court mats, posts and nets for three competition courts and three warm-up
courts must be procured only from sources authorised by the BWF.

8.4. Shuttlecocks. Shuttlecocks must be procured only from sources authorised by the BWF. A secure
room must be provided for the storage of 300 dozen shuttlecocks, of at least three speeds (these will
vary according to conditions in the Competition Hall).

8.5. Lighting. The positioning and lux requirements of lighting over the field of play may vary
according to the nature and structure of the competition hall. Lighting must be situated at least one
metre outside, and at least 12 metres above, the court boundaries. There should be no direct glare
from lighting into the eyes of players on court. A lighting level of at least 1200 lux is required on
the court, when measured holding the light meter in the vertical plane at right angles to intended TV
camera shots. Court lighting must be capable of immediate response to the on / off switch. There
must be no external sources of light through windows etc. Lighting over spectator areas must be
capable of being dimmed during play.

8.6. Background. The walls or any material covering the walls, ‘A’ boards and other interior surrounds
(including seating) to the field of play must be of a dark colour. Light colours – white or yellow, for
example – must not be used. [Note: according to lighting placements and the height of the ceiling
above the lighting, it may also be inappropriate for the ceiling to be of a light colour]. Backgrounds
of any “look and feel” ‘A’ boards must meet with the BWF approval.

Part III – Section 7C

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

180
 Youth Olympic

8.7. Air movement. The field of play must have minimal draughts or other air movement. Where air-
conditioning is normally used, special attention must be paid to its effects. Double-door (air-lock)
entry / exit points must be provided.

8.8. Seating. A minimum of 3,000 seats is required. This number includes Youth Olympic Family
requirements. At venues in parts of Asia and Europe a greater seating capacity than 5,000 will
almost certainly be required.

8.9. Warm-up area. This must be close to the competition hall and accessible under cover. Space for
two courts is required. An uninterrupted height above the courts of at least 10 metres must be
provided. The requirements of 8.2, 8.3, 8.6 and 8.7 above will apply.

8.10. Coach videoing. Physical provision must be made for team coaches to video matches involving
their players, as is generally allowed at all BWF events. These videos are for private use and
analysis only, and users can, if desired, be required to sign appropriate commitments as to use of the
tapes.

9. TELEVISION and INTERNET COVERAGE

9.1. Television coverage must be provided for at least the central court throughout all sessions of the
competition.

9.2. “Real-time” scores must be provided to the internet, i.e. the score point by point in all matches as
the points are scored.

10. PRACTICE HALL

A hall (or halls) with four or more courts is required for training before and during the period of
competition. Distance from the Athletes’ Village is more important than that from the Competition Hall.
Although it may not be possible to replicate the exact conditions of the Competition Hall, the uninterrupted
height above the courts must be at least 9 metres. The requirements of 8.2, 8.3, 8.6 and 8.7 above will
apply.

11. EQUIPMENT

Basic equipment requirements are:

yOG

11.1. Field of play:

Wooden, sprung flooring

Carpeting around courts and to edge of field of play
Shuttlecocks (300 dozen)
Court mats (3)
Net Posts (6)
Nets (3)
Net / post measuring sticks (3)
Umpires’ chairs (3)
Service Judges’ chairs (3)
Boxes for used shuttles (3)
Mopping brooms and towels (6 of each at any one time)
Vacuum cleaner
Line Judges’ chairs (30)
2-minute interval indicators (3)
Electronic specialised scoreboards (6)
Main fixed electronic display board
Large videoscreen visible to the majority of spectators and showing the TV signal
Players’ kit boxes (12)
Drinking water dispensers (3)
Equipment to measure and record temperature, humidity and air pressure

Part III – Section 7C

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

181
 Youth Olympic

11.2. Warm-up hall:

Shuttlecocks (included within 200 dozen in 11.1)

Wooden, sprung flooring
Matting / carpeting around courts and to edge of wooden flooring
Court mats (2)
Net posts (4)
Net / post measuring sticks (2)
Nets (2)
Drinking water dispensers (2)
Seats for players and coaches (20)

11.3. Practice hall:

Shuttlecocks (100 dozen)

Court mats (4)
Net posts (8)
Net / post measuring sticks (4)
Nets (4)
Seats for players and coaches (40)
Refreshment facilities and drinking water dispensers

[Note: the above numbers in 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3 are the operational requirements; spares must, of
course, be available].

11.4. Technical (Field of Play):

Work stations with individual phones for:

Referees
Technical Delegates
Match Co-ordinator and assistants
Umpire Co-ordinator
Shuttlecock control
Medical Officers
TV liaison staff
Racket stringing

yOG
Court-side areas reserved for:
TV cameras
Press photographers

Mobile phones (7) for:

Technical Delegates
Referees
Chief Operating Officer

Wireless headset for:

Match Co-ordinator

Radios and pagers for:

Referees (2)
BWF Delegation (8)
Technical Delegates (1)
Medical Officers (2)

Radio or telephone links:

when on court, from each Umpire and Service Judge to the Referee’s desk

Part III – Section 7C

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

182
 Youth Olympic

12. TECHNICAL CONSULTATION

The BWF will require full consultation with the Organising Committee regarding establishment of many
technical aspects, but including especially:

Computer database
Computer elements of Match Control
Electronic specialised sport scoreboards
Lighting conditions
Air conditioning

13. TOURNAMENT CONDITION

The competition will be conducted under the BWF Regulations. The BWF will determine the qualification
process (subject to IOC approval), the timing and procedure of the draw, and the selection of seeded
players.

14. SEATING BY CATEGORY

Allocation of seating in the Competition Hall must take particular account – in terms both of numbers and
location – of the needs of players and team officials. The number of seats for this purpose should not be
less than the total player quota. Team officials, coaches, medical officers and staff must be accredited for
access to the players’ seating area(s).

15. BWF OFFICE REQUIREMENTS

Separate rooms at the competition venue are required for the following Federation personnel:

President
Chief Operating Officer
Secretariat
} in close proximity

Technical Delegates
Referees } adjacent to Field of Play
yOG

Communications Officer

16. PLAYERS FACILITIES

The following are the Federation’s basic requirements at the Competition Venue:

Players’ lounge
Changing rooms (men)
Changing rooms (women)
Physiotherapy room(s)
Medical Consultation room

17. FACILITIES FOR TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

The following are the basic requirements at the Competition Venue:

Briefing room (to hold up to 50 people)

Changing room (men)
Changing room (women)
Umpires’ lounge (to hold up to 20 people)
Line Judges’ lounge (to hold up to 50 people)
Secure lockers / cupboards

Part III – Section 7C

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

183
 Youth Olympic

18. PRESS FACILITIES

The Press and Interview Rooms must be as close as possible to the Competition Hall, and any link between
the Press Facilities and the Competition Hall must be under cover. Professional interpretation into English
is required, with particular requirements in Chinese, Bahasa and Korean.

yOG

Part III – Section 7C

Youth Olympic
Updated: 3 June 2011

184
 World Championships

PART III

SECTION 8 A

REGULATIONS FOR WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS

1. DEFINITION

1.1 Individual World Championships shall be promoted annually, except in the calendar year scheduled
for the Summer Olympic Games, and the events shall include men’s singles and doubles, women’s
singles and doubles and mixed doubles.

1.2 The winners of each event shall be regarded as World Champions and they shall be presented by the
BWF with gold medals to commemorate their success. Runners-up in all events shall be presented
with silver medals and losing semi-finalists with bronze medals. All such medals shall be suitably
inscribed.

2. PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS

2.1 Any Member Association may apply to stage the World Championships and such application shall
be sent to the Chief Operating Officer as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

2.2 The allocation of the Championships shall be made by BWF at a date of its choosing as stated in the
date lines in Annexure I. Member Associations must be given at least six months notice of this date.

3. RIGHTS

All commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of like nature at all venues,
and other rights associated primarily with the tournament shall belong exclusively to the BWF. In
determining the financial arrangements at each venue with the organising Member Association, the BWF
may grant licences and concessions in respect of such rights, including the direct grant of all or part of
such rights to the organising Member Association and / or commercial organisations.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES & FINANCE

4.1 BWF shall allocate responsibility for hosting the Championships on organisational, financial and
commercial terms and conditions it agrees with the hosting Member Association.
BwF i’viDuaL

4.2 The BWF shall be entitled to make grants to Member Associations who enter players in the World
evenTs

Championships on such terms and conditions as the BWF may decide.

4.3 Every Member Association taking part in the World Championships shall be responsible for all
expenses incurred by its players and officials including travel, hotel accommodation and other
expenses.

4.4 The BWF may require the promoting Member Association to submit a proper statement of accounts.

5. GENERAL ORGANISATION

5.1 BWF shall be responsible for the organisation of the World Championships.

5.2 The competition shall be conducted in accordance with the Laws of Badminton. The General
competition regulations will apply except where specific provisions are contained in these
Regulations. Where there is any conflict or apparent conflict, the Regulations for World
Championships shall take precedence.

Part III – Section 8A

World Championships
Updated: 3rd June 2011

185
 World Championships

5.3 The Referee and Deputy Referee(s) of each World Championships shall be appointed by BWF as
per the time line in Annexure I.

5.4 Each Competition shall be managed by the BWF which shall appoint a Committee of Management
for the purpose. The Committee of Management shall be of at least three persons, one member of
the BWF Events Committee, one from the host Member Association and the Referee. The
Committee of Management shall have power to co-opt other persons and also to delegate any of the
duties to a Sub-committee

5.5 BWF shall select one brand of BWF-approved shuttlecock to be used exclusively.

6. FILING OF ENTRIES

6.1 The BWF shall send to all Member Associations an invitation to compete as stated in the date lines
in Annexure I.

6.2 Entries must be submitted only by Member Associations and shall be sent so as to reach the address
quoted in the letter of invitation not later than the closing date notified in the invitation (Annexure
I).

6.3 Entries shall be eligible as described in Regulations for Eligibility and Processing of Entries for
World Championships (Part III, Section 8B).

6.4 BWF shall have the power to reject an entry:

6.4.1 containing a condition unresolved at the time of the draw;

6.4.2 considered against the interest of the competition or the game; or

6.4.3 made by a Member Association which is in arrears in payment of subscriptions or which

has any other indebtedness to the BWF.

7. SEEDING

The World Championships shall be seeded in accordance with Competition Regulation 12 based on the
World Ranking as stated in the date lines in Annexure I, except that the number of seeds shall be 16 in all
events.

8. SUBSTITUTIONS

BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs
8.1 A player / pair may participate in an event of the World Championships only if the player's / pair's
entry is made by the closing date for entries as announced by the BWF as stated in the date lines in
Annexure I.

8.2 After the closing date for entries but before the draw is made, a player who has entered may be
unable to take part through illness, injury, or other unavoidable cause. That player's place in singles
and / or doubles will be taken by the next eligible player / pair as per Regulations for Eligibility and
Processing of Entries for World Championships (Part III, Section 8B).

8.3 No changes or substitutions of any kind can be made to the draw after it has been made except
corrections as in Regulation 15.3.1 of General Competition Regulations.

9. ELIGIBILITY TO COMPETE

9.1 Participation shall be restricted to players in good standing with their Member Associations and a
player’s eligibility to compete shall be in accordance with General Competition Regulations 8.2 to
8.4.

Part III – Section 8A

World Championships
Updated: 3rd June 2011

186
 World Championships

9.2 Acceptance of nomination for entry to the World Championships shall count as international
representation as described in Competition Regulation 8.3.

10. DRAW & TIMETABLE

10.1 The draw for the World Championships shall be made as stated in the timelines in Annexure I.
10.2 The intended outline timetable for the playing of each event shall be fixed and circulated as stated in
the date lines in Annexure I.

11. PLAYING OBLIGATIONS OF MEMBER ASSOCIATIONS

11.1 Member Associations shall be responsible for ensuring that the players entered by them and coaches
and team officials fulfil their obligations. Member Associations shall also ensure that they adhere to
the Players’ Code of Conduct (Part III Section 1B - GCR - Appendix 4) and Code Of Conduct For
Coaches, Team and Technical Officials (Part III Section 1B - GCR - Appendix 9).

11.2 In default, such Member Association will not be entitled to receive any monies due to it.

11.3 BWF shall have the power to declare the offending Member Association ineligible for the next
World Championships.

12. TEAM MANAGER

12.1 Each Member Association concerned shall appoint a Manager of its team as stated in the date lines
in Annexure I.

12.2 In default of such appointment, a team shall forthwith choose its own Manager.

12.3 As soon as appointed, the name of the Manager shall be notified to the BWF.

12.4 From the time of arrival at the venue, the Manager shall assume all administrative and other
responsibilities on behalf of the relevant Member Association and team in connection with the
conduct of the Competition.

12.5 The Team Manager shall attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee and / or Committee of
Management. (Refer Part III Section 1B - GCR – Regulation 31.2).

13. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

BWF has power on behalf of the BWF to make and publish amendments to the World Championships
Regulations.

Part III – Section 8A

World Championships
Updated: 3rd June 2011

187
 World Championships

Annexure I

Timelines for World Championships

Timeline Action Responsibility Regulation

Reference
1 January of two calendar The Member Association to make application Member 2.1
years preceding the calendar for hosting the World Championship e.g. Associations
year of World Championships Applications for hosting of 2013 World
Championships shall reach BWF by 1 January
2011
1 January of the preceding Allocation of the World Championships e.g. BWF 2.2
calendar year Allocation of hosting of 2013 World
Championships shall be done by BWF by 1
January 2012
1 January Appointment of Committee of Management. BWF 5.4
1 January Appointment of Referee and Deputy Referees BWF 5.3
1 January Letter of Invitation to all Member Association BWF 6.1
Thursday immediately Use World Ranking to determine the seeding BWF 7
preceding to 14 days prior to
the start of Competition
14 days prior to the start of BWF will decide the date of the draw BWF 10.1
the Competition
14 days prior to the start of Circulation of the tentative playing schedule BWF 10.2
the Competition
14 days prior to the start of Appointment of Manager of team Member 12.1
the Competition Associations

BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

Part III – Section 8A

World Championships
Updated: 3rd June 2011

188
 World Championships

PART III

SECTION 8B

REGULATIONS FOR ELIGIBILITY and PROCESSING of ENTRIES for WORLD

CHAMPIONSHIPS

1. EVENTS

Men Women Mixed

Singles Singles Doubles
Doubles Doubles

2. NUMBER OF PLAYERS/ MEMBER ASSOCIATION QUOTA

Maximum per Member Association

2.1 The maximum number of players / pairs per Member Association shall be four entries in each of the
five events, provided each entry is eligible (see Regulations 3.2.1 to 3.2.18).

3. ELIGIBILITY SYSTEM

3.1 Principles

The BWF ranking list of the eligibility date (see Regulation 3.2.1) will be used to determine
eligibility for the following number of places in each event:

Men’s Singles 64 Players

Women’s Singles 48 Players
Men’s Doubles 96 Players (48 pairs)
Women’s Doubles 96 Players (48 pairs)
Mixed Doubles 96 Players (48 pairs)
400 Players

3.2 Operation

BWF ranking list date

3.2.1 The date of the world ranking to be used for deciding eligibility for the Championships
BwF i’viDuaL

shall be as stated in the date lines in Annexure I. This date for any Championships shall be
evenTs

called the “eligibility date”.

3.2.2 The BWF ranking list of the eligibility date shall be used to allocate places. While
ensuring that the Regulations 3.2.6, 3.2.7 and 3.2.9 to 3.2.17 are complied with,
Regulations 3.2.3 to 3.2.5 will be considered in turn until a total number of players / pairs
in each event as stated in 3.1 are allocated, or the entries received have been exhausted.

Process of determining the eligibility until all the places in the draw are filled in

3.2.3 Players / pairs ranked in the BWF ranking list for each event will be considered in turn and
are eligible to enter unless a total of players / pairs, as stated in the table below, from any
one Member Association would thereby be exceeded in that event.

Players / pairs ranked Total number of players / pairs from any one Member
on eligibility date Association in that event shall not exceed
1 to 8 4
9 to 24 3
25 to 150 2
Part III - Section 8 B
Updated: 3rd June 2011

189
 World Championships

3.2.4 A Member Association may have more than four players / pairs ranked one to eight in the
BWF ranking list for a particular event. In such a case, the Member Association can enter
any four (or fewer) of such players / pairs.

3.2.5 After considering all the players as stated in 3.2.3 and 3.2.4 above, if there are still any
vacancies in draw, then the players / pairs ranked nine and lower in the entire BWF ranking
list for each event will be considered in turn and are eligible to enter unless a total of four
players / pairs from any one Member Association would thereby be exceeded in that event.
Players ranked lower than 150 are eligible to enter under this regulation.

Continental representation

3.2.6 Each of the five BWF Continental Confederations is entitled to be offered representation
by at least one player / pair in each event. The players / pairs eligible shall be the
appropriate highest-ranked players / pairs in the BWF ranking lists at the eligibility date.
Such players / pairs count towards the total entries from the particular Member Association
concerned.

3.2.7 If there is no Continental Confederation player / pair in the BWF ranking list of the
eligibility date in a particular event, then the player / pair eligible for continental
representation shall be the winner(s) of the respective Continental Championships most
recently concluded prior to the eligibility date.

3.2.8 If a mistake is identified in the ranking list as on the eligibility date and a player / pair is
found eligible to compete on rectification of such mistake, BWF will include both players /
pairs (i.e. originally selected and the one found eligible due to rectification of error) in the
draw of that event.

Players in a pair representing two different Member Associations

3.2.9 In the event that players from two different Member Associations compete together as a
pair, each player will be counted as
an entry for the respective Member Association in
that event.

Wild cards

3.2.10 In each event the host Member Association shall be entitled to nominate a wild card entry.
This wild card entry may be from a Member Association different from the host Member
Association. The host Member Association shall inform BWF its intention of nominating
wild card entries as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.2.11 Such nominations must be communicated to the BWF as stated in the date lines in

BwF i’viDuaL
Annexure I.

evenTs
3.2.12 In the event that the host Member Association nominates a wild card entry from a different
Member Association, the nominated player / pair must be on the world ranking list.

3.2.13 In the event that the host Member Association nominates a wild card entry from its own
membership, the nominated player / pair need not be on the world ranking list.

3.2.14 The host Member Association is not required to exercise its right to nominate a wild card
entry in any or all events.

3.2.15 In each event the BWF shall be entitled to nominate a wild card entry. This wild card entry
will be selected by the Committee of Management. BWF shall publish its intention of
nominating wild card entries as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.2.16 Such a nomination must be made as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.2.17 The BWF is not required to exercise its right to nominate a wild card entry in any or all
events.

Part III - Section 8 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

190
 World Championships

3.2.18 Any wild card entry must not cause the maximum of four entries in each event for a given
Member Association to be exceeded, and wild card entries must have the approval of the
Member Association of the player / pair concerned.

Phases in the eligibility process

3.2.19 The process of determining the eligible players / pairs as stated 3.2.2 shall be implemented
in phases.

3.2.20 BWF will release a list of eligible players / pairs (Phase I) based on the World Ranking List
on the eligible date as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.2.21 The Member Associations shall confirm whether or not eligible players / pairs (Phase I)
will enter as stated in the date lines in Annexure I. A player / pair who has not confirmed
participation or has declined in the Phase I cannot be re-entered.

3.2.22 If on receipt of confirmation as stated in 3.2.20, if there are vacancies in any of the draws
then BWF will release a list of eligible players / pairs (Phase II) only for such events, based
on the World Ranking List on the eligible date as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

3.2.23 BWF shall also release a list of, not less than 16, Reserve players / pairs for each event to
fill in vacancies in respective events. Such lists shall be published in order of preference.

3.2.24 The Member Associations shall confirm whether or not eligible players / pairs (Phase II)
will enter as stated in the date lines in Annexure I. At the same time, the Member
Associations shall confirm whether the players in the Reserves List will participate if a
vacancy arises in a draw.

3.2.25 Any vacancy arising thereafter in any draw will be filled in from the Reserves List,
provided the total number of players / pairs from any one Member Association in an event
does not exceed four.
BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

Part III - Section 8 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

191
 World Championships

Annexure I

Datelines for World Championships

Date line Action Responsibility Regulation

Reference
Last Thursday of April World Ranking that determines the eligibility BWF 3.2.1
of players to enter
Last Friday of April Intimation to all Member Associations of the BWF 3.2.20
players / pairs (Phase I) that are eligible to
enter
First Wednesday of May Host Member Association to decide whether Host Member 3.2.10
or not to use the wild cards Association
First Friday of May BWF to decide whether or not to use BWF BWF 3.2.15
wild cards
Second Thursday of May Host Member Association to inform wild BWF 3.2.10
card(s)
Second Thursday of May BWF to publish wild card entries, if BWF 3.2.15
applicable
Second Thursday of May Deadline for Member Associations to confirm Member 3.2.21
whether or not eligible players / pairs (Phase Associations
I) will enter
Third Thursday of May Intimation to all Member Associations of the BWF 3.2.22
players / pairs those are eligible to enter
(Phase II).
Third Thursday of May BWF to publish Reserves list of players / pairs BWF 3.2.23
in order of preference in case of withdrawals /
fill in vacancies in draw(s).
Fourth Thursday of May Deadline for Member Associations to confirm Member 3.2.24
whether or not eligible players / pairs (Phase Associations
II) will enter and the players / pairs in the
Reserves List will participate if a vacancy
arises in a draw.
First Monday of June Confirmation to the players from Reserves BWF 3.2.24
List

BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

Part III - Section 8 B

Updated: 3rd June 2011

192
 Enopi Cups

PART III

SECTION 9

REGULATIONS FOR THE WORLD JUNIOR CHAMPIONSHIPS FOR ENOPI CUPS

1. DEFINITION

1.1 The World Junior Individual Championships for the Enopi Cups shall be promoted annually and the
events shall include men’s singles and doubles, women’s singles and doubles, and mixed doubles,
and they shall all be conducted in accordance with existing Rules and Regulations adopted by the
BWF.

1.2 The winners of each event shall be regarded as World Junior Champions and they shall be presented
by the BWF with gold medals to commemorate their success. Runners-up in all events shall be
presented with silver medals and losing semi-finalists with bronze medals. All such medals shall be
suitably inscribed.

2. PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS

2.1 Any Member Association may apply to stage the Enopi Cups Championships and such application
shall be sent to the Chief Operating Officer as stated in the date lines in Annexure I.

2.2 The allocation of the Championships shall be made by Council at a date of its choosing as stated in
the date lines in Annexure I. Member Associations must be given at least six months notice of this
date.

3. RIGHTS

All commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of like nature at all venues,
and other rights associated primarily with the tournament shall belong exclusively to the BWF. In
determining the financial arrangements at each venue with the organising Member Association, the BWF
may grant licences and concessions in respect of such rights, including the direct grant of all or part of
such rights to the organising Member Association and/or commercial organisations.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES & FINANCE

4.1 Council shall allocate responsibility for hosting the Championships on organisational, financial and
commercial terms and conditions it agrees with the hosting Member Association.
BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

4.2 The BWF shall be entitled to make grants to Member Associations who enter players in the Enopi
Cups or a team in the Suhandinata Cup on such terms and conditions as the BWF may decide.

4.3 Every Member Association taking part in the Enopi Cups shall be responsible for all expenses
incurred by its players and officials including travel, hotel accommodation and other expenses.

5. GENERAL ORGANISATION

5.1 Council shall be responsible for the organisation of the Enopi Cups.

5.2 The competition shall be conducted in accordance with the Laws of Badminton and all appropriate
Competition Regulations as adopted by the BWF.

5.3 The Referee and Deputy Referee(s) of each Enopi Cups Championships shall be appointed by
Council as per the time line in Annexure I.

5.4 Council shall appoint a Committee of Management of at least five persons, of whom three shall be
members of the BWF Events Committee, and two shall be nominated by the promoting association.

Part III - Section 9

Updated: 3rd June 2011

193
 Enopi Cups

This Committee shall be responsible for the general organisation and for the seeding and the draw
for each event. In addition, the Referee shall be an ex-officio member of this Committee.

5.5 Council shall select one brand of BWF-approved shuttlecock to be used exclusively.

6. FILING OF ENTRIES

6.1 The BWF shall send to all Member Associations an invitation to compete as per the time line in
Annexure I.

6.2 Entries may be submitted only by Member Associations and shall be sent so as to reach the address
quoted in the letter of invitation not later than the closing date notified in the invitation (Annexure I).

6.3 Council shall have the power to reject an entry:

6.3.1 containing a condition unresolved at the time of the draw;

6.3.2 considered against the interest of the competition or the game; or

6.3.3 made by an Association which is in arrears in payment of subscriptions or which has any
other indebtedness to the BWF.

7. SUBSTITUTIONS

7.1 A player / pair may participate in an event of the Enopi Cups Championships only if the player's /
pair's entry is made by the closing date for entries as announced by the BWF (Annexure I).

7.2 After the closing date for entries but before the draw is made, a player who has entered may be
unable to take part through illness, injury, or other unavoidable cause. That player's place in singles
or doubles or both can be taken by a player from the same Member Association who has already
entered another Enopi cups Championships event.

7.3 No changes or substitutions of any kind can be made to the draw after it has been made.

7.4 Number of entries

7.4.1 Each Member Association, including the host Member Association, shall be entitled to
enter a maximum entries as follows :

MS WS MD WD XD
players players players players players
Member Associations placed 1-8 in the previous World 4 4 6 6 8

BwF i’viDuaL
Junior Team Championships

evenTs
are allowed to enter:
Member Associations entering a team in the World Junior 3 3 4 4 6
Team Championships but not
placed 1-8 are allowed to enter:
Member Associations not entering a team in the World Junior 2 2 2 2 2
Team Championships are
allowed to enter:

7.4.2 Associate Members and international organisations shall not be entitled to make any entries.

8. ELIGIBILITY TO COMPETE

8.1 Participation shall be restricted to players in good standing with their Member Associations and a
player’s eligibility to compete shall be in accordance with Competition Regulations 8.2 to 8.4.
Players are eligible provided they remain under 19 years of age throughout the calendar year in
which the Enopi Cups is held.

Part III - Section 9

Updated: 3rd June 2011

194
 Enopi Cups

8.2 Acceptance of nomination for entry to the Enopi Cups shall count as international representation as
described in Competition Regulation 8.3.

9. DRAW & TIMETABLE

9.1 The intended outline timetable for the playing of each event shall be fixed and circulated before the
end of the day of the Managers’ Meeting (Annexure I).

9.2 Conduct of tournament

9.2.1 The Enopi Cups may be conducted in two or more stages with entries exempted to a later
stage.

9.2.2 If there is more than one stage, earlier stages must be conducted in the same hall(s) as later
stages and immediately preceding them.

9.2.3 If there is more than one stage, earlier stages are subject to the provisions of Competition
Regulations 13 and 14, treating the final stage as the main draw.

9.3 Seeding:

9.3.1 The process for the seeding shall be initiated by BWF under the supervision of the Referee on
close of the entries (Annexure I)..

9.3.2 First draft of the seeding based on world rankings, results of Continental Championships,
past year results and the Continental ranking shall be circulated to the Continental
Confederations for their comments as per the date lines given in Annexure I.

9.3.3 The second draft of the seeding, after considering the comments received from the
Continental Confederations, shall be circulated as per the date lines given in Annexure I to
the managers’ of the teams for their comments.

9.3.4 The Managers shall offer comments on the draft as per the date lines given in Annexure I.

9.3.5 The final seeding list will be circulated in Managers’ Meeting called for the purpose of
making the draw for the Enopi Cups (Annexure I).

9.4 Draw:

9.4.1 The draws for the Enopi Cups shall be conducted in Managers’ Meeting convened for that
purpose as per the date lines given in Annexure I.
BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

9.4.2 The draw as per General Competition Regulation 12 shall be made under the supervision of
the Referee.

10. PLAYING OBLIGATIONS OF MEMBER ASSOCIATIONS

10.1 Member Associations shall be responsible for ensuring that the players entered by them fulfil their
obligations.

10.2 In default, such Association:

10.2.1 not be entitled to receive any monies due to it.

10.3 Council shall have the power to declare the offending Association ineligible for the next Enopi Cups
Championships.

Part III - Section 9

Updated: 3rd June 2011

195
 Enopi Cups

11. TEAM MANAGER

11.1 Each Member Association concerned shall appoint a Manager of its team as per the time line in
Annexure I.

11.2 In default of such appointment, a team shall forthwith choose its own Manager.

11.3 As soon as appointed, the name of the Manager shall be notified to the BWF.

11.4 From the time of arrival at the venue, the Manager shall assume all administrative and other
responsibilities on behalf of the relevant Member Association and team in connection with the
conduct of the Competition.

11.5 The Team Manager shall attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee.

12. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

Council has power on behalf of the BWF to make and publish amendments to the Enopi Cups Regulations.

Annexure I

Timelines for World Junior Championships for Enopi Cups

Timeline Action Responsibility Regulation

Reference
1 January of two calendar The Member Association to make application Member 2.1
years preceding the calendar for hosting the World Championship e.g. Associations
year of World Junior Applications for hosting of 2013 World Junior
Championships Championships shall reach BWF by 1 January
2011
1 January of the preceding Allocation of the World Junior BWF 2.2
calendar year Championships e.g. Allocation of hosting of
2013 World Junior Championships shall be
done by BWF by 1 January 2012
1 January Appointment of Committee of Management. BWF 5.4
1 January Appointment of Referee and Deputy Referees BWF 5.3
1 January Letter of Invitation to all Member Association BWF 6.1
which also specifies the entries close date
Thursday immediately First draft of the seeding to be circulated to the BWF 9.3.2

BwF i’viDuaL
preceding to 14 days prior to Continental Confederations.

evenTs
the start of Competition
1st day of the Suhandinata Second draft of the seeding to be circulated to BWF 9.3.3
Cup the Mangers for comments
2nd day of the Suhandinata The managers to offer comments on the Team 9.3.4
Cup Seedings Managers of
participating
teams
Immediately on conclusion of Meeting of Team Managers for making draw BWF 9.4.1
the Suhandinata Cup matches for the Enopi Cups
14 days prior to the start of Circulation of the tentative playing schedule BWF 9.1
the Competition
14 days prior to the start of Appointment of Manager of team Member 11.1
the Competition Associations

Part III - Section 9

Updated: 3rd June 2011

196
 World Seniors

PART III

SECTION 10

REGULATIONS FOR WORLD SENIOR CHAMPIONSHIPS

1. DEFINITION

1.1 Individual World Senior Championships takes place in odd numbered years (e.g. 2009, 2011, etc.)
and the events shall include men’s singles and doubles, women’s singles and doubles, and mixed
doubles in the following age groups: 35+, 40+, 45+, 50+, 55+, 60+, 65+ and +70 with the
individuals being eligible if 35, 40, 45, etc. years of age throughout the calendar year commencing
from 1st January in which the competition is held.

1.2 The winners of each event shall be regarded as World Senior Champions and they shall be presented
by the BWF with medals to commemorate their success. Runners-up and semi-finalists in all events
shall be presented with medals. All such medals shall be suitably inscribed.

2. PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS

2.1 Any Member Association may apply to stage the World Senior Championships and such application
shall be sent to the Chief Operating Officer.

2.2 The allocation of the Championships shall be made by BWF at a date of its choosing.

3. RIGHTS

All commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of like nature at all venues,
and other rights associated primarily with the tournament shall belong exclusively to the BWF. In
determining the financial arrangements at each venue with the organising Member Association, the BWF
may grant licences and concessions in respect of such rights, including the direct grant of all or part of
such rights to the organising Member Association and/or commercial organisations.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES & FINANCE

4.1 BWF shall allocate responsibility for hosting the World Senior Championships on organisational,
financial and commercial terms and conditions it agrees with the hosting Member Association.
BwF i’viDuaL

4.2 Every Member Association taking part in the World Senior Championships shall be responsible for
evenTs

all expenses incurred by its players and officials including travel, hotel accommodation and other
expenses.

5. GENERAL ORGANISATION

5.1 The organising committee shall be responsible for the organisation of the World Senior
Championships.

5.2 The competition shall be conducted in accordance with the Laws of Badminton. The General
competition regulations will apply except where specific provisions are contained in these
Regulations. Where there is any conflict or apparent conflict, the Regulations for World Seniors
Championships shall take precedence.

5.3 The Referee and Deputy Referee(s) of each World Championships shall be appointed by BWF.

5.4 Each Competition shall be managed by the BWF which shall appoint a Committee of Management
for the purpose. The Committee of Management shall be of at least three persons, one member of
the BWF Events Committee, one from the host Member Association and the Referee. This
Part III – Section 10
Updated: 3rd June 2011

197
 World Seniors

Committee shall be responsible for the general organisation and for the seeding and the draw for
each event.

5.5 The organising committee in discussion with the BWF shall select one brand of BWF-approved
shuttlecock to be used exclusively.

6. ENTRY FEES

The organising committee, with the agreement of the BWF, shall decide the size of the entry fees, which
shall be notified in the invitation to participate. The entry fees for participation up to one event shall not
exceed US$ 120 and for every additional event participated shall not exceed US$ 30. The fees shall be for
participation, a farewell party, Tournament program, T-shirt and a small welcome party. The organiser will
provide an optional medical insurance for players. They shall be payable to the organising committee at
the time of entries being made by the Member Association.

7. FILING OF ENTRIES

7.1 Not later than six months before the date of the Championships, the BWF, on behalf of the
organising committee, shall send to all Member Associations an invitation to compete.

7.2 Entries may be submitted only by Member Associations and shall be sent so as to reach the address
quoted in the letter of invitation not later than the closing date notified in the invitation along with a
copy of the passport or appropriate ID Card of Government Authority.

7.3 The organising committee, in agreement with the BWF, shall have the power to reject an entry:

7.3.1 containing a condition unresolved at the time of the draw;

7.3.2 considered against the interest of the competition or the game;

7.3.3 made by an Association which is in arrears in payment of subscriptions or which has any
other indebtedness to the BWF; or

7.3.4 ineligible due to incorrect date of birth.

7.4 Number of entries

7.4.1 Each Member Association shall be entitled to enter in each age group, up to 4 men and 4
women in singles events, 8 men and 8 women in level doubles events, and 4 men and 4
women in mixed doubles event .

BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs
a. Singles – 4 males + 4 females
b. Doubles – 8 males + 8 females
c. Mixed – 4 males + 4 females

7.4.2 A player can compete in not more than one singles, one doubles and one mixed doubles
event in any eligible age group. e.g. a male player eligible in 45+ age category, enters in
45+ men’s singles, then he will not play in Men’s Singles event in any other age group.

8. SUBSTITUTIONS

8.1 A playe r/ pair may participate in an event of the World Senior Championships only if the player's /
pair's entry is made by the closing date for entries as announced by the BWF.

After the closing date for entries, a player who has entered may be unable to take part through illness, injury,
or other unavoidable cause. That player's place in singles or doubles or both may be taken by a player who
has already entered another World Senior Championships event, provided the provisions of Regulation 7.4
are respected.

Part III – Section 10

Updated: 3rd June 2011

198
 World Seniors

9. ELIGIBILITY TO COMPETE

9.1 Participation shall be restricted to players in good standing with their Member Associations and a
player’s eligibility to compete shall be in accordance with Competition Regulations 8.1 to 8.4.

9.2 Acceptance of nomination for entry to the World Senior Championships shall count as
international representation as described in Competition Regulation 8.1.2.

10. DRAW & TIMETABLE

10.1 The Superseries timelines will be used to determine entry cut-off and draw dates etc.

10.2 The Entries from any one Member Association shall be drawn as follows:

10.2.1 the first and second ranked entries from the Member Association by lot in opposite
halves of the draw;

10.2.2 the third and fourth ranked entries by lot in remaining quarters.

11. PLAYING OBLIGATIONS OF MEMBER ASSOCIATIONS

11.1 Member Associations shall be responsible for ensuring that the players entered by them fulfil their
obligations.

11.2 In default, such Association:

11.2.1 shall forfeit all entry fees;

11.2.2 shall not be entitled to receive any monies due to it.

11.3 BWF shall have the power to declare the offending Association ineligible for the next World Senior
Championships.

12. TEAM MANAGER

12.1 Each Member Association concerned shall appoint a Manager of its team at least fourteen days
before the commencement of the Championships.

12.2 In default of such appointment, a team shall forthwith choose its own Manager.
BwF i’viDuaL
evenTs

12.3 As soon as appointed, the name of the Manager shall be notified to the Referee.

12.4 From the time of arrival at the venue, the Manager shall assume all administrative and other
responsibilities on behalf of the relevant Member Association and team in connection with the
conduct of the Competition.

12.5 The Team Manager shall attend any briefing meeting called by the Referee and / or Committee of
Management. (Refer Part III Section 1B - GCR – Regulation 31.2).

13. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

BWF has power on behalf of the BWF to make and publish amendments to the World Senior
Championships Regulations.

Part III – Section 10

Updated: 3rd June 2011

199
 Superseries

PART III

SECTION 11

REGULATIONS FOR SUPERSERIES

1. DESCRIPTION

1.1 The Superseries is a singles and doubles competition open to all Badminton players who are
members of Member Associations affiliated to the BWF. Players can earn points towards their
World Ranking according to the special classification of those tournaments which have been
nominated by the BWF to participate in the Superseries. The Superseries includes two levels of
tournament, Superseries Premier and Superseries.

1.2 Title

The Superseries is a series of elite tournaments with a high standard of organisation and
presentation. The tournaments are collectively known as the “Superseries”. The series may be
known as the “XYZ Superseries”where XYZ is a designation chosen in consultation with the
Superseries sponsor. Five tournaments are designated Superseries Premier which have increased
obligations and benefits for host Member Associations.

1.3 Relationship to the General competition regulations

The General competition regulations will apply except where specific provisions are contained in
these Regulations. Where there is any conflict or apparent conflict, the Superseries Regulation(s)
shall take precedence.

1.4 Number and location of Superseries tournaments

1.4.1 There will be a maximum of 5 Superseries Premier tournaments per calendar year

1.4.2 There will be a maximum of a further 7 Superseries tournaments per calendar year.

1.4.3 The Superseries cycle will run in three yearly intervals.

1.4.4 The BWF Council will decide which countries will host a Superseries tournament based on
recommendations from the Events Committee or other panel delegated by BWF Council
after consideration of written applications made by the relevant Member Associations.

1.4.5 Applications to host a Superseries tournament will be sent out at least 9 months in advance
of each cycle.

2. ORGANISATION AND RESPONSIBILITY

2.1 Although the organisation of a Superseries tournament may be delegated to a particular group, the
Member Association has the ultimate responsibility to ensure that the tournament is organised in a
satisfactory manner.
seRies
supeR

3. RIGHTS

3.1 All broadcast rights - commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of
like nature at all tournaments and all commercial/sponsorship rights associated with the BWF
World Superseries and/or the tournament are allocated between the BWF and each Superseries
organiser through a contract for the Superseries cycle. The allocation of rights is decided by BWF
Council.

3.2 In all circumstances, the BWF shall always retain the right to publish results and reports on the
Internet and elsewhere, and to do so at times determined solely by the BWF.
Part III – Section 11
Updated: 3rd June 2011

200
 Superseries

3.3 The Member Association concerned may grant licences and concessions in respect of the
tournament rights, including the direct grant of all or part of such rights to e.g. a local Association
and/or commercial organisations.

4. TOURNAMENT CLASSIFICATION

4.1 The minimum total prize money for Premier Superseries tournaments will be US $350,000 in 2011
and 2012 and US $400,000 2013. The minimum total prize money for Superseries tournaments will
be US $200,000. All prize money for Superseries tournaments must at all times be quoted in US
dollars and all prize money sent to the BWF Secretariat for payment must be in US dollars only.

5. POINTS SYSTEM

5.1 Points earned by players in Superseries tournaments for their World Ranking will be according to
the tournament classification of each tournament and the regulations for the World Ranking system.

5.2 An addition to Regulation 5.1, a separate points system known as the Superseries Standings will be
maintained and a player/pair will accumulate points after each Superseries tournament.

5.3 At the end of the Superseries circuit: the top 8 men, 8 women, 8 men’s, women’s and mixed doubles
pairs in the Superseries Standing (subject to Superseries regulation 8.2) will be invited to compete in
the Superseries Finals.

5.4 If two or more players/pairs are tied in Superseries Standings, the place in the Superseries Finals
will be awarded to the player/pair who has participated in the most Superseries tournaments during
the year. If there is still a tie, the place will be awarded to the player/pair who has gained the most
Superseries Standing points in tournaments from 1 July onwards.

6. CONDITIONS FOR TOURNAMENTS TAKING PART IN THE SUPERSERIES

6.1 Each Superseries tournament must adhere to the organisational and presentational criteria set out in
these regulations and the Superseries Organisers Manual (Technical Guidelines).Superseries
tournaments should make best efforts to adhere to the organisational and presentational criteria in
the BWF World Superseries Manual (Technical Guidelines).

6.1.1 Adherence to the Superseries criteria will be monitored by the BWF before and during the
tournament.

6.1.2 A written report on adherence to the criteria will be submitted to the Events Working
Group by the BWF representative. A copy of the report will also be sent to the organisers.

6.2 Entries

6.2.1 If a Member Association enters players for a Superseries tournament, these entries shall be
made in World Ranking order in each event. If a player or pair has no World Ranking then
the entries shall be made in national ranking order. No dummy entries will be permitted.
seRies
supeR

6.3 Entry closing Dates

6.3.1 Entries for a Superseries tournament will close five weeks before the first day of play.
Entries will not be accepted after that date under any circumstances.

6.4 All five events must be played:

Men’s Singles;
Women’s Singles;
Men’s Doubles;
Women’s Doubles; and
Mixed Doubles.
Part III – Section 11
Updated: 3rd June 2011

201
 Superseries

6.5 Draw sizes

6.5.1 The tournament must plan main draw sizes as follows:

32 in Men’s Singles;
32 in Women’s Singles;
32 in Men’s Doubles;
32 in Women’s Doubles; and
32 in Mixed Doubles.

6.5.2 Where there are fewer entries in a particular event than shown in Regulation 6.5.1, all
entries must be accepted into the main draw.

6.6 Draw

6.6.1 The draw shall be conducted as per Competition Regulation 12 and at the discretion of the
BWF the draw may be conducted in public, and according to the following:

6.6.1.1 The selection of the players for the main and qualifying draws are taken from the
most recent ranking list five weeks before the start of the tournament

6.6.1.2 The seeding of the players for the main and qualifying draws is taken from the
ranking lists published on the date lines specified in Appendix 8.

6.6.2 The main draw will consist of 28 entries including any wildcard, together with four
qualifiers from the qualifying stage if any.

6.6.3 If the host Association does not have an entry ranked in the 28 highest-ranked entries in
any event, they may elect to have a maximum of two wildcard entries in the whole
tournament. If the host Association has only one entry in the 28 highest-ranked entries,
they can elect to have one wildcard entry in the whole tournament. Host Associations can
chose which event(s) the wild cards will play in. These wildcards will play in the main
draw. Wildcards will not win World Ranking points unless they win a match (a walkover
does not count as winning a match).

6.6.4 The qualifying draws will consist of up to 16 entries. These 16 entries shall play on a
knock-out basis to determine four unbeaten players / pairs to enter the main draw in the
respective event.

6.6.5 Where there are fewer entries with world rankings and / or notional rankings than places in
the main or qualifying draws, the extra places may be given by the organiser to entries of
the organiser’s choice.

6.6.6 The seeding of the draw shall be done by the BWF, and the draw itself shall be made by
the organiser using the BWF draw software on-line 14 days before the first scheduled
match (unless the draw day falls on a holiday in which case the draw day can be moved up
to two days before or after).

6.6.7 Separation of entries shall be used in the main draw or in the qualifying draws so as to
avoid, to the extent possible, the entries from any one Member Association meeting in the
seRies
supeR

first round

6.6.8 After a draw has been made, no alterations or substitutions are permitted to the draw except
corrections as in General Competition Regulation 15.3.1 or promotions as in General
Competition Regulation 14.2.

6.7 Seeding

6.7.1 There shall be eight seeds in each of the main draws.

6.7.2 There shall be up to four seeds in each of the qualifying draws

Part III – Section 11

Updated: 3rd June 2011

202
 Superseries

6.8 Division of Prize money

6.8.1 Prize money in each Superseries Premier tournament must be at least US$350,000 in 2011
and 2012 & US$400,000 in 2013.

6.8.2 Prize money in all Superseries tournaments must be distributed as per the prize money
distribution chart. Annex A.

6.8.3 The actual prizes planned for a Superseries tournament must be advertised in advance in
all tournament prospectuses, literature, invitations, etc, issued by the organiser.

6.9 Tournament schedule

6.9.1 The schedule for each Superseries tournament must comply with the outline as attached
Annex B.

6.9.2 The proposed detailed time schedule for a Superseries tournament must be submitted to the
referee for approval. If the submitted schedule is not acceptable to the referee, and
consultation with the organiser does not result in a schedule that is mutually acceptable, the
referee has power to decide the schedule. The schedule may not be published until it has
been approved by the referee.

6.10 Venue

6.10.1 All matches in the main draw of a Superseries tournament must be played at the same
venue. All qualifying matches must also be played at the same venue as the main draw.

6.10.2 Each Superseries tournament must be played on a minimum of four courts.

6.10.3 All matches in the main draw of a Superseries tournament must be played on portable mats
marked solely for Badminton and laid down on a wooden sprung floor. Each Superseries
tournament must use BWF-approved court equipment.

6.10.4 The temperature in the arena should be kept between 18 and 30 º C.

6.11 Shuttles

6.11.1 Only BWF-approved shuttlecocks may be used at the Superseries tournaments, and only
one make and brand must be used exclusively.

6.12 Technical Officials

6.12.1 An umpire, a service judge, and a minimum of four line judges must be provided for each
match at Superseries tournaments. There shall be at least 6 umpires from foreign country
comprising of at least 4 BWF and 2 continental certificated umpires with well spread
nationality. All umpires and service judges shall meet the eligibility criteria set for the
panel of Technical Officials they belong to.

6.12.2 Referees and Deputy Referee(s) for all Superseries tournaments will be appointed by the
BWF. Subject to the BWF’s permission, an organiser may appoint a local deputy Referee,
seRies
supeR

but all costs must be borne by the organiser.

6.13 Entry fees

6.13.1 No entry fees shall be imposed on players from Member Associations other than the host
Association, provided that these players have been nominated as entrants by their Member
Associations.

Part III – Section 11

Updated: 3rd June 2011

203
 Superseries

6.14 Advertising, colour of clothing and media obligations

6.14.1 Advertising on clothing and colour of clothing shall be regulated by Competition

Regulations 19 to 23 as in Grand Prix tournaments. However it is mandatory that players
wear different coloured clothing to their opponent(s) from the first televised stage (last 16
in Superseries Premier and quarter finals onwards for Superseries. In the event that the
opposing players/pairs involved in a match wish to wear the same coloured clothing, the
player/pair ranked lower (using the BWF World Ranking used to produce the final Main &
Qualifying (M & Q) Report will be required to wear clothing of a different colour.

6.14.2 All players will be required, if requested, to take part in a Pre-Tournament Media
conference. They shall be available (not to exceed 1 hour in total) on the day prior to their
first scheduled singles or doubles match of the tournament.

6.14.3 At Superseries tournaments, it is a condition of entry that each player must give on-court
interviews for television immediately after a match whether the match has been won or lost,
and to attend a post-match press conference on request.

6.14.4 By entering a Superseries tournament a player grants and assigns to the BWF and all the
Superseries Tournaments, the right in perpetuity to record in tangible form and use my
name, performance, likeness, voice, and biography, in any and all media (including the
right to produce, display and otherwise use motion pictures, still pictures and live, taped or
filmed television and other reproductions of me), solely for purposes of advertising and
promoting the Superseries circuit and the Superseries Tournaments including the
Superseries Final. Any such use of the players name, performance, likeness, voice or
biography shall be without separate compensation to the player or to the heirs, devisees,
executors, administrators, legal representatives or assignees of the player. Nothing in this
section shall permit the BWF, or the Superseries Tournaments to use the player name,
performance, likeness, voice or biography on any product, service or clothing, or in any
manner that constitutes an endorsement of any product, service or company.

6.14.5 The logo of the tournament sponsors can be put on posters and other marketing material
together with the image of one or more players, but in such a way that the image of the
player is not directly associated with the sponsors. The image of the player cannot be
directly associated with a sponsor without prior consent of the player.

6.14.6 To assist with the promotion of the tournament and the game in general, it is a condition of
entry that each player must be willing to participate on request in at least one appropriate
activity of not more than one hour’s duration (such as autograph-signing, participating in
“meet the public”, question and answer sessions, etc.).

6.15 Practice schedule

6.15.1 Superseries organisers must comply with the outline as attached Annex C.

6.16 Playing background

6.16.1 All Superseries tournaments must comply with the standards specified in the Superseries
Guidelines.
seRies
supeR

6.16.2 The area directly behind each end of each court used at a Superseries tournament shall be
free of white or light-coloured areas. Any A-boards at the ends of the court shall have less
than 20% of their surface area white or light-coloured. It is recommended that A-boards
have no white or light-coloured areas at all.

6.17 Medical services

6.17.1 A doctor or qualified paramedic, who is experienced in sports medicine, must be available
at court-side at all times during play to go on court and assist players to diagnose on-court
injuries.

Part III – Section 11

Updated: 3rd June 2011

204
 Superseries

6.18 Dope-testing

6.18.1 Dope-testing is mandatory at Superseries tournaments. The organisation and cost of such
testing is the responsibility of the Superseries organiser unless otherwise advised by the
BWF. At least 12 drug-tests must be done during each Superseries Tournament at the
organiser’s expense.

6.18.2 Dope-testing rooms must be provided and procedures followed as described in the BWF
Superseries Guidelines.

6.18.3 All information regarding dope-testing is specified in the anti-doping regulations.

6.19 Entry forms and taxes

6.19.1 Entry forms/prospectuses should clearly state the prize monies offered. The amount of any
local withholding taxes or entertainment-type taxes should also be clearly stated.

6.19.2 Tax receipts for this tax must be forwarded by the tournament organisers to the BWF when
forwarding prize monies.

6.20 Imposed conditions

6.20.1 During the nine months leading up to a Superseries tournament, the BWF at its sole
discretion, has the right to request a meeting with the organisers in the host city to review
plans for the tournament and to inspect the proposed venue. Apart from those of the BWF,
expenses of such meetings or inspections shall be met by the organisers.

6.20.2 Arising from any meeting or inspection as described in Regulation 6.20.1, or acting on any
other information or lack of it, the BWF has the right to impose conditions on the
organisers that, having been advised in writing, must be complied with, failing which
Regulation 6.20.4 may be applied.

6.20.3 Immediately before or during any Superseries tournament, a formal request from the
Referee and the BWF Tournament Director must be complied with as regards playing
conditions, the playing schedule, transportation, or any other matter directly affecting the
conduct of the tournament, failing which Regulation 6.20.4 may be applied.

6.20.4 Any Superseries tournament failing to comply with the Superseries regulations is at the
BWF’s discretion liable to the imposition of a penalty payment not exceeding US $50,000,
to having sanction withdrawn, to having conditions imposed on any future Superseries
tournaments, and/or to the refusal to sanction a Superseries tournament for one or more
years.

7. WITHDRAWAL FEE

7.1 If a player / pair who is accepted into a tournament withdraws from the entire tournament or any
event thereof for any reason whatsoever within fifteen days before the first scheduled match of the
tournament, the Member Association entering the player shall make a payment of US$250 per
player / pair to the organisers for the inconvenience caused by the withdrawal.
seRies
supeR

7.2 The payment shall be collected by the BWF and US$200 forwarded to the organisers, with US$50
retained by the BWF. However, if the player was entered by the Member Association under whose
jurisdiction the competition was held, then the whole payment shall be retained by the BWF.

8. PLAYER COMMITTMENT

8.1 Players occupying the top 10 places in the BWF World Ranking list of a specified date (BWF Super
Series Guidelines) in Men’s Singles, Women’s Singles, Men’s Doubles, Women’s Doubles and
Mixed Doubles will be required to play in all BWF Premier Superseries Tournaments and a

Part III – Section 11

Updated: 3rd June 2011

205
 Superseries

minimum of 4 BWF Superseries events occurring in the full Calendar year, further details and
penalties for failing to fulfill this obligation are outlined in Annex D.

BWF WORLD SUPERSERIES FINALS

1. Each year after the Superseries tournaments have ended, there will be a final tournament to be known as
the Superseries Finals. This tournament will be held subject to suitable sponsorship arrangements being
made.

1.1 The venue

The BWF will fix a venue for this tournament and notify all players and Member Associations.

1.2 Invitations to the Superseries Final

1.2.1 The highest ranked 8 players/pairs in the Superseries Standing list, will subject to the
following receive invitations to compete in the BWF World Superseries Finals.

1.2.2 Players/pairs will qualify unless a total of two players/pairs from any one Member
Association would thereby be exceeded in that event.

2. WORLD RANKING POINTS

2.1 World Ranking points will be awarded to players taking part in the BWF World Superseries Finals.

2.2 The points level awarded will be equivalent to those awarded for BWF Superseries Premier
tournaments.

3. TOURNAMENTS PLAYED UNDER THE POOL SYSTEM OR IN GROUPS

3.1 Order of play

3.1.1 If a group contains two players (singles/pairs (doubles) from the same Member Association,
the first match in the group to be scheduled shall be between these two players/pairs.

3.1.2 Group ranking will be established in accordance with General Competition Regulation 16.2

3.1.3 Substitutions will be allowed, but only by the next player/pair on the Superseries Ranking
list, subject to 1.2.2 above.

3.1.4 A player/pair is entitled to prizes according to results actually obtained before any
withdrawal, remaining unplayed matches being treated as if won by the opponent(s) 21-0,
21-0.

3.1.5 Should there be any injury/illness or other unavoidable hindrance preventing player(s) from
competing, participating players must be prepared to play in an exhibition match, if
requested to assist with filling in the programme of play for the sponsors, television and/or
paying audience.
seRies
supeR

4. FINANCING OF THE BWF WORLD SUPERSERIES FINALS

4.1 Travel

All airfares (economy class) for players qualifying for the BWF World Superseries Finals will be
arranged by the BWF.

4.2 Hotel Accommodation

A reasonable standard of hotel accommodation will also be arranged for players. Players shall be
entitled to a daily allowance.
Part III – Section 11
Updated: 3rd June 2011

206
 Superseries

4.3 Players’ other expenses

Players will be responsible for all other expenses incurred by them.

5. GENERAL REGULATIONS

5.1 Draw and seeding of the BWF World Superseries Finals

The draw for, and seeding of, the BWF World Superseries Finals will be carried out by the BWF.

5.2 Tournament officials for the BWF World Superseries Finals

The BWF shall appoint the Referee.

6. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

Council has power on behalf of the BWF to make and publish alterations to the BWF World Superseries
Finals Regulations.
seRies
supeR

Part III – Section 11

Updated: 3rd June 2011

207
 Superseries – Prize Money Distribution

PART III,

SECTION 11 A

ANNEXURE A
DISTRIBUTION OF PRIZE MONEY

Distribution of Prize Money for Superseries

% of total prize money

Winner Runner-up Semi- Quarter- Last 16 Total
finalists finalists
Men’s singles 7.50 3.80 1.45 0.60 0.35
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.50 3.80 2.90 2.40 2.80 19.40
Women’s singles 7.50 3.80 1.45 0.60 0.35
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.50 3.80 2.90 2.40 2.80 19.40
Men’s doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
Women’s doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
Mixed doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
*per pair

Distribution of Prize Money for Superseries Finals

% of total prize money

Winner Runner-up Semi- 3rd in Group 4th in Group Total
finalists
Men’s singles 8.00 4.00 2.00 1.10 0.60
Number X1 X1 X2 X2 X2
Total 8.00 4.00 4.00 2.20 1.20 19.40
Women’s singles 8.00 4.00 2.00 1.10 0.60
Number X1 X1 X2 X2 X2
Total 8.00 4.00 4.00 2.20 1.20 19.40
Men’s doubles* 8.40 4.00 2.00 1.30 0.70
Number X1 X1 X2 X2 X2
Total 8.40 4.00 4.00 2.60 1.40 20.40
seRies
supeR

Women’s doubles* 8.40 4.00 2.00 1.30 0.70

Number X1 X1 X2 X2 X2
Total 8.40 4.00 4.00 2.60 1.40 20.40
Mixed doubles* 8.40 4.00 2.00 1.30 0.70
Number X1 X1 X2 X2 X2
Total 8.40 4.00 4.00 2.60 1.40 20.40
*per pair

Part III – Section 11 A

Annexure A
Updated: 3rd June 2011

208
 Superseries - Schedule

PART III

SECTION 11 B

ANNEX B
SUPERSERIES SCHEDULE

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday

MS Q16 L32 L16 L8 L4 L2

WS Q16 L32 L16 L8 L4 L2
MD Q16 L32 L16 L8 L4 L2
WD Q16 L32 L16 L8 L4 L2
XD Q16 L32 L16 L8 L4 L2
No. of 40 (Draw
matches
size to be 80 40 20 10 5
decided*)
No. of
4 or more 4 or more 4 or 3 2 or 3 1 or 2 1
courts
Mins per
match 35 35 35 45 45 60
Arena
practice Following Following Following Following Following
figures figures figures figures figures
based on 4 based on 4 based on 2 based on 1 based on 1
courts courts courts court court
Total Draw size
mins to be 2800 1400 900 450 300
decided*
Time Draw size
to be 12 hours 6 hours 7.5 hours 7.5 hours 5 hours
decided
No. of
Flexible Flexible 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 flexible
sessions
Suggested 10:00 - 1000 - 16:00 – 14.30 –
hours of 12 noon 12 noon
play 22:00 22:00 22:00 22:00

* The draw size of the qualification will be decided by the organiser. The draw size in each category should be
decided based on the number of entries with the highest world ranking position.
seRies
supeR

Part III – Section 11 B

Annexure B
Updated: 3rd June 2011

209
 Superseries – Practice Court Requirements

PART III

SECTION 11 C

ANNEXURE C

1. Superseries practice court requirements

1.1 The players in the Superseries tournaments are the best in the world, and are used to good and
plentiful practice facilities which they typically use every day, even on days when they are playing
matches in the tournament.

1.2 The practice court requirements noted here assume a full entry to both the qualifying and main draw
in a Superseries tournament. The number of courts provided can be reduced proportionately on the
first two days if there is less than a full entry.

1.3 The following should be taken as the minimum requirement. Flexibility (with more courts available
to meet demand) would be very useful. Another possible requirement (which could be determined
from players’ notified travel plans) is the need for practice courts earlier than the first Saturday.

2. Practice venue (can be at more than one hall)

Day Tournament status Practice hours No. of courts

(if requested) required
Saturday Players arriving 10:00 – 22:00 8
Sunday Players arriving 08:00 – 22:00 8
Monday Players arriving 08:00 – 22:00 8
Tuesday Qualifying in progress 08:00 – 22:00 8
Wednesday Main draw in progress 08:00 – 22:00 8
Thursday Main draw in progress 08:00 – 22:00 8
Friday Quarter-finals 08:00 – 22:00 8
Saturday Semi-finals 08:00 – 22:00 8
Sunday Finals 08:00 – 22:00 8

3. Timetable
A form must be sent out to Members who have entered players requesting their practice requirements. A
detailed schedule should then be drawn up on this basis and if a Member does not respond they should be
scheduled in the timetable. This timetable should then be distributed to all Members so they can plan in
advance of travelling.

4. Height of hall
The minimum height in the practice hall should be 9 metres and shall have a wooden sprung floor or
equivalent surface

5. Travel
Travel to the practice hall should not normally take more than 30 minutes.

6. Shuttles
seRies
supeR

Practice shuttles of exactly the same make as will be used in the main tournament must be available in
reasonable quantities for players to purchase.

7. Arena practice

7.1 It is very important that all players get to practice at the venue before the tournament starts.

7.2 Once entry known calculate how much time each player can get at the venue. For example the aim
should be that each player gets a minimum of X minutes on the competition courts in the venue.

7.3 Referee or Tournament Director will oversee the allocation of practice schedules to ensure it is fair
to all players.
Part III – Section 11C
Annexure C
Updated: 3rd June 2011

210
 Superseries – Player Commitment Regulations

PART III

SECTION 11 D

ANNEXURE D
PLAYER COMMITMENT REGULATIONS

1. PLAYER COMMITMENT

1.1 Players occupying the top 10 places in the BWF World Ranking list of a specified date (BWF
Superseries Guidelines) in Men’s Singles, Women’s Singles, Men’s Doubles, Women’s Doubles
and Mixed Doubles will be required to play in all BWF Superseries Premier Tournaments
occurring in the full Calendar year.

1.2 Any players who, in addition to the players above, occupy places in the top 10 of the BWF World
Ranking on an additional specified date in Men’s Singles, Women’s Singles, Men’s Doubles,
Women’s Doubles, and Mixed Doubles will also be required to play in all BWF Superseries
Premier Tournaments occurring in the remaining Calendar year 2011.

1.3 Failure to play in any BWF Superseries Premier, by a player committed to the BWF Superseries
Premier via the BWF World ranking (as 1.1 and 1.2 above) will be considered a breach of
Competition regulations and in addition to General Competition Regulations 31. Penalties – 31.2
Withdrawal Offence will receive a US$ 5,000 additional penalty over and above normal
withdrawal fees. In addition, BWF will have the right to consider further penalties after
consideration by the Disciplinary Committee.

1.4 Exemption from the additional penalty (as in 1.3 above) will be considered by BWF on receipt of
a valid Medical Certificate. The said player will be required to attend the tournament they have
failed to play in for a minimum of 2 days and take part in any media event arranged by BWF
during that time. BWF have the right to waive this obligation if medical conditions prevent travel.

1.5 Players occupying the top 10 places in the BWF World Ranking list on a specified date (BWF
Superseries Guidelines) in Men’s Singles, Women’s Singles, Men’s Doubles, Women’s Doubles
and Mixed Doubles will be required to play in a minimum of 4 BWF Superseries Tournaments
occurring in the Calendar year.

1.6 Any players who, in addition to the players above, occupy places in the top 10 of the BWF World
Ranking list of on a specified date (BWF Superseries Guidelines) in Men’s Singles, Women’s
Singles, Men’s Doubles, Women’s Doubles and Mixed Doubles will also be required to play in a
minimum of 3 BWF Superseries Tournaments occurring in the Calendar year.

1.7 Failure to play in the minimum number of BWF Superseries tournaments, by a player committed
to the BWF Superseries via the BWF World ranking (as in 1.5 and 1.6 above) will be considered
a breach of Competition regulations and in addition to General Competition Regulations 31.
Penalties – 31.2 Withdrawal Offence will receive a US$ 5,000 additional penalty over and above
seRies
supeR

normal withdrawal fees. In addition, BWF will have the right to consider further penalties after
consideration by the Disciplinary Committee.

1.8 Exemption from the additional penalty (in 1.7 above) will be considered by BWF on receipt of a
valid Medical Certificate. The said player will be required to attend the tournament they have
failed to play in for a minimum of 2 days and take part in any media event arranged by BWF
during that time. BWF have the right to waive this obligation if medical conditions prevent travel.

Part III – Section 11D

Annexure D
Updated: 3rd June 2011

211
 Superseries – Player Commitment Regulations

1.9 Players who qualify for the BWF Superseries Finals must play. Failure to play will be considered
a breach of Competition regulations and in addition to General Competition Regulations 31.
Penalties – 31.2 Withdrawal Offence will receive a US$ 5,000 additional penalty over and above
normal withdrawal fees. The said player will in addition be expected to attend the tournament for
a minimum of 2 days and take part in any media event arranged by BWF during that time. In
addition BWF will have the right to consider further penalties after consideration by the
Disciplinary Committee. BWF have the right to waive this obligation if medical conditions
prevent travel.

seRies
supeR

Part III – Section 11D

Annexure D
Updated: 3rd June 2011

212
 Grand Prix

PART III

SECTION 12

REGULATIONS FOR GRAND PRIX

1. DESCRIPTION

The Grand Prix series is a singles and doubles competition open to all Badminton players who are
members of Member Associations affiliated to the BWF. Players can earn points towards their World
Ranking according to the special classification of those tournaments which have been nominated by the
BWF to participate in the Grand Prix series.

2. ORGANISATION AND RESPONSIBILITY

Although the organisation of a Grand Prix tournament may be delegated to a particular group, the Member
Association has the ultimate responsibility to ensure that the tournament is organised in a satisfactory
manner.

3. RIGHTS

3.1 All commercial, television, Internet, webcasting, audio, film and other rights of like nature at all
venues and other rights associated primarily with the tournament are granted by the BWF to the
organising Member Association exclusively. Member Associations are advised that this grant of
rights is subject to change with reasonable notice and any contracts entered into should take account
of such possible future change.

3.2 In all circumstances, the BWF shall always retain the right to publish results and reports on the
Internet and elsewhere, and to do so at times determined solely by the BWF.

3.3 The Member Association concerned may grant licences and concessions in respect of the
tournament rights, including the direct grant of all or part of such rights to a subsidiary Association
and/or commercial organisations.

3.4 The BWF recommends that Member Associations hosting a Grand Prix tournament ensure that
television contracts make provision for worldwide news access and that such news programmes are
produced and distributed without charge to broadcasters or webcasters who use them. It is
mandatory that at least 90 seconds of daily news access be permitted without charge to broadcasters
who use it, and at least 30 seconds be permitted without charge to webcasters who use it.

4. PARTICIPATING TOURNAMENTS

Member Associations will be advised of these tournaments by the BWF.

5. TOURNAMENT CLASSIFICATION

The minimum total prize money will be as follows:

Grand Prix US $50,000 or more
Grand Prix Gold US $120,000 or more

All prize money for Grand Prix tournaments must at all times be quoted in US dollars and all prize money
sent to the BWF Secretariat for payment must be in US dollars only.
GRanD
pRix

Part III – Section 12

Updated: 3rd June 2011

213
 Grand Prix

6. POINTS SYSTEM

6.1 Points earned by players in Grand Prix tournaments for their World Ranking will be according to
the tournament classification of each tournament and the regulations for the World Ranking system.

7. CONDITIONS FOR TOURNAMENTS TAKING PART IN THE GRAND PRIX

Each tournament must accept the following conditions to be part of the Grand Prix:

7.1 All five events must be played:

Men’s Singles;
Women’s Singles;
Men’s Doubles;
Women’s Doubles; and
Mixed Doubles.

7.2 Draw sizes

7.2.1 The tournament must plan main draw sizes as follows:

64 in Men’s Singles;
32 in Women’s Singles;
32 in Men’s Doubles;
32 in Women’s Doubles; and
32 in Mixed Doubles.

7.2.2 Where there are fewer entries in a particular event than shown in the table in Regulation
7.2.1, all entries must be accepted into the main draw.

7.3 Prize Money

The following prize distribution table must be followed for all Grand Prix tournaments.

% of total prize money

Winner Runner- Semi- Quarter- Last 16 Total
up finalists finalists
Men’s singles 7.50 3.80 1.45 0.60 0.35
Number X1 X1 X2 X 4 X8
Total 7.50 3.80 2.90 2.40 2.80 19.40
Women’s singles 7.50 3.80 1.45 0.60 0.35
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.50 3.80 2.90 2.40 2.80 19.40
Men’s doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
Women’s doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
Mixed doubles* 7.90 3.80 1.40 0.725 0.375
Number X1 X1 X2 X4 X8
Total 7.90 3.80 2.80 2.90 3.00 20.40
*per pair
GRanD
pRix

Part III – Section 12

Updated: 3rd June 2011

214
 Grand Prix

7.4 Schedule

7.4.1 Grand Prix tournaments must be played over a minimum of four days. In each event
(men’s singles, etc) the rounds must be distributed as evenly as possible over the days and,
if more than one round is necessary per day in any event, the extra rounds should be played
on the first days of the tournament.

7.4.2 The proposed outline schedule for a Grand Prix tournament must be submitted to the BWF
for approval. If the submitted schedule is not acceptable to the BWF and consultation with
the organiser does not result in a schedule that is mutually acceptable to the organiser and
the BWF, the BWF has power to decide the schedule. The schedule may not be published
until it has been approved by the BWF.

7.5 Venue

7.5.1 All matches in the main draw of a Grand Prix tournament must be played at the same
venue.

7.5.2 The city and venue of each Grand Prix tournament must be notified to the BWF no later
than nine months before the start of the tournament.

7.5.3 The number of courts available and planned to be used at a Grand Prix tournament must be
notified to the BWF no later than nine months before the start of the tournament.

7.5.4 All matches in the main draw of a Grand Prix tournament must be played on portable mats
marked solely for Badminton.

7.6 Shuttles

7.6.1 Grand Prix tournaments must use only BWF-approved shuttles.

7.6.2 At least three speeds of shuttles must be available throughout the tournament. The middle
speed nominated by the organiser, shall be the speed which would normally conform to
Law 3, and there shall be at least one speed faster and one speed slower.

7.7 Technical Officials

7.7.1 An umpire, a service judge, and a minimum of four line judges must be provided for each
match at Grand Prix tournaments. It is recommended that all umpires and service judges be
under 55 years of age.

7.7.2 The Referee(s) must be appointed by the BWF.

7.8 Entry fees

No entry fees shall be imposed on players from Member Associations other than the host
Association.

7.9 Advertising and colour of clothing

Advertising on clothing and colour of clothing shall be regulated by Competition Regulations 19 to

23.

7.10 Playing background

The area directly behind each end of each court used at a Grand Prix tournament shall be free of
white or light-coloured areas. Any A-boards at the ends of the court shall have less than 20% of
GRanD
pRix

their surface area white or light-coloured. It is recommended that A-boards have no white or light-
coloured areas at all.

7.11 Draw

Part III – Section 12

Updated: 3rd June 2011

215
 Grand Prix

The seeding of the draw shall be done by the BWF, and the draw itself shall be made by the
organiser using the BWF draw software.

7.12 Dope-testing

7.12.1 Dope-testing is mandatory at all Grand Prix tournaments. The organisation and cost of such
testing is the responsibility of the Grand Prix organiser unless otherwise advised by the
BWF. At least 4 drug-tests must be done during each Grand Prix tournament at the
organiser’s expense. Personnel conducting Dope testing must be qualified and experienced
as per anti-doping regulations.

7.12.2 Dope-testing rooms must be provided and sign posted as described in the BWF
Tournament Organisation Manual checklist 14.3, 14.4, 14.6 and 14.10.

All information regarding dope-testing is specified in the anti-doping regulations and this document
should be read and understood by all organisers.

7.13 Entry forms and taxes

7.13.1 Entry forms/prospectuses should clearly state the prize monies offered. The amount of any
local withholding taxes or entertainment-type taxes should also be clearly stated.

7.13.2 Tax receipts for this tax must be forwarded by the tournament organisers to the BWF when
forwarding prize monies.

7.14 Imposed conditions

7.14.1 During the nine months leading up to a Grand Prix tournament, the BWF at its sole
discretion has the right to request a meeting with the organisers in the host city to review
plans for the tournament and to inspect the proposed venue. Apart from those of the BWF,
expenses of such meetings or inspections shall be met by the organisers.

7.14.2 Arising from any meeting or inspection as described in Regulation 7.14.1, or acting on any
other information or lack of it, the BWF has the right to impose conditions on the
organisers that, having been advised in writing, must be complied with, failing which
Regulation 7.15 may be applied.

7.14.3 Immediately before or during any Grand Prix tournament, a formal request from the
Referee or the BWF must be complied with as regards playing conditions, the playing
schedule, transportation, or any other matter directly affecting the conduct of the
tournament, failing which Regulation 7.15 may be applied.

7.15 Any Grand Prix tournament failing to comply with the Grand Prix regulations (and in particular
with Regulations 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.10, 7.12, and 7.13) is at the BWF’s discretion liable to the
imposition of a penalty payment not exceeding US $50,000, to having sanction withdrawn, to
having conditions imposed on any future Grand Prix tournaments, and/or to the refusal to sanction a
Grand Prix tournament for one or more years.

8. THE DRAW

8.1 Entries

If a Member Association enters players for a Grand Prix tournament, these entries shall be made in
ranking order in each event. No dummy entries will be permitted.

8.2 Seeding
GRanD
pRix

All Grand Prix tournaments shall be seeded in accordance with Competition Regulation 12 except
that it will be done 14 days before the first scheduled match (unless the draw day falls on a holiday
in which case the draw day can be moved up to two days before or after).

Part III – Section 12

Updated: 3rd June 2011

216
 Grand Prix

8.3 Draw

The draw for each Grand Prix tournament shall be done in accordance with Competition Regulation
12 except that it will be done 14 days before the first scheduled match (unless the draw day falls on
a holiday in which case the draw day can be moved up to two days before or after).

8.4 Qualifying Rounds

All qualifying rounds at a Grand Prix tournament shall be conducted in accordance with
Competition Regulation 13. In addition, qualifying matches in all events must be completed before
any play begins in the main competition.

8.5 Alterations to the Draw and Substitutions

After a draw has been made, no alterations or substitutions are permitted to the draw except
corrections as in General Competition Regulation 15.3.1 or promotions as in General Competition
Regulation 14.2.

9. PENALTY FOR WITHDRAWALS

9.1 If a player / pair who is accepted into a tournament withdraws from the entire tournament or any
event thereof for any reason whatsoever within fifteen days before the first scheduled match of the
tournament, the Member Association entering the player / pair shall make a payment of US $250
per player / pair to the organisers for the inconvenience caused by the withdrawal.

9.2 The payment shall be collected by the BWF and US $200 forwarded to the organisers, with US $50
retained by the BWF. However, if the player was entered by the Member Association under whose
jurisdiction the competition was held, then the whole payment shall be retained by the BWF.

10. AMENDMENT OF REGULATIONS

Council has power on behalf of the BWF to make and publish alterations to the Grand Prix Regulations.
GRanD
pRix

Part III – Section 12

Updated: 3rd June 2011

217
 Results - Thomas Cup

PART III

SECTION 13 A

THE MEN’S WORLD TEAM BADMINTON CHAMPIONSHIPS

for the THOMAS CUP

Contest Host City Competing Champions Contest Host City Competing Champions
Associations Associations
1948-49 Preston 10 Malaya 1986 Jakarta 38 China
1951-52 Singapore 12 Malaya 1988 Kuala Lumpur 35 China
1954-55 Melbourne 21 Malaya 1990 Tokyo 53 China
1957-58 Singapore 19 Indonesia 1992 Kuala Lumpur 54 Malaysia
1960-61 Jakarta 19 Indonesia 1994 Jakarta 51 Indonesia
1963-64 Tokyo 26 Indonesia 1996 Hong Kong 56 Indonesia
1966-67 Jakarta 23 Malaysia 1998 Hong Kong 49 Indonesia
1969-70 Kuala Lumpur 25 Indonesia 2000 Kuala Lumpur 48 Indonesia
1972-73 Jakarta 23 Indonesia 2001-02 Guangzhou 50 Indonesia
1975-76 Bangkok 26 Indonesia 2004 Jakarta 12 China
1978-79 Jakarta 21 Indonesia 2006 Tokyo 12 China
1981-82 London 26 China 2008 Jakarta 12 China
1984 Kuala Lumpur 34 Indonesia 2010 Kuala Lumpur 12 China

TWENTY-SIXTH CONTEST 2010

FINAL STAGE
(Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia – May 2010)

Group A China beat Korea 4-1; beat Peru 5-0

Group B Japan beat Malaysia 3-2; beat Nigeria 5-0

Group C Denmark beat Ger 4-1; beat Poland 5-0

Group D Indonesia beat India 4-1; beat Australia 5-0

Part III – Section 13 A

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

218
 Results - Thomas Cup

Knockout Draw THOMAS CUP 2010 (format as per TC/UC Regulation 3.8)

China

China
3-0
Korea

China
3-0
Denmark

Malaysia
3-2
Malaysia

China
3-0

Germany

Japan
3-1
Japan

Indonesia
3-1
India

Indonesia
3-0
Indonesia

Final: CHINA beat INDONESIA 3-0

Part III – Section 13 A

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

219
 Results – Uber Cup

PART III

SECTION 13 B

THE WOMEN’S WORLD TEAM BADMINTON CHAMPIONSHIP

for the UBER CUP

Contest Host City Competing Champions Contest Host City Competing Champions
Associations Associations
1956-57 Lancashire 11 USA 1990 Tokyo 42 China
1959-60 Philadelphia 14 USA 1992 Kuala Lumpur 44 China
1962-63 Wilmington 11 USA 1994 Jakarta 44 Indonesia
1965-66 Wellington 17 Japan 1996 Hong Kong 47 Indonesia
1968-69 Tokyo 19 Japan 1998 Hong Kong 40 China
1971-72 Tokyo 17 Japan 2000 Kuala Lumpur 43 China
1974-75 Jakarta 14 Indonesia 2001-02 Guangzhou 44 China
1977-78 Auckland 16 Japan 2004 Jakarta 12 China
1980-81 Tokyo 15 Japan 2006 Tokyo 12 China
1984 Kuala Lumpur 23 China 2008 Jakarta 12 China
1986 Bangkok 34 China 2010 Kuala Lumpur 12 Korea
1988 Kuala Lumpur 31 China

TWENTY THIRD CONTEST 2010

FINAL STAGE
(Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia – May 2010)

Group W China beat Malaysia 5-0; beat USA 5-0

Group X Indonesia beat Denmark 5-0; beat Australia 5-0

Group Y Japan beat Russia 5-0; beat Germany 4-1

Group Z Korea beat India 4-1; beat South Africa 5-0

Part III – Section 13 B

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

220
 Results – Uber Cup

Knockout Draw UBER CUP 2010 (format as per TC/UC Regulation 3.8)

China

China
3-0
India

China
3-0
Indonesia

Indonesia
3-0
Malaysia

Korea
3-1

Russia

Korea
3-1
Korea

Korea
3-1
Denmark

Japan
3-1
Japan

Final: KOREA beat China 3-1

Part III – Section 13 B

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

221
 Results - Sudirman Cup

PART III

SECTION 13 C

THE MIXED WORLD TEAM BADMINTON CHAMPIONSHIP

for the SUDIRMAN CUP

Contest Host City Competing Champions

Associations
1989 Jakarta 28 Indonesia
1991 Copenhagen 35 Korea
1993 Birmingham 40 Korea
1995 Lausanne 49 China
1997 Glasgow 59 China
1999 Copenhagen 50 China
2001 Seville 53 China
2003 Eindhoven 50 China
2005 Beijing 41 Korea
2007 Glasgow 48 China
2009 Guangzhou 34 China
2011 Qingdao 33 China

12TH CONTEST
SUDIRMAN CUP – 2011 RESULTS

ROUND: Group Play/ Level 1

GROUP A RESULTS GROUP B RESULTS

CHN vs. JPN 5 - 0 INA vs. MAS 3-2

CHN vs. GER 4 - 1 INA vs. RUS 4-1
JPN vs GER 4 - 1 MAS vs. RUS 4-1

GROUP C RESULTS GROUP D RESULTS

TPE vs. THA 3 - 2 DEN vs. KOR 2 - 3

TPE vs IND 3-2 DEN vs. ENG 5 - 0
IND vs THA 3-2 KOR vs. ENG 4 -1
Knock – Out Stage

China
China
India 3-1

China
3-1
Korea
Korea
3-2
Malaysia
China
3-0
Denmark
Denmark
Chinese -Taipei 3-1

Denmark
3-1
Japan
Indonesia
3-2
Indonesia

Part III – Section 13 C

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

222
 Results - Sudirman Cup

Level 2 A RESULTS Level 2 GROUP 2B RESULTS

HKG CHN vs. FRA 2-3 NED vs CAN 2-3

HKG CHN vs. POL 3-2 NED vs SIN 1-4
HKG CHN vs. UKR 4-1 NED vs USA 1-4
FRA vs. POL 3-2 CAN vs SIN 0-5
FRA vs. UKR 4-1 CAN vs USA 3-2
POL vs UKR 2-3 SIN vs USA 4-1

LEVEL 2 RESULTS SUMMARY

FRA vs. SIN 3 - 1 - Position 13 and 14

HKG vs. CAN 3 - 2 - Position 15 and 16
UKR vs. USA 3 - 2 - Position 17 and 18
POL vs. NED 3 - 2 - Position 19 and 20

Level 3A RESULTS
Level 3B RESULTS
PER vs CZE 1-4
PER vs AUS 2-3 BUL vs. VIE 0-5
PER vs SVK 4-1 BUL vs. SWE 1-4
CZE vs AUS 0-5 BUL vs. RSA 1-4
CZE vs SVK 5-0 VIE vs. SWE 2-3
AUS vs. SVK 5-0 VIE vs. RSA 5-0
SWE vs. RSA 5-0

LEVEL 3 RESULTS SUMMARY

SWE vs. AUS 3 -2 - Position 21 and 22

VIE vs. CZE w/o - Position 23 and 24
RSA vs. PER 3 - 2 - Position 25 and 26
BUL vs. SVK 3 - 1 - Position 27 and 28

Level 4 RESULTS
(For positions 29-33)

SRL vs PHI 4-1

SRL vs ISL 3-2
SRL vs ISR 5-0
SRL vs SEY 5-0
PHI vs ISL 3-2
PHI vs. ISR 5-0
PHI vs SEY 5-0
ISL vs ISR 4-1
ISL vs SEY 5-0
ISR vs SEY 5-0

Part III – Section 13 C

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

223
 Results - Sudirman Cup

Finals ranking order after 2011 Contest:

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

1. China 13. France (Winner G2) 21. Australia (Winner G3) 29. Sri Lanka
2. Denmark 14.Singapore 22. Sweden 30. Philippines
3. Korea 15. Hong Kong China 23. Czech Republic 31. Iceland
3. Indonesia 16. Canada 24. Vietnam 32. Israel
5. India 17. Ukraine 25.Peru 33. Seychelles
5. Chinese Taipei 18. USA 26.South Africa
5. Malaysia 19. Poland 27. Slovakia
5. Japan 20. Netherlands 28.Bulgaria
9. Russia
9. Thailand
9. England
9. Germany

Note: (a) The ranking order for the next competition in 2013 will be determined by the World
Ranking (Sudirman Cup Regulation 3.4.3)

Part III – Section 13 C

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

224
 Results - Suhandinata Cup

PART III

SECTION 13 D

SUHANDINATA CUP

Contest Competing Champions Contest Competing Champions

Associations Associations
2000 24 China 2007 25 China
2002 23 China 2008 21 China
2004 20 China 2009 21 China
2006 32 Korea 2010 24 China

2010 Results

First Stage
Group W1 China beat France 4-1; beat Mexico 5-0;
France beat Mexico 5-0

Group W2 Japan beat Germany 4-1, beat Austria 5-0

Germany beat Austria 4-1
Group W China beat Japan 3-0
Play Off France beat Germany 3-1
Mexico beat Austria 3-0
Group X1 Indonesia beat Canada 5-0; beat South Africa 5-0
Canada beat South Africa 4-1
Group X2 Chinese Taipei beat England 3-2, beat Peru 5-0
England beat Peru 5-0
Group X Indonesia beat Chinese Taipei 3-1
Play Off England beat Canada 3-0
Peru beat South Africa 3-2
Group Y Thailand beat Netherlands 4-1; beat Puerto Rico 5-0
Netherlands beat Puerto Rico 5-0 ; beat Russia 4-1
Group Y2 Korea beat Hong Kong 5-0;beat Turkey 5-0
Hong Kong beat Turkey 3-2
Group Y Thailand beat Korea 3-1
Play Off Hong Kong beat Netherlands 3-0
Turkey beat Puerto Rico 3-0
Group Z1 Malaysia beat Singapore 5-0, beat Dominican Republic 5-0
Singapore beat Dominican Republic 5-0
Group Z2 Denmark beat India 3-2, beat USA 5-0
India beat USA 5-0
Group Z Malaysia beat Denmark 3-1
Play Off India beat Singapore 3-1
USA beat Dominican Republic 3-0

Play-offs to determine final ranking

Rank 1& 2 China beat Korea 3-1
Rank 3 & 4 Malaysia beat Indonesia 3-2
Rank 5 & 6 Japan beat Denmark 3-1
Rank 7 & 8 Chinese Taipei beat Thailand 3-0
Rank 9 & 10 India beat England 3-0
Rank 11 & 12 Hong Kong beat Germany 3-2
Rank 13 & 14 France beat Netherlands 3-0
Rank 15 & 16 Singapore beat Canada 3-2
Rank 17 & 18 Turkey beat Peru 3-0
Rank 19 & 20 Austria beat USA 3-0
Rank 21 & 22 Mexico beat Puerto Rico 3-0
Rank 23 &24 South Africa beat Dominican Republic 3-1

Part III – Section 13 D

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

225
 Results - Suhandinata Cup

Final Ranking Order of the 2010 Contest*

SUHANDINATA CUP

1. China
2. Korea
3. Malaysia
4. Indonesia
5. Japan
6. Denmark
7. Chinese Taipei
8. Thailand
9. India
10. England
11. Hong Kong
12. Germany
13. France
14. Netherlands
15. Singapore
16. Canada
17. Turkey
18. Peru
19. Austria
20. USA
21. Mexico
22. Puerto Rico
23. South Africa
24. Dominican Republic

Part III – Section 13 D

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

226
 Results – Olympic Games

PART III

SECTION 13 E

OLYMPIC GAMES - RESULTS

Year Games Year Games

1992 Barcelona 2004 Athens
1996 Atlanta 2008 Beijing
2000 Sydney

Year Men’s singles Women’s singles

Gold medalist
1992 Allan Budi Kusuma (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1996 Poul-Erik Hoyer-Larsen (DEN) Bang Soo Hyun (KOR)
2000 Ji Xinpeng (CHN) Gong Zhichao (CHN)
2004 Taufik Hidayat (INA) Zhang Ning (CHN)
2008 Lin Dan (CHN) Zhang Ning (CHN)

Silver medalist
1992 Ardy B Wiranata (INA) Bang Soo Hyun (KOR)
1996 Dong Jiong (CHN) Mia Audina (INA)
2000 Hendrawan (INA) Camilla Martin (DEN)
2004 Shon Seung Mo (KOR) Mia Audina Tjiptawan (NED)
2008 Lee Chong Wei (MAS) Xie Xinfang (CHN)

Bronze medalists
Thomas Stuer-Lauridsen (DEN) Huang Hua (CHN)
1992

Hermawan Susanto (INA) Tang Jiuhong (CHN)
1996 Rashid Sidek (MAS) Susi Susanti (INA)
2000 Xia Xuanze (CHN) Ye Zhaoying (CHN)
2004 Sony Dwi Kuncoro (INA) Zhou Mi (CHN)
2008 Chen Jin (CHN) Maria Kristin Yulianti (INA)

4th place
1996 Heryanto Arbi (INA) Kim Ji Hyun (KOR)
2000 Peter Gade Christensen (DEN) Dai Yun (CHN)
2004 Boonsak Ponsana (THA) Gong Ruina (CHN)
2008 Lee Hyun Il (KOR) Lu Lan (CHN)

In 1992 bronze medals were awarded to both losing semi-finalists.
Part III – Section 13 E
ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

227
 Results – Olympic Games

Year Men’s doubles Women’s doubles

Gold medalist
1992 Park Joo Bong/Kim Moon Soo (KOR) Hwang Hye Young/Chung So Young (KOR)
1996 Ricky Subagja/Rexy Mainaky (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
2000 Tony Gunawan/Candra Wijaya (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
2004 Ha Tae Kwon/Kim Dong Moon (KOR) Zhang Jiewen/Yang Wei (CHN)
2008 Markis Kido/Hendra Setiawan (INA) DU Jing/Yu Yang (CHN)

Silver medalist
1992 Eddy Hartono/Rudy Gunawan (INA) Guan Weizhen/Nong Qunhua (CHN)
1996 Cheah Soon Kit/Yap Kim Hock (MAS) Gil Young Ah/Jang Hye Ock (KOR)
2000 Lee Dong Soo/Yoo Yong Sung (KOR) Huang Nanyan/Yang Wei (CHN)
2004 Lee Dong Soo/Yoo Yong Sung (KOR) Gao Ling/Huang Sui (CHN)
2008 Fu Haifeng / Cai Yun (CHN) Lee Kyung Won/Lee Hyo Jung (KOR)

Bronze medalists
Li Yongbo/Tian Bingyi (CHN) Gil Young Ah/Shim Eun Jung (KOR)
1992

Jalani Sidek/Razif Sidek (MAS) Lin Yanfen/Yao Fen (CHN)
1996 Denny Kantono/S Antonius (INA) Qin Yiyuan/Tang Yongshu (CHN)
2000 Ha Tae Kwon/Kim Dong Moon (KOR) Gao Ling/Qin Yiyuan (CHN)
2004 Flandi Limpele/Eng Hian (INA) Ra Kyung Min/Lee Kyung Won (KOR)
2008 Lee Jae Jing/Hwang Ji Man (KOR) Zhang Yawen/Wei Yili (CHN)

4th place
1996 Soo Beng Kiang/Tan Kim Her (MAS) Helene Kirkegaard/Rikke Olsen (DEN)
2000 Choong Tan Fook/Lee Wan Wah (MAS) Ra Kyung Min/Chung Jae Hee (KOR)
2004 Jens Eriksen/Martin Lundgaard Hansen (DEN) Wei Yili/Zhao Tingting (CHN)
2008 Lars Paaske/Jonas Rasmussen (DEN) Miyuki Maeda/Satoko Suetsuna (JPN)

Year Mixed doubles

Gold medalist
1992 No Event
1996 Kim Dong Moon/Gil Young Ah (KOR)
2000 Zhang Jun/Gao Ling (CHN)
2004 Zhang Jun/Gao Ling (CHN)
2008 Lee Yong Dae/Lee Hyo Jung (KOR)

Silver medalist
1992 No Event
1996 Park Joo Bong/Ra Kyung Min (KOR)
2000 Tri Kusharyanto/Minarti Timur (INA)
2004 Nathan Robertson/Gail Emms (GBR)
2008 Nova Widianto/Liliyana Natsir (INA)

Bronze medalists
1992 No Event
1996 Liu Jianjun/Sun Man (CHN)
2000 Simon Archer/Joanne Goode (GBR)
2004 Jens Eriksen /Mette Schjoldager (DEN)
2008 He Hanbin/Yu Yang (CHN)

4th place
1992 No Event
1996 Chen Xingdong/Peng Xingyong (CHN)
2000 Michael Sogaard/Rikke Olsen (DEN)
2004 Jonas Rasmussen/Rikke Olsen (DEN)
2008 Flandy Limpele/Vita Marissa (INA)

In 1992 bronze medals were awarded to both losing semi-finalists.
Part III – Section 13 E
aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

228
 Results - World Championships

PART III

SECTION 13 F

WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS - RESULTS

Contest Venue Contest Venue

1977 Malmö 1997 Glasgow
1980 Jakarta 1999 Copenhagen
1983 Copenhagen 2001 Seville
1985 Calgary 2003 Birmingham
1987 Beijing 2005 Anaheim
1989 Jakarta 2006 Madrid
1991 Copenhagen 2007 Kuala Lumpur
1993 Birmingham 2009 Hyderabad
1995 Lausanne 2010 Paris

LIST OF CHAMPIONS

Year Men’s singles Women’s singles

1977 Flemming Delfs (DEN) Lene Koppen (DEN)

1980 Rudy Hartono (INA) Verawaty Wiharjo (INA)
1983 Icuk Sugiarto (INA) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1985 Han Jian (CHN) Han Aiping (CHN)
1987 Yang Yang (CHN) Han Aiping (CHN)
1989 Yang Yang (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1991 Zhao Jianhua (CHN) Tang Jiuhong (CHN)
1993 Joko Suprianto (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1995 Heryanto Arbi (INA) Ye Zhaoying (CHN)
1997 Peter Rasmussen (DEN) Ye Zhaoying (CHN)
1999 Sun Jun (CHN) Camilla Martin (DEN)
2001 Hendrawan (INA) Gong Ruina (CHN)
2003 Xia Xuanze (CHN) Zhang Ning (CHN)
2005 Taufik Hidayat (INA) Xie Xingfang (CHN)
2006 Lin Dan (CHN) Xie Xingfang (CHN)
2007 Lin Dan (CHN) Zhu Lin (CHN)
2009 Lin Dan (CHN) Lu Lan (CHN)
2010 Chen Jin (CHN) Wang Lin (CHN)

Part III – Section 13 F

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

229
 Results - World Championships

Year Men’s doubles Women’s doubles

1977 Tjun Tjun/Johan Wahjudi (INA) Etsuko Toganoo/Erniko Ueno (JPN)

1980 Ade Chandra/Christian Hadinata (INA) Nora Perry/Jane Webster (ENG)
1983 Steen Fladberg/Jesper Helledie (DEN) Lin Ying/Wu Dixi (CHN)
1985 Park Joo Bong/Kim Moon Soo (KOR) Han Aiping/Li Lingwei (CHN)
1987 Li Yongbo/Tian Bingyi (CHN) Lin Ying/Guan Weizhen (CHN)
1989 Li Yongbo/Tian Bingyi (CHN) Lin Ying/Guan Weizhen (CHN)
1991 Park Joo Bong/Kim Moon Soo (KOR) Guan Weizhen/Nong Qunhua (CHN)
1993 Ricky Subagja/Rudy Gunawan (INA) Nong Qunhua/Zhou Lei (CHN)
1995 Rexy Mainaky/Ricky Subagja (INA) Gil Young Ah/Jang Hye Ock (KOR)
1997 Candra Wijaya/Budiarto Sigit (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
1999 Ha Tae Kwon/Kim Dong Moon (KOR) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
2001 Tony Gunawan/Halim Haryanto (INA) Gao Ling/Huang Sui (CHN)
2003 Lars Paaske/Jonas Rasmussen(DEN) Gao Ling/Huang Sui (CHN)
2005 Tony Gunawan/Howard Bach (USA) Yang Wei/Zhag Jiewen (CHN)
2006 Fu Haifeng / Cai Yun (CHN) Gao Ling/Huang Sui (CHN)
2007 Markis Kido/Hendra Setiawan (INA) Yang Wei/Zhang Jiewen (CHN)
2009 Cai Yun/Fu Haifeng (CHN) Zhang Yawen /Zhao Tingting (CHN)
2010 Cai Yun/Fu Haifeng (CHN) Du Jing/Yu Yang(F) (CHN)

Year Mixed doubles

1977 Steen Skovgaard/Lene Koppen (DEN)

1980 Christian Hadinata/Imelda Wiguno (INA)
1983 Thomas Kihlstrom/Nora Perry (SWE/ENG)
1985 Park Joo Bong/Yoo Sang Hee (KOR)
1987 Wang Pengren/Shi Fangjing (CHN)
1989 Park Joo Bong/Chung Myung Hee (KOR)
1991 Park Joo Bong/Chung Myung Hee (KOR)
1993 Thomas Lund/Catrine Bengtsson (DEN/SWE)
1995 Thomas Lund/Marlene Thomsen (DEN)
1997 Liu Yong/Ge Fei (CHN)
1999 Kim Dong Moon/Ra Kyung Min (KOR)
2001 Zhang Jun/Gao Ling (CHN)
2003 Kim Dong Moon/Ra Kyung Min (KOR)
2005 Nova Widianto/Lilyana Natsir (INA)
2006 Nathan Robertson/Gail Emms (ENG)
2007 Nova Widianto/Lilyana Natsir (INA)
2009 Thomas Laybourn/Kamilla Rytter Juhl (DEN)
2010 Bo Zheng /Ma Jin (CHN)

Part III – Section 13 F

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

230
 Results - World Championships

WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS, PARIS 2010

LIST OF MEDAL WINNERS
Men’s singles Women’s singles
Gold Chen Jin (CHN) Wang Lin (CHN)
Silver Taufik Hidayat (INA) Wang Xin (CHN)
Bronze Park Sung Hwan (KOR) Tine Baun (DEN)
Peter Hoeg Gade (DEN) Wang Shixian (CHN)

Men’s doubles Women’s doubles

Gold Cai Yun/Fu Haifeng (CHN) Du Jing/Yu Yang (F) (CHN)

Silver Koo Kien Keat/Tan Boon Heong (MAS) Ma Jin/Wang Xiaoli (CHN)

Bronze Gou Zhendong/Xu Chen (CHN) Cheng Shu/Zhao Yunlei (CHN)

Markis Kido/Hendra Setiawan (INA) Cheng Wen Hsing/Chien Yu Chin (TPE)

Mixed doubles
Gold Zheng Bo /Ma Jin (CHN)

Silver He Hanbin/ Yu Yang (CHN)

Bronze Ko Sung Hyun/Ha Jung Eun (KOR)

Lee Sheng Mu/Chien Yu Chin (TPE)

Part III – Section 13 F

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

231
 Results - Bimantara Cups

PART III

SECTION 13 G

WORLD JUNIOR CHAMPIONSHIPS for the BIMANTARA CUPS - RESULTS

Contest Venue Contest Venue

1992 Jakarta 2004 Vancouver
1994 Kuala Lumpur 2006 Incheon
1996 Silkeborg 2007 Auckland
1998 Melbourne 2008 Pune
2000 Guangzhou 2009 Alor Setar
2002 Pretoria 2010 Guadalajara

LIST OF CHAMPIONS

Year Men’s singles Women’s singles

1992 Sun Jun (CHN) Kristin Junita (INA)

1994 Chen Gang (CHN) Wang Chen (CHN)
1996 Zhu Feng (CHN) Yu Hua (CHN)
1998 Zhang Yang (CHN) Gong Ruina (CHN)
2000 Bao Chunlai (CHN) Wei Yan (CHN)
2002 Chen Jin (CHN) Jiang Yanjiao (CHN)
2004 Chen Jin (CHN) Cheng Chao Chieh (TPE)
2006 Hong Ji Hoon (2006) Wang Yohan (CHN)
2007 Chen Long (CHN) Wang Lin (CHN)
2008 Wang Zhengming (CHN) Saina Nehwal (IND)
2009 Hou Wei Than (CHN) Ratchanok Intanon (THA)
2010 Viktor Axelsen (DEN) Ratchanok Intanon (THA)

Year Men’s doubles Women’s doubles

1992 Santoso/Kusno (INA) Gu Jun/Han Jinga (CHN)

1994 Peter Gade Christensen/Peder Nissen (DEN) Yao Ji/ Liu Lu (CHN)
1996 Gan Wye Teck/Chan Chong Ming (MAS) Gao Ling/Yang Wei (CHN)
1998 Chan Chong Ming/Tao Seng Kok (MAS) Zhang Jiewen/Xie Xinfang (CHN)
2000 Sang Yang/Zheng Bo (CHN) Zhang Yawen/Wei Yili (CHN)
2002 Koh Jack/Tan Bin Shen (MAS) Du Jing/Rong Lu (CHN)
2004 Hoon Thien How/Tan Boon Heong (MAS) Tian Qing/ Yu Yang (CHN)
2006 Lee Yong Dae / Cho Gun Woo (KOR) Ma Jin/ Wang Xiao Li (CHN)
2007 Chung Eui Seok/Shin Baek Cheol (KOR) Xie Jing/Zhong Qianxin (CHN)
2008 Mak Hee Chun/Teo Kok Siang (MAS) Fu Mingtian/Yao Lei (CHN)
2009 Kah Ming Chooi/Yao Han Ow (MAS) Jian Hua Tang/Huan Xia (CHN)
2010 Yao Han Ow/ Yew Hong Kheng(MAS) Bao Yixin/ Ou Pong Ni(CHN)

Year Mixed doubles

1992 Jim Laugesen/Rikke Olsen (DEN)

1994 Zhang Wei/Qian Hong (CHN)
1996 Wang Wei/Lu Ying (CHN)
1998 Chan Chong Ming/Joanne Quay (MAS)
2000 Sang Yang/Zhang Yawen (CHN)
2002 Gui Zhendong/Yu Yang (CHN)
2004 He Hanbin / Yu Yang (CHN)
2006 Lee Yong Dae/ Yoo Hyun Joong (KOR)
2007 Lim Khim Wah/Ng Hui Lin (MAS)
2008 Chai Biao/Xie Jing (CHN)
2009 Pei Xuan Liu / Huan Xia (CHN)
2010 Liu Cheng /Bao Yixin (CHN)
Part III – Section 13 G
aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

232
 Results - Bimantara Cups

Guadalajara 2010
LIST OF MEDAL WINNERS
Men’s singles Women’s singles
Gold Viktor Axelsen (DEN) Ratchanok Intanon (THA)

Silver Kang Ji Wook (KOR) Misaki Matsutomo (JPN)

Bronze Sai Praneet B (IND) Di Sou(CHN)

H S Prannoy (IND ) Naoto Fukuman (JPN)

Men’s doubles Women’s doubles

Gold Yew Hong Kheng/Yao Han Ow (MAS) Bao Yixin/Ou Dongni (CHN)
Silver Nelson Heg Wei Keat/Teo Ee Yi(MAS) Tang Jinhua/Xia Huan (CHN)
Bronze Astrup Kim/Faldberg Rasmus(DEN) Choi In Hye/Lee So Hee (KOR)
Lee Chun Hei /Ng Kar Long(HKG) Jensen Sandra Maria/Kaersfeldt Line (DEN)

Mixed doubles
Gold Liu Cheng/Bao Yixin (CHN)
Silver Kang Ji Wook/Choi Hye In (KOR)
Bronze Ow Yao Han /Lai Pei Jing (MAS)
Schwenger Max/Herttrich Isabel (GER)

Part III – Section 13 G

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

233
 Results - World Senior Championships

PART III

SECTION 13 H

WORLD SENIOR CHAMPIONSHIPS - RESULTS

Contest Venue
2003 Sofia
2004 Kuala Lumpur
2007 Chinese Taipei
2009 Punta Umbria

LIST OF CHAMPIONS

Year Men’s singles 35+ Women’s singles 35+

2003 Martin Keat (DEN) Vlada Chernayavskaya (BLR)
2005 Pontus Jantti (FIN) Vlada Chernayavskaya (BLR)
2007 Sanjay Mishra (IND) Marika Werner (GER)
2009 Vladyslav Druzhchenko (UKR) Barbara Kulanty (POL)

Year Men’s doubles 35+ Women’s doubles 35+

2003 Trevor Darlington/Paul Holden (ENG) Vlada Cheranyavskaya/Petya Georgieva (BLR/BUL )
2005 Krishna S Kumar/George Thomas (IND) Vlada Cheranyavskaya/Christine Skropke(BLR/GER)
2007 Rudy Wijaya/Herman Laksono (INA) Sun Tsai Ching/Lee I Shi (TPE)
2009 Stefan Edvardsson/Joacim Helene Kirkegaard/Ann Nielsen( DEN)
Fellenius(SWE)

Year Mixed doubles 35+

2003 Paul Holden/Betty Blair (ENG)
2004 Holger Wippich/ Christine Skropke (GER)
2007 Lu Cheng Chung/Lin Man Ling (TPE)
2009 Joacim Fellenius/Jeanette Kuhl (SWE)

Year Men’s singles 40+ Women’s singles 40+

2003 Oleg Okounev (RUS) Svetlana Zilberman (ISR)
2004 Ram Lakhan (IND) Juthaip Apiwattanawong (THA)
2007 Sanjay Mishra (IND) Marika Werner (GER)
2009 Peter Espersen (DEN) Dorota Grzejdak (POL)

Year Men’s doubles 40+ Women’s doubles 40+

2003 Darrel Roebuck/Jack Webb (ENG) Svetlana Ziiberman/Diana Koleva (ISR/BLR)
2004 Amod Tilak/Milind Ghate Khanittha Maensamut/Nudee Pongkhan (THA)
2007 Eddy Hartono/Suganyanto Hadi Wahono (INA) Kang Chia Yi/Feng Mei Ying (TPE)
2009 Chris Hunt/Nick Ponting (ENG) Vlada Cherniavskaya/Jeanette Kuhl (BLR/SWE)

Year Mixed doubles 40+

2003 Steen Fladberg/Anette Vollertzen ( DEN)
2004 Thomas Herttrick / Uschi Herttrich (GER)
2007 Bernd Schwitzgebel/Petra Teichmann (GER)
2009 Nick Ponting/Julie Bradbury (ENG)

Part III - Section 13 H

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

234
 Results - World Senior Championships

Year Men’s singles 45+ Women’s singles 45+

2003 Tariq Farooq (PAK) Heidi Bender (GER)
2004 Dan Travers (SCO) Heidi Bender (GER)
2007 Chang Wen Sung (TPE) Heidi Bender (GER)
2009 Broddi Kristjansson(DEN) Bettina Villars (SUI)

Year Men’s doubles 45+ Women’s doubles 45+

2003 Steen Fladberg/Claus. B. Andersen (DEN) Andi Stretch/Jackie Hurst (ENG)
2004 Leon Douglas/ Dan Travers (SCO) Christine Black/ Heidi Bende (SCO/GER)
2007 Chang Wen Sung/Huang Cheng Lung (TPE) Heidi Bender/Ellen Aagard (GER/DEN)
2009 Teerachai Jaruwast/Surachai Lone Knudsen/Jeanette Koldso(DEN)
Makkassithorn(THA)

Year Mixed doubles 45+

2003 Dan Travers / Christine Black (SCO)
2004 Dan Travers / Christine Black (SCO)
2007 Bernd Schwitzgebel/Petra Teichmann (GER)
2009 Steve Parry / Kay Vickers (ENG)

Year Men’s singles 50+ Women’s singles 50+

2003 Claus. B. Andersen (DEN) Lis Rathsach (DEN)
2004 Claus. B. Andersen (DEN) Lis Rathsach (DEN)
2007 Yuri Smirnov (RUS) Christine Black (SCO)
2009 Dan Travers (SCO) Svetlana Zilberman Beliasov (ISR)

Year Men’s doubles 50+ Women’s doubles 50+

2003 Edgar /Efried Michalowsky (GER) Inge Odum/ Lis Rathsach (DEN)
2004 Peter Emptage/Claus. B. Andersen (ENG/DEN) Inge Odum/ Lis Rathsach (DEN)
2007 Attakorn Maensamut/Taveesup Waranusat Hwang Hsiu Chi/Chi/Lin Soo (TPE)
(THA)
2009 Steen Fladberg/ Jesper Helledie (DEN) Sugako Morita/Kimiko Morita (JPN

Year Mixed doubles 50+

2003 John Cocker/Betty Bartlett (ENG)
2004 Jeppe Jepsen/Lis Rathsach (DEN)
2007 Dan Travers/Christine Black (SCO)
2009 Jesper Helledie/Svetlana Zilberman Beliasov(DEN/ISR)

Year Men’s singles 55+ Women’s singles 55+

2003 Dave Eddy (ENG) Lumila Ukk (RUS)
2004 John Kirkebye (ENG) Sumiko Kaneko(JPN)
2007 Terje Dag Osthassel (NOR) Pauline Davies (ENG)
2009 Tomoji Matsui(JPN) Angela Michalowsky (GER)

Year Men’s doubles 55+ Women’s doubles 55+

2003 John Kirkebye/Rene Toft (DEN) Heidi Menacher/Traudl Remmele(GER)
2004 John Kirbebye/Soren Haldager (DEN) Yuriko Okemoto/Sumiko Kaneko (JPN)
2007 Suwat Poonumphai/Chaiwat Hanthanom (THA) Sumiko Kaneko/Yuriko Okemoto (JPN)
2009 Peter Emptage/John Gardner(ENG) Betty Bartlett/Pauline Davis (ENG)

Year Mixed doubles 55+

2003 Soren Nielsen/Inge May (DEN)
2004 Toshihiko Yamamoto/Yuriko Okemoto (JPN)
2007 Brian Wallwork/Betty Bartlett (ENG)
2009 Brian Wallwork/Betty Bartlett (ENG)

Part III - Section 13 H

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

235
 Results - World Senior Championships

Year Men’s singles 60+ Women’s singles 60+

2003 Hans Schumacher (GER) Renate Gabriel(GER)
2004 Kim Swee Leong (MAS) NONE
2007 Chaisak Thongdejsri (THA) Sumiko Kaneko (JPN)
2009 Hubert Miranda (IND) Lieselotte Wengberg (SWE)

Year Men’s doubles 60+ Women’s doubles 60+

2003 Bendt Rose/Leif V.Hansen (DEN) Beryl Goodall/Brenda Andrew(ENG)
2004 Kon Kong Ching /Kim Swee Leong (MAS) NONE
2007 Chaisak Thongdejsri/Seri Cintanaseri (THA) Junko Yoneguchi/Keiko Oda (JPN)
2009 Seri Chintanaseri/Chaisak Thongdejsri(THA) Sumiko Kaneko/Yuriko Okemoto (JPN)

Year Mixed doubles 60+

2003 Harry Shadwick/Brenda Andrew (ENG)
2004 Hans Shcumacher/ Renate Gabriel (GER)
2007 Masaki Furuhashi/Junko Yoneguchi (JPN)
2009 Yoshio Terasaki/ Yasuko Kataito(JPN)

Year Men’s singles 65+ Women’s singles 65+

2009 Harry Shadwick (ENG) Renate Knothzsch (GER)

Year Men’s doubles 65+ Women’s doubles 65+

2009 Michael Coley /Harry Shadwick (ENG) Renate Gabriel/ Renate Knotzsch (GER)

Year Mixed doubles 65+

2009 Harry Shadwick/ Brenda Andrew (ENG)

Part III - Section 13 H

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

236
 Results - World Cup

PART III

SECTION 13 I

WORLD CUP - RESULTS

Contest Venue Contest Venue

1981 Kuala Lumpur 1991 Macau
1982 Kuala Lumpur 1992 Guangzhou
1983 Hongkong 1993 New Delhi
1984 Anaheim 1994 Ho Chi Minh City
1985 Jakarta 1995 Jakarta
1986 Jakarta 1996 Jakarta
1987 Kuala Lumpur 1997 Yogyakarta
1988 Bangkok 1998- 2004 No events
1989 Guangzhou 2005 Yiyang
1990 Tokyo 2006 Yiyang

LIST OF CHAMPIONS

Year Men’s singles Women’s singles

1981 Prakash Padukone (IND) Chen Ruizhen (CHN)

1982 Liem Swie King (INA) Lene Køppen (DEN)
1983 Han Jian (CHN) Han Aiping (CHN)
1984 Han Jian (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1985 Icuk Sugiarto (INA) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1987 Zhao Jianhua (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1988 Yang Yang (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1989 Yang Yang (CHN) Susi Susanti (INA)
1990 Alan Budikusuma (INA) Sarwendah Kusumawardhani (INA))
1991 Ardy Wiranata (INA) Huang Hua (CHN)
1992 Joko Suprianto (INA) Tang Jiuhong (CHN)
1993 Alan Budi Kusuma (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1994 Hariyanto Arbi (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1995 Joko Suprianto (INA) Mia Audina Tjiptawan (INA)
1996 Jeffer Rosobin (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1997 Sun Jun (CHN) Susi Susanti (INA)
2005 Lin Dan (CHN) Xie Xingfang (CHN)
2006 Lin Dan (CHN) Wang Yihan (CHN)

Part III – Section 13 I

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3 June 2011

237
 Results - World Cup

Year Men’s doubles Women’s doubles

1984 Liem Swie King / Hariamanto Kartono (INA) Lin Ying / Wu Dixi (CHN)
1986 Liem Swie King / Bobby Ertanto (INA) Li Lingwei / Han Aiping (CHN)
1987 Park Joo-bong / Kim Moon-soo (KOR) Li Lingwei / Han Aiping (CHN)
1988 Li Yongbo / Tian Bingyi (CHN) Lin Ying / Guan Weizhen (CHN)
1989 Park Joo-bong / Kim Moon-soo (KOR) Lin Ying / Guan Weizhen (CHN)
1990 Jalani Sidek / Razif Sidek (MAS) Yao Fen / Lai Caiqin (CHN)
1991 Jalani Sidek / Razif Sidek (MAS) Chung So-young / Hwang Hye-young (KOR)
1992 Cheah Soon Kit / Soo Beng Kiang (MAS) Yao Fen / Lin Yan Fen (CHN)
1993 Ricky Subagja / Rexy Mainaky (INA) Lim Xiaoqing / Christine Magnusson (SWE)
1994 Cheah Soon Kit / Soo Beng Kiang (MAS) Lili Tampi / Finarsih (INA)
1995 Ricky Subagja / Rexy Mainaky (INA) Lili Tampi / Finarsih (INA)
1996 Denny Kantono / Antonius Ariantho (INA) Finarsih / Lili Tampi (INA)
1997 Ricky Subagja / Rexy Mainaky (INA) Ge Fei / Gu Jun (CHN)
2005 Cai Yun / Fu Haifeng (CHN) Yang Wei / Zhang Jiewen (CHN)
2006 Markis Kido / Hendra Setiawan (INA) Gao Ling / Huang Sui (CHN)

Year Mixed doubles

1984 Thomas Kihlström / Nora Perry (SWE /ENG)

1985 Christian Hadinata / Ivana Lie (INA)
1986 Eddy Hartono / Verawaty Fajirn (INA)
1987 Wang Pengren / Shi Fangjing (CHN)
1989 Park Joo-bong / Chung Myung-hee (KOR)
1990 Gunawan / Rosiana Tendean (INA)
1993 Peter Axelsson / Gillian Gowers (SWE /ENG)
1994 Thomas Lund / Catrine Bengtsson (DEN/SWE)
1995 Trikus Heryanto / Minarti Timur (INA)
1996 Sandiarto / Minarti Timur (INA)
1997 Liu Yong / Ge Fei (CHN)
2005 Xie Zhongbo / Zhang Yawen (CHN)
2006 Nova Widianto / Lilyana Natsir (INA)

Part III – Section 13 I

aResuLTs

Updated: 3 June 2011

238
 Results - WGP Finals

PART III

SECTION 13 J

WORLD GRAND PRIX FINALS – RESULTS

Contest Venue Contest Venue Contest Venue

1983 Jakarta 1989 Singapore 1995 Singapore
1984 Kuala Lumpur 1990 Bali 1996 Bali
1985 Tokyo 1991 Kuala Lumpur 1997 Jakarta
1986 Kuala Lumpur 1992 Kuala Lumpur 1998 Brunei
1987 Hong Kong 1993 Kuala Lumpur 1999 Brunei
1988 Hong Kong 1994 Bangkok 2000 Brunei (held 2001)

LIST OF CHAMPIONS

Year Men’s singles Women’s singles

1983 Luan Jin (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)

1984 Morten Frost (DEN) Han Aiping (CHN)
1985 Han Jian (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1986 Yang Yang (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1987 Ziong Guobao (CHN) Li Lingwei (CHN)
1988 Zhang Qingwu (CHN) Han Aiping (CHN)
1989 Xiong Guobao (CHN) Tang Jiuhong (CHN)
1990 Eddy Kurniawan (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1991 Zhao Jianhua (CHN) Susi Susanti (INA)
1992 Rashid Sidek (MAS) Susi Susanti (INA)
1993 Joko Suprianto (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1994 Ardy Wiranata (INA) Susi Susanti (INA)
1995 Joko Suprianto (INA) Ye Zhaoying (CHN)
1996 Fung Permadi (TPE) Susi Susanti (INA)
1997 Sun Jun (CHN) Ye Zhaoying (CHN)
1998 Sun Jun (CHN) Zhang Ning (CHN)
1999 Peter Gade Christensen (DEN) Ye Zhaoying (CHN)
2000 Xia Xuanze (CHN) Zhou Mi (CHN)

Year Men’s doubles
Women’s doubles

1986 Jalani Sidek/Razif Sidek (MAS) Hwang Hye Young/Chung Myung Hee (KOR)
1987 Li Yongbo/Tian Bingyi (CHN) Guan Weizhen/Lin Ying (CHN)
1988 Jalani Sidek/Razif Sidek (MAS) Guan Weizhen/Liu Ying (CHN)
1989 Jalani Sidek/Razif Sidek (MAS) Rosiana Tendean/Erma Sulustianingsih (INA)
1990 Eddy Hartono/Rudy Gunawan (INA) Rosiana Tendean/Erma Sulustianingsih (INA)
1991 Jalani Sidek/Razif Sidek (MAS) Hwang Hye Young/Chung Myung Hee (KOR)
1992 Ricky Subagja/Rexy Mainaky (INA) Lin Yanfen/Yao Fen (CHN)
1993 Rudy Gunawan/Bambang Suprianto (INA) Finarsih/Lili Tampi (INA)
1994 Ricky Subagja/Rexy Mainaky (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
1995 Cheah Soon Kit/Yap Kim Hock (MAS) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
1996 Ricky Subagja/Rexy Mainaky (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
1997 Candra Wijaya/Sigit Budiarto (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
1998 Denny Kantono/Budi Ariantho Antonius (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
1999 Tony Gunawan/Candra Wijaya (INA) Ge Fei/Gu Jun (CHN)
2000 Tony Gunawan/Candra Wijaya (INA) Huang Nanyan/Yang Wei (CHN)

In 1983, 1984 and 1985 there were no doubles events

Part III – Section 13 J

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

239
 Results - WGP Finals

Year Mixed doubles

1986 Nigel Tier/Gillian Gowers (ENG)

1987 Stefan Karlsson/Maria Bengtsson (SWE)
1988 Wang Pengren/Shi Fangjung (CHN)
1989 Eddy Hartono/Verawaty (INA)
1990 Thomas Lund/Pernille Dupont (DEN)
1991 Thomas Lund/Pernille Dupont (DEN)
1992 Thomas Lund/Pernille Dupont (DEN)
1993 Thomas Lund/Catrine Bengtsson (DEN/SWE)
1994 Thomas Lund/Marlene Thomsen (DEN)
1995 Trikus Heryanto/Minarti Timur (INA)
1996 Michael Sogaard/Rikke Olsen (DEN)
1997 Liu Yong/Ge Fei (CHN)
1998 Kim Dong Moon/Ra Kyung Min (KOR)
1999 Kim Dong Moon/Ra Kyung Min (KOR)
2000 Jens Eriksen/Mette Schjoldager (DEN)

In 1983, 1984 and 1985 there were no doubles events

Part III – Section 13 J

aResuLTs

Updated: 3rd June 2011

240
 Results – BWF World SS Masters

PART III

SECTION 13 K

BWF WORLD SUPERSERIES MASTERS – RESULTS

Contest Venue
2008 Kota Kinabalu
2009 Johor Bahru
2010 Taipei

LIST OF CHAMPIONS

Year Men’s singles Women’s singles

2008 Lee Chong Wei (MAS) Zhou Mi (HKG)

2009 Lee Chong Wei (MAS) Wong Mew Choo (MAS)
2010 Lee Chong Wei (MAS) Wang Shixiang (CHN)

Year Men’s Doubles Women’s Doubles

2008 Koo Kien Keat/Tan Boon Heong (MAS) Chin Eei Hui/Wong Pei Tty (MAS)
2009 Lee Yong Dae/Jung Jae Sung (KOR) Chin Eei Hui/Wong Pei Tty (MAS)
2010 Carsten Mogensen/Mathias Boe (DEN) Wang Xiaoli/Yu Yang (CHN)

Year Mixed doubles

2008 Thomas Laybourn/Kamilla Rytter Juhl (DEN)

2009 Joachim Fischer Nielsen/Christinna Pedersen (DEN)
2010 Zhang Nang/Zhao Yunlei (CHN)

Part III – Section 13K

ResuLTsa

Updated: 3rd June 2011

241
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

PART III

SECTION 13 L

YOUTH OLYMPIC GAMES - RESULTS

Year Venue
2010 Singapore
BOY’S SINGLES

POOL A

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN
KANG Ji Wook 57595 KOR CASTILLO Job 93101 MEX 2:0 (21-12, 21-17)
15 AUG
SUN
LAM Zenas 57613 USA CHONGO Ngosa 74887 ZAM 2:0 (21-15, 21-14)
15 AUG
SUN
KANG Ji Wook 57595 KOR CHONGO Ngosa 74887 ZAM 2:0 (21-7, 21-9)
15 AUG
SUN
LAM Zenas 57613 USA CASTILLO Job 93101 MEX 0:2 (18-21, 19-21)
15 AUG
MON
KANG Ji Wook 57595 KOR LAM Zenas 57613 USA 2:0 (21-16, 21-9)
16 AUG
MON
CHONGO Ngosa 74887 ZAM CASTILLO Job 93101 MEX 0:2 (14-21, 10-21)
16 AUG

POOL B

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN
HORIUCHI Kento 23876 JPN SUKAMTA Evert 69546 INA 1:2 (7-21, 21-14, 13-21)
15 AUG
SUN
DJABAR Irfan 33865 SUR PAN Henry 88589 CAN 1:2 (21-12, 21-23, 16-21)
15 AUG
SUN
HORIUCHI Kento 23876 JPN PAN Henry 88589 CAN 2:0 (21-18, 21-10)
15 AUG
SUN
DJABAR Irfan 33865 SUR SUKAMTA Evert 69546 INA 0:2 (4-21, 10-21)
15 AUG
MON
PAN Henry 88589 CAN SUKAMTA Evert 69546 INA 0:2 (17-21, 13-21)
16 AUG
MON
HORIUCHI Kento 33865 SUR DJABAR Irfan 33865 SUR 2:0 (21-11, 21-15)
16 AUG

POOL C

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN HASEENA Sunil CLAEARBOUT
83950 IND 85906 FRA 2:0 (21-15, 21-14)
15 AUG Kumar Pran Lucas
SUN KEOPHIACHAN
85962 LAO COKE Dennis 83055 JAM 2:0 (21-16, 21-11)
15 AUG Phetphanom
SUN HASEENA Sunil
83950 IND COKE Dennis 83055 JAM 2:0 (21-9, 21-10)
15 AUG Kumar Pran
SUN KEOPHIACHAN CLAEARBOUT
85962 LAO 85906 FRA 0:2 (12-21, 8-21)
15 AUG Phetphanom Lucas
MON HASEENA Sunil KEOPHIACHAN
83950 IND 85962 LAO 2:0 (21-11, 21-12)
16 AUG Kumar Pran Phetphanom

MON CLAEARBOUT
COKE Dennis 83055 JAM 85906 FRA 0:2 (6-21, 6-21)
16 AUG Lucas

Part III – Section 13 L

aResuLTs

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

242
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

POOL D

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN LEHIKOINEN
42726 FIN MA Boris 54692 AUS 2:0 (21-4, 21-5)
15 AUG Kasper
SUN KARIYAWASAM
81354 SRI HSIEH Feng-Tse 34812 TPE 0:2 (12-21, 14-21)
15 AUG Dilshan
SUN LEHIKOINEN
42726 FIN HSIEH Feng-Tse 34812 TPE 0:2 (12-21, 14-21)
15 AUG Kasper
SUN KARIYAWASAM
81354 SRI MA Boris 54692 AUS 2:0 (21-14, 21-5)
15 AUG Dilshan
MON LEHIKOINEN KARIYAWASAM
42726 FIN 81354 SRI 2:0 (21-8, 21-8)
16 AUG Kasper Dilshan
MON
HSIEH Feng-Tse 34812 TPE MA Boris 54692 AUS 2:0 21-5, 21-12)
16 AUG

POOL E

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN POODCHALAT QADDOUM
67161 THA 57723 JOR 2:0 (21-3, 21-6)
15 AUG Pisit Mohammad
SUN WESTERBACK
85430 SWE QUACH Flemming 94321 DEN 0:2 (20-22, 9-21)
15 AUG Mikael
MON POODCHALAT
67161 THA QUACH Flemming 94321 DEN 2:0 (21-18, 21-15)
16 AUG Pisit
MON WESTERBACK QADDOUM
85430 SWE 57723 JOR 2:0 (21-4, 21-9)
16 AUG Mikael Mohammad
MON POODCHALAT WESTERBACK
67161 THA 85430 SWE 2:0 (21-13, 21-11)
16 AUG Pisit Mikael
MON QADDOUM
QUACH Flemming 94321 DEN 57723 JOR 2:0 (21-8, 21-13)
16 AUG Mohammad

POOL F

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN ELSAYAD
HUANG Yuxiang 71261 CHN 91759 EGY 2:0 (21-9, 21-13)
15 AUG Mahmoud
BELARBI
SUN
Mohamed 98187 ALG FRANSMAN Nick 48202 NED 0:2 (14-21, 16-21)
15 AUG
Abderahime
MON
HUANG Yuxiang 71261 CHN FRANSMAN Nick 48202 NED 2:0 (21-11 21-14)
16 AUG
BELARBI
MON ELSAYAD
Mohamed 98187 ALG 91759 EGY 0:2 (16-21, 20-22)
16 AUG Mahmoud
Abderahime
BELARBI
MON
HUANG Yuxiang 71261 CHN Mohamed 98187 ALG 2:0 (21-9, 21-11)
16 AUG
Abderahime
MON ELSAYAD
FRANSMAN Nick 48202 NED 91759 EGY 0:2 (16-21, 19-21)
16 AUG Mahmoud

Part III – Section 13 L

ResuLTsa

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

243
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

POOL G

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN
LOH Wei Sheng 99682 MAS GHISLAIN Kelvin 62026 SEY 2:0 (21-8, 21-5)
15 AUG
SUN NGUYEN Huynh
76561 VIE LALE Emre 66694 TUR 0:2 (15-21, 21-23)
15 AUG Thong Thao
MON NGUYEN Huynh
76561 VIE GHISLAIN Kelvin 62026 SEY 2:0 (21-13, 21-11)
16 AUG Thong Thao
MON
LOH Wei Sheng 99682 MAS LALE Emre 66694 TUR 2:0 (21-17, 21-9)
16 AUG
MON NGUYEN Huynh
LOH Wei Sheng 99682 MAS 76561 VIE 2:0 (21-6, 21-12)
16 AUG Thong Thao
MON
LALE Emre 66694 TUR GHISLAIN Kelvin 62026 SEY 2:0 (21-12, 21-16)
16 AUG

POOL H

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN BHAMIDIPATI 1:2 (12-21, 21-18, 17-
42776 IND HUANG Chao 53773 SIN
15 AUG Sai Praneeth 21)
SUN RICHARDSON
CUBA Mario 54555 PER 97075 NZL 2:0 (21-13, 21-18)
15 AUG Asher
MON BHAMIDIPATI RICHARDSON
42776 IND 97075 NZL 2:0 (21-12, 21-12)
16 AUG Sai Praneeth Asher
MON
CUBA Mario 54555 PER HUANG Chao 53773 SIN 0:2 (15-21, 10-21)
16 AUG
MON BHAMIDIPATI
42776 IND CUBA Mario 54555 PER 2:0 (21-12, 21-12)
16 AUG Sai Praneeth
MON RICHARDSON
97075 NZL HUANG Chao 53773 SIN 0:2 (7-21, 8-21)
16 AUG Asher

Part III – Section 13 L

aResuLTs

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

244
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

Knock – Out Draw

Quarter Finals Semi – Finals Final Winner

KANG JW 57595 (1)

KOR

KANG JW 57595
SUKAMTA E 69546 21-11, 14-21, 21-13
INA
HASEENA SUNIL KUMA
83950
HASEENA SUNIL KUMA 19-21, 21-17, 21-17
83950 (3/4) IND
HASEENA SUNIL KUMA
83950
HSIEH F 34812 21-13, 18-21, 24-22
GOLD
TPE

POODCHALAT P 67161
21-15, 21-16

POODCHALAT P 67161
(5/8) THA

POODCHALAT P 67161
HUANG Y 71261 (3/4) 21-16, 21-19
CHN

POODCHALAT P 67161
LOH WS 99682 (5/8) 21-13, 19-21, 21-3 RET
MAS

LOH WS 99682
HUANG C 53773 (2) 21-18, 21-16
SIN

KANG JW 57595 Bronze Medal

KANG JW 57595
WD

LOH WS 99682

Part III – Section 13 L

ResuLTsa

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

245
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

GIRL’S SINGLES
POOL A

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN MATSUMOTO 1:2 (17-21, 21-5,
43851 JPN WENTHOLT Josephine 70560 NED
15 AUG Misaki 19-21)
SUN
WONG Tracy 80933 CAN FOO KUNE Kate 42679 MRI 2:0 (21-17, 21-19)
15 AUG
SUN MATSUMOTO
43851 JPN FOO KUNE Kate 42679 MRI 2:0 (21-4, 21-2)
15 AUG Misaki
SUN
WONG Tracy 80933 CAN WENTHOLT Josephine 70560 NED 0:2 (15-2, 8-21)
15 AUG
MON MATSUMOTO
43851 JPN WONG Tracy 80933 CAN 2:0 (21-11, 21-9)
16 AUG Misaki
MON
FOO KUNE Kate 42679 MRI WENTHOLT Josephine 70560 NED 0:2 (7-21, 12-21)
16 AUG

POOL B

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN
MILNE Sarah 98866 GBR PALERMO Lea 98329 FRA 2:0 (21-11, 21-18)
15 AUG
SUN MATHIS KETPURA Cee
57537 AUT 55438 USA 0:2 (10-21, 9-21)
15 AUG Alexandra Nantana
SUN MATHIS
57537 AUT PALERMO Lea 98329 FRA 0:2 (19-21, 12-21)
15 AUG Alexandra
SUN KETPURA Cee
MILNE Sarah 98866 GBR 55438 USA 2:0 (21-19, 21-19)
15 AUG Nantana
MON
MILNE Sarah 98866 GBR MATHIS Alexandra 57537 AUT 2:0 (21-11, 21-10)
16 AUG
MON KETPURA Cee
55438 USA PALERMO Lea 98329 FRA 2:0 (21-13, 21-13)
16 AUG Nantana

POOL C

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN MARIN
18228 ESP PILVEN Tara 74426 AUS 2:0 (21-8, 21-9)
15 AUG Carolina
SUN VOLKANOVS 0:2 (10-21, 5-
99505 MKD MIKKELA Airi 55770 FIN
15 AUG KA Dragana 21)
SUN MARIN 2:0 (21-8, 21-
18228 ESP MIKKELA Airi 55770 FIN
15 AUG Carolina 11)
SUN VOLKANOVS
99505 MKD PILVEN Tara 74426 AUS 0:2 (7-21, 3-21)
15 AUG KA Dragana
MON MARIN VOLKANOVSKA 2:0 (21-5, 21-
18228 ESP 99505 MKD
16 AUG Carolina Dragana 10)
MON 2:0 (21-18, 21-
MIKKELA Airi 55770 FIN PILVEN Tara 74426 AUS
16 AUG 16)

Part III – Section 13 L

aResuLTs

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

246
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

POOL D

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN
DENG Xuan 62313 CHN WINDER Katherine 54561 PER 2:0 (21-12, 21-5)
15 AUG
SUN SOWARNO
99032 INA CHENG Victoria 59104 NZL 2:0 (21-15, 21-5)
15 AUG Rena
SUN
DENG Xuan 62313 CHN CHENG Victoria 59104 NZL 2:0 (21-9, 21-5)
15 AUG
SUN SOWARNO
99032 INA WINDER Katherine 54561 PER 2:0 (21-9, 21-12)
15 AUG Rena
MON
DENG Xuan 62313 CHN SOWARNO Rena 99032 INA 2:0 (21-11, 21-20)
16 AUG
MON
CHENG Victoria 59104 NZL WINDER Katherine 54561 PER 1:2 (16-21, 21-19, 10-21)
16 AUG

POOL E

NOC BWF NOC

BWF
DATE PLAYER COD PLAYER COD COD SCORE
CODE
E E E
SUN TAERATTANAC TAPUMANAIA
67158 THA 56303 TUV 2:0 (21-1, 21-0)
15 AUG HAI Sapsiree Tiaese
SUN HANDUNKUTTIH
CHIANG Mei-Hui 27588 TPE 96090 SRI 2:0 (21-9, 21-19)
15 AUG ETTIGE Lekha
MON TAERATTANAC HANDUNKUTTIH
67158 THA 96090 SRI 2:0 (21-13, 21-9)
16 AUG HAI Sapsiree ETTIGE Lekha
MON TAPUMANAIA
CHIANG Mei-Hui 27588 TPE 56303 TUV 2:0 (21-1, 21-4)
16 AUG Tiaese
MON TAERATTANAC
67158 THA CHIANG Mei-Hui 27588 TPE 2:0 (21-13, 21-7)
16 AUG HAI Sapsiree
MON HANDUNKUTTIH TAPUMANAIA
96090 SRI 56303 TUV 2:0 (21-1, 21-7)
16 AUG ETTIGE Lekha Tiaese

POOL F

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN
TUNALI Ebru 39255 TUR AZEEZ Fatima 61973 NGR 2:0 (21-9, 21-19)
15 AUG
SUN CHEAH Su Ya UGALDE
18143 MAS 61244 MEX 2:0 (21-14, 21-9)
15 AUG Sonia Mariana
MON CHEAH Su Ya
18143 MAS AZEEZ Fatima 61973 NGR 2:0 (21-7, 21-10)
16 AUG Sonia
MON UGALDE
TUNALI Ebru 39255 TUR 61244 MEX 2:0 (21-11, 21-18)
16 AUG Mariana
MON CHEAH Su Ya
18143 MAS TUNALI Ebru 39255 TUR 2:0 (21-7, 21-9)
16 AUG Sonia
MON UGALDE
AZEEZ Fatima 61973 NGR 61244 MEX 0:2 (19-21, 14-21)
16 AUG Mariana

Part III – Section 13 L

ResuLTsa

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

247
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

POOL G

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN 2:0 (21-10, 21-
DEPREZ Fabienne 21854 GER BANGI Bridget Shamim 83532 UGA
15 AUG 16)
SUN
CLAUSEN Lene 20231 DEN RASHEED Aishath Afnaan 78019 MDV 2:0 (21-2, 21-2)
15 AUG
MON
DEPREZ Fabienne 21854 GER RASHEED Aishath Afnaan 78019 MDV 2:0 (21-5, 21-7)
16 AUG
MON
CLAUSEN Lene 20231 DEN BANGI Bridget Shamim 83532 UGA 2:0 (21-8, 21-7)
16 AUG
MON 1:2 (22-20, 18-21,
DEPREZ Fabienne 21854 GER CLAUSEN Lene 20231 DEN
16 AUG 9-21)
MON RASHEED 1:2 (21-19, 8-21,
78019 MDV BANGI Bridget Shamim 83532 UGA
16 AUG Aishath Afnaan 12-21)

POOL H

BWF NOC BWF NOC

DATE PLAYER PLAYER SCORE
CODE CODE CODE CODE
SUN 1:2 (13-21, 21-18,
VU Thi Trang 17753 VIE CHOE Hye In 47498 KOR
15 AUG 21-12)
SUN FUKUMAN
56251 JPN ZHARKA Yelyzaveta 31614 UKR 2:0 (21-8, 21-8)
15 AUG Naoko
MON FUKUMAN
56251 JPN CHOE Hye In 47498 KOR 0:2 (15-21, 14-21)
16 AUG Naoko
MON
VU Thi Trang 17753 VIE ZHARKA Yelyzaveta 31614 UKR 2:0 (21-16, 21-14)
16 AUG
MON
CHOE Hye In 47498 KOR ZHARKA Yelyzaveta 31614 UKR 2:0 (21-6, 21-11)
16 AUG
MON FUKUMAN 1:2 (15-21, 21-16,
56251 JPN VU Thi Trang 17753 VIE
16 AUG Naoko 10-21)

Part III – Section 13 L

aResuLTs

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

248
 Results – Youth Olympic Games

Knock – Out Draw

Quarter Finals Semi – Finals Final Winner

WENTHOLT J 70560
NED

MILNE S 98866
MILNE S 98866 (5/8) 21-15, 21-8
GBR

DENG X 62313
MARIN C 18228 (3/4) 21-12, 21-12
ESP

DENG X 62313
DENG X 62313 (5/8) 21-12, 21-19 Gold Medal
CHN
TAERATTANACHAI S
67158
21-14, 21-17

TAERATTANACHAI S
67158 (5/8) THA
TAERATTANACHAI S
67158
CHEAH SYS 18143 (3/4) 21-15, 21-6
MAS
TAERATTANACHAI S
67158
21-18, 21-8
CLAUSEN L 20231
DEN

VU TT 17753
VU TT 17753 21-19, 21-13
VIE

MILNE S 98866 (5/8) Bronze Medal

VU TT 17753
21-15, 22-20

VU TT 17753

Part III – Section 13 L

ResuLTsa

Youth Olympic Games

Updated: 3rd June 2011

249